R

FREELANDER 2

15
20
OWNER'S HANDBOOK
d
ite
m
Li
er
ov
R
nd
La
ar
gu
Ja
©

Publication Part No. LRL 10 02 56 151

L
Introduction

ABOUT THIS HANDBOOK

Please take the time to study all of the owner/operator literature supplied with your vehicle as soon
as possible.

IMPORTANT
The information contained in this handbook covers all vehicle derivatives and optional equipment,
some of which may not be fitted to your vehicle. Due to printing cycles, this handbook may include
descriptions of options before they become generally available.
The vehicle options, hardware and software, are designed for the market in which the vehicle is
intended for original sale. If the vehicle is to be registered or used in another geographical area, it

15
may need modifications to suit local requirements. Jaguar Land Rover Limited is not responsible
for the cost of any modifications. Warranty conditions may be affected.

20
The information contained in this publication was correct when it went to print. Subsequent vehicle
design changes may result in a supplement being added to the literature pack. Updates can also be

d
viewed on the Land Rover internet site at: www.ownerinfo.landrover.com.
ite
In the interest of development, the right is reserved to change specifications, design or equipment
m
at any time without notice and without incurring any obligations. This publication, or part thereof,
Li

may not be reproduced nor translated without our approval. Errors and omissions excepted.
er

SYMBOLS USED IN THIS HANDBOOK

ov

Safety warnings indicate either a procedure which must be followed precisely, or

R

information that should be considered with great care, in order to avoid the possibility
nd

of personal injury.
La

Cautions indicate either a procedure which must be followed precisely, or information that
should be considered with great care, in order to avoid the possibility of damage to your
ar

vehicle.
gu

This recycling symbol identifies those items that must be disposed of safely in order to
prevent unnecessary damage to the environment.
Ja

This symbol identifies those items that must be disposed of correctly, as they contain
©

harmful substances. Seek advice on disposal from your Dealer/Authorised Repairer

and/or your local authority.

This symbol identifies those features that can be adjusted, disabled or enabled by your
Dealer/Authorised Repairer.

©Jaguar Land Rover Limited 2013.

All rights reserved. Published by Jaguar Land Rover Limited.

2
 R
Contents

Introduction......................................2 Video media player.........................99

Entering the vehicle..........................4
Exiting the vehicle.............................8
Front seats......................................10
Rear seats.......................................14
Head restraints...............................15
Steering wheel................................16
Seat belts........................................17
Child safety.....................................20
Airbags...........................................26
Voice control.................................101
Telephone.....................................104
Navigation system........................109
Standard audio system.................126
Fuel and refuelling........................137
Maintenance.................................142
Vehicle cleaning............................156
Fluid level checks..........................159
Vehicle battery..............................164

15
Instrument panel.............................31 Fuses............................................169

20
Warning lamps...............................34 Tyres.............................................178
Exterior lights.................................38 Tyre pressure monitoring system

d
Interior lights..................................40
ite
(TPMS).........................................184
Wipers and washers.......................41 Tyre repair kit................................186
m

Mirrors............................................44 Wheel changing............................190

Li

Garage door opener........................46 Vehicle recovery...........................193

er

Windows.........................................49 After a collision.............................196

ov

Touch screen..................................51 Vehicle labels................................197

R

Heating and ventilation...................54 Technical specifications................198

nd

Storage compartments...................58 Type approval...............................207

Load carrying..................................60 Index.............................................220
La

Towing............................................62 Controls overview.........................238

ar

Starting the engine..........................65

gu

Intelligent stop/start........................68
Gearbox..........................................69
Ja

Stability control...............................71
©

Brakes.............................................72
Parking aids....................................74
Cruise control.................................77
Terrain response.............................78
Hill descent control (HDC)..............80
Audio/video overview......................82
Radio..............................................88
DAB radio.......................................90
Portable media................................93

3
L
Entering the vehicle

UNLOCKING THE VEHICLE

15
20
d
ite
m
Li
er
ov
R
nd
La
ar
gu
Ja
©

4

Any implanted medical device should
be kept at a distance, of at least 22 cm
(9 inches) away, from any of the
vehicle transmitters/receivers during
their normal operation. This is to avoid
any possibility of interference between
the vehicle's system and the medical
device. For locations of vehicle
mounted transmitters/receivers, see
204, SMART KEY TRANSMITTER
LOCATIONS.
To prevent accidental operation, never
leave the Smart key in the vehicle if
children or animals are also left in the
vehicle.
Note: The operational range of the Smart key
will vary considerably depending on
atmospheric conditions and interference from
other transmitting devices.
er
Note: If any door or the taildoor is unlocked 10
times within a short period, the latch is disabled
ov
for approximately one minute.
R
1. Lock:
nd
• Press to secure the vehicle. The vehicle
can be Single or Double locked. See
La
8, SINGLE LOCKING. See 8,
ar
DOUBLE LOCKING.
gu
See also 8, GLOBAL CLOSING.
2. Unlock:
Ja
• Press briefly to unlock the vehicle and
©
deactivate the alarm. The hazard
warning lamps will flash twice to
indicate that the vehicle is unlocked and
the alarm has been deactivated. The
interior lamps and puddle lamps will
illuminate to assist entry to the vehicle.
Power-fold mirrors will unfold (if
enabled).
Press and hold to open all of the
windows.
R
Entering the vehicle
• The vehicle will unlock in 1 of 2 ways.
Single-point entry will unlock the
driver's door and fuel filler flap only. A
second press is required to unlock the
remaining doors and taildoor.
Multi-point entry unlocks all doors, the
fuel filler flap, and the taildoor on the
first press.
Single/Multi-point entry may be set via
the Vehicle Set-up menu. See 31,
INSTRUMENT PANEL MENU.
15
3. Taildoor release:
20
• Press briefly to release the taildoor. If
the vehicle is locked and armed, the
d
itesecurity system will remain active while
the taildoor is open, but intrusion and
m
inclination sensing systems will be
disabled.
Li
When closing the taildoor again, if the
vehicle is already locked and armed, the
hazard warning lamps will flash after a
few seconds to confirm the full alarm
system has been reactivated. There will
also be an audible sound if the vehicle
was Double locked.
Make sure the Smart key does not
remain in the vehicle prior to closure. If
the vehicle is in an area of localised
Radio Frequency (RF) interference, or
the Smart key is shielded by metal
objects, the vehicle may close and lock
with no means of opening again.
4. Panic alarm:
• Press and hold for 3 seconds (or press
3 times within 3 seconds) to activate
the horn and the hazard lamps.
• Once active for more than 5 seconds,
the alarm can be cancelled by pressing
the button and holding for 3 seconds
(or pressing 3 times within 3 seconds).
5
L
Entering the vehicle

• The panic alarm will also be cancelled STEERING COLUMN LOCK

if a valid Smart key is present when the
START/STOP button is pressed.
5. Approach illumination:
• When approaching the vehicle during
darkness, press to switch on the
approach illumination. Press again to
turn the approach lamps off. The
approach illumination period set at the
factory is 30 seconds. This delay period
may be configured to provide
The electric steering column lock will
lock/unlock when the vehicle is locked/unlocked.
If any malfunction of the steering column lock
occurs, a message will be displayed in the
Message centre. If this occurs:
1. From the driver's seat, lock and then unlock
the vehicle using the Smart key.
2. Try again to unlock the steering column
lock, by turning the steering wheel gently

15
illumination lasting between 0 and 240 to the left and right while locking and then
seconds. See 31, INSTRUMENT PANEL unlocking the vehicle using the Smart key.

20
MENU. 3. If the problem persists, seek qualified
assistance.

d
Note: In some markets, a second press of ite
the button will turn on the headlamps and
reversing lamps. A third press will be DRIVE-AWAY LOCKING
m
required to turn the lamps off. Drive-away locking automatically locks all of
Li

6. Emergency key access: Slide open the side the doors when the vehicle is in motion. This
er

cover. feature can be enabled/disabled via the Vehicle

ov

7. Remove the emergency key blade and Set-up menu (see 31, INSTRUMENT PANEL
unfold. MENU).
R

8. Fully insert the emergency key blade to Note: Pressing the lock or unlock button on the
nd

remove the cover. Smart key will override Drive-away locking for
the current journey.
La

9. Fully insert the emergency key blade into

the lock and rotate to unlock the door.
ar

10. Fully insert the emergency key blade into

gu

the lock cover.

Ja

11. Locate the rear of the lock cover using the

tabs and close the cover.
©

12. Remove the emergency key blade from the

cover.
Note: When the door is opened, the alarm will
begin to sound. To silence the alarm, dock the
Smart key.
The vehicle can also be locked and unlocked,
from inside the vehicle, by pressing the
appropriate button mounted on the centre
console.

6
 R
Entering the vehicle

REMOTE KEY FOB BATTERY Battery disposal: Batteries contain

REPLACEMENT
When the battery needs replacing, there will be
a significant decrease in the effective range and
a message will be displayed in the Message
centre.
harmful substances and must be
disposed of correctly. Seek advice
on disposal from a
Dealer/Authorised Repairer and/or
your local authority.

15
20
d
ite
m
Li
er
ov
R
nd
La

To replace the battery:

ar

1. Remove the cover by sliding in the

gu

directions of the arrows.

2. Use the emergency key blade to separate
Ja

the Smart key body.

©

3. Fit a new and unused CR2032 type battery

(available from a Dealer/Authorised
Repairer) with the positive (+) side upwards.
Note: Avoid touching the new battery.
Moisture/oil from fingers can reduce battery life
and corrode the contacts.
Refit the parts in reverse order, making sure
they click securely into place.

7
L
Exiting the vehicle
SINGLE LOCKING
Press the lock button on the Smart key briefly
to Single lock the vehicle. The hazard warning
lamps will flash to confirm. Single locking
secures the vehicle and prevents the doors from
being opened from outside. The doors may still
be unlocked and opened from inside the vehicle.
In this state, only the perimeter alarm is
activated.
Note: This setting should be used in
circumstances, such as travelling on a ferry,
when pets are to be left in the vehicle, or if a
window must be left open, etc.
Note: The fuel filler flap can only be opened
when the vehicle is unlocked.
PERIMETER ALARM
When activated, the perimeter alarm will sound
if:
• The bonnet, taildoor, or a door are opened.
ov
• The vehicle's battery is disconnected.
R
• An attempt is made to disconnect the siren
nd
from the alarm system.
La
DOUBLE LOCKING
ar
Never Double lock the vehicle with
gu
people, children, or pets inside. In the
event of an emergency, they would be
Ja
unable to escape and the emergency
services would be unable to release
©
them quickly.
Press the lock button twice briefly, to Double
lock the vehicle. Double locking secures the
vehicle and prevents the doors from being
opened from inside or outside of the vehicle.
The doors cannot be unlocked or opened from
inside the vehicle when Double locked.
8
This provides additional security if the vehicle
is left unattended. The vehicle cannot be opened
by breaking a window and operating the door
locks from inside.
Additionally, Double locking also activates the
full alarm system.
Note: The fuel filler flap can only be opened
when the vehicle is unlocked.
FULL ALARM
When activated, the full alarm will sound if:
15
• The bonnet, taildoor, or a door are opened.
20
• Movement is detected within the vehicle's
interior.
d
ite
• A window, front or rear windscreen, or the
sunroof glass are broken.
m
• The vehicle is raised or tilted.
Li
• The vehicle's battery is disconnected.
er
• An attempt is made to disconnect the alarm
system.
Note: In this state, an open window or sunroof
will cause the alarm to sound due to the
movement of air currents. For this reason, make
sure all of the windows and the sunroof are fully
closed before Double locking the vehicle.
GLOBAL CLOSING
Make sure no children, pets, or
obstructions are in any open aperture
before operating global closing. Safety
mechanisms are in place to prevent
serious injury, however, injuries can
still occur.
Note: For safety reasons, the sunroof does not
close automatically. It should be closed in the
normal way before exiting the vehicle.
 R
Exiting the vehicle

Press and hold the lock button on the Smart

key for 3 seconds. The vehicle will Single lock
and the full alarm will be activated immediately.
After 3 seconds, any open windows will be
closed.

DOOR LOCKS AND RELEASE LEVERS

15
20
d
ite
m
Li

From inside the vehicle, all of the doors can be

er

locked by pressing either the driver or

ov

passenger lock lever (1).

R

Each rear door can be individually locked by

pressing the appropriate locking lever.
nd

To unlock and open a front door, pull the door

La

handle (2). To unlock and open a rear door, first

operate the lock lever, then pull the door handle.
ar
gu

MISLOCK
Ja

When locking the vehicle with the Smart key, a

mislock can occur if:
©

• One or more of the doors, the bonnet or the

taildoor is not fully closed.
• The ignition is ON.
• A Smart key is left in the vehicle.
If any of the above are present, the vehicle will
fail to lock and the horn will sound. Check that
all of the doors, the bonnet and the taildoor are
closed properly and lock the vehicle again. If
the mislock persists, consult your
Dealer/Authorised Repairer.

9
L
Front seats

MANUAL SEATS

15
20
d
ite
m
Li

Do not adjust the seat while the vehicle

er

is moving. Doing so could cause loss

of vehicle control and personal injury.
ov

1. Forward and rearward adjustment.

R

2. Height adjustment.
nd

3. Seat back adjustment.

La
ar
gu
Ja
©

10
 R
Front seats

ELECTRIC SEATS

15
20
d
ite
m
Li
er
ov
R
nd
La
ar
gu
Ja
©

Do not adjust the seat while the vehicle
is moving. Doing so could cause loss
of vehicle control and personal injury.
1. Cushion angle adjustment.
2. Forward and rearward adjustment.
3. Height adjustment.
4. Seat back adjustment.

11
L
Front seats

5. Lumbar support (electric) adjustment.
6. Lumbar support (manual) adjustment.
7. Armrest adjustment.
RESTRICTED SEAT TRAVEL
If seat movement stops unexpectedly
during adjustment, check for, and
remove, any obstructions.
Once any obstructions have been removed, the
seat adjustment mechanism can be reset as
Do not adjust the seat while the vehicle
is moving.
The seat, head restraint, seat belt and airbags,
all contribute to the protection of the user.
Correct use of these components will give you
greater protection; therefore, you should always
observe the following points:
1. Sit in an upright position with the base of
your spine as far back as possible. To
achieve optimum benefit of the seat belt in
the event of an accident, do not recline the

15
follows: seat excessively.
Operate the button again to continue the stalled

20
2. Do not move the driver's seat too close to
adjustment and hold in that position for 2 the steering wheel. Ideally, a minimum
seconds. When the movement resumes, hold

d
distance of 254 mm (10 inches) is
ite
the button until the end of travel in that direction recommended between the breastbone and
has been reached. The seat position can now the steering wheel airbag cover. Hold the
m
be carried out, as normal. steering wheel in the correct position, with
Li

Note: If no obstructions can be seen, but normal your arms slightly bent.
er

adjustment cannot be carried out without 3. Adjust the head restraint so that the top of
stalling, contact your Dealer/Authorised
ov

the head restraint is the same height as the

Repairer. top of the head.
R

4. Position the seat belt so that it is midway

nd

SITTING IN THE CORRECT POSITION between your neck and your shoulder. Fit
the strap tightly across your hips; not
La

across your stomach.

ar

Make sure that your driving position is

gu

comfortable and enables you to maintain full

control of the vehicle.
Ja
©

The driver and front seat passenger

must not ride with the seat fully
reclined.

12
 R
Front seats

DRIVING POSITION MEMORY

Once you have adjusted the power-operated
driver's seat and exterior mirrors (see 44,
EXTERIOR MIRRORS), the vehicle can
memorise these settings for future use.

15
20
d
ite
m
1. Press the memory store (MEM) button to
Li

activate the memory function.

er

2. Press one of the preset buttons within 5

seconds to memorise the current settings.
ov

MEMORY (1, 2 or 3) SETTINGS SAVED will

R

be displayed in the Message centre,

nd

accompanied by an audible chime to

confirm that the settings have been
La

memorised.
3. To recall a stored position, press the
ar

relevant preset button. MEMORY (1, 2 OR

gu

3) RECALLED will be displayed in the

Message centre.
Ja

A seat position will only be memorised during

©

the 5 second active period.

Any existing settings will be overwritten when
programming a memory position.

13
L
Rear seats

FOLDING AND RAISING THE REAR SEATS

15
20
d
ite
m
Always make sure that objects carried
within the vehicle are secured
Li

properly.
er

Never allow passengers to travel in the

ov

loadspace, under any circumstances.

All vehicle occupants should be seated
R

correctly, and should wear a seat belt

nd

at all times when the vehicle is in

motion.
La

Make sure that when the seatback is

ar

raised, the locking mechanism is fully

gu

engaged. If the seatbacks are not fully

locked in place, red markers will be
Ja

visible around the seatback buttons.

The split folding rear seat can be folded
©

completely to accommodate large loads, or

partially to accommodate large loads and still
retain seating for passengers.
Fold part or all of the seat as follows:
1. Pull the strap on the required cushion(s),
to raise to the vertical position.
2. Fully lower the head restraints.
3. Press the seatback release button(s), then
lower the seatback(s) until locked into place.

14
 R
Head restraints

HEAD RESTRAINTS Head restraints may be removed, if required

Adjust the head restraint so that the
top of the head restraint is above the
centre line of the head. An incorrectly
adjusted head restraint increases the
risk of death or serious injury in the
event of a collision.
Do not drive, or carry passengers with
the head restraints removed from
occupied seats. The absence of a
correctly adjusted head restraint
(for example, to fit larger child seats). Raise the
head restraint to its uppermost position and
press the locking collar. Lift the restraint out of
the seatback.
Make sure the head restraint is refitted before
the seat is used by a passenger.
To refit the head restraint, make sure it is facing
the correct direction; insert the stems of the
head restraint into the sockets and push it
downwards until at least the first click.

15
increases the risk of neck injury in the Note: See 20, CHILD SEATS, for details on
event of a collision.

20
correct child restraint fitment.
Never adjust the head restraints while

d
the vehicle is in motion. ite
Always store a removed head restraint
m
securely.
Li
er
ov
R
nd
La
ar
gu
Ja
©

1. Press the locking collar to release the head

restraint.
2. While pressing the locking collar, move the
head restraint up or down to the required
position.

15
L
Steering wheel

ADJUSTING THE STEERING WHEEL HEATED STEERING WHEEL

15
20
d
ite
Press to switch on the steering wheel heating.
Press again to turn off.
m
Li
er
ov
R

Never adjust the steering column while

nd

the vehicle is in motion.

La

1. Move the lever fully down to unlock the

column.
ar

2. Move the steering column up, down, in or

gu

out, to the desired position.

Ja

3. Move the lever fully up to re-lock the

column.
©

16

USING THE SEAT BELTS
1. PUTTING ON A SEAT BELT: Draw the belt
er
out smoothly and make sure the belt height,
the seat, and your position on the seat, are
ov
correct.
R
WARNING: Seatbelts are designed to
nd
bear upon the bony structure of the
body, and should be worn low across
La
the front of the pelvis or the pelvis,
chest and shoulders, as applicable;
ar
wearing the lap section of the belt
gu
across the abdominal area must be
avoided.
Ja
Seatbelts should be adjusted as firmly
©
as possible, consistent with comfort,
to provide the protection for which they
have been designed. A slack belt will
greatly reduce the protection afforded
to the wearer.
Belts should not be worn with straps
twisted.
R
Seat belts
15
20
d
ite
m
Li
Each belt assembly must only be used
by one occupant; it is dangerous to put
a belt around a child being carried on
the occupant's lap.
The occupants of the front seats should
not travel with the seatback at more
than 30 degrees from the upright.
Doing so will reduce the protection
afforded by the seat belt.
Never place anything between you and
the seat belt. It can be dangerous and
reduce the effectiveness of the seat
belt in preventing injury.
2. FASTENING A SEAT BELT: With the seat
belt correctly positioned, place the metal
tongue into the buckle nearest to you. Press
it in until a click is heard. To release the seat
belt, press the red button.
Note: When releasing the seat belt, it is
advisable to hold the belt before pressing
the release button. This will prevent the belt
from retracting too quickly.
17
L
Seat belts
3. SEAT BELT USE DURING PREGNANCY:
Position the lap strap comfortably across
the hips, beneath the abdomen. Place the
diagonal part of the seat belt between the
breasts and to the side of the abdomen, as
illustrated at the beginning of this section.
Position the seat belt correctly for the
safety of the mother and unborn child.
Never wear just the lap strap and never
sit on the lap strap while using just the
shoulder strap. Both of these actions
are extremely dangerous, and may
increase your risk of serious injury in
the event of an accident or during
emergency braking.
Never place anything between you and
the seat belt in an attempt to cushion
the impact in the event of an accident.
It can be dangerous, and will reduce
the effectiveness of the seat belt in
er
preventing injury.
ov
Make sure the seat belt is not slack or
R
twisted.
nd
4. SEAT BELT HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT: Use
your finger to press the release catch. Raise
La
and lower the mechanism to the required
height. Make sure the locking mechanism
ar
has engaged.
gu
When correctly positioned, the seat belt
should cross the collar bone at the
Ja
mid-point between the neck and the end of
©
your shoulder. Where possible, rear seat
passengers should adjust their seating
position to achieve the same seat belt
position.
Make sure the height is correctly
adjusted and the mechanism is locked
in place before driving.
The use of comfort clips or devices that
would create slack in the seat belt
system, is not advised.
18
WARNING: No modifications or
additions should be made by the user
which will either prevent the seat belt
adjusting devices from operating to
remove slack, or prevent the seat belt
assembly from being adjusted to
remove slack.
SEAT BELT SAFETY
Care should be taken to avoid
contamination of the webbing with
15
polishes, oils and chemicals, and
particularly battery acid. Cleaning may
20
safely be carried out using mild soap
and water. The belt should be replaced
d
if webbing becomes frayed,
ite
contaminated or damaged.
m
It is essential to replace the entire
Li
assembly after it has been worn in a
severe impact even if damage to the
assembly is not obvious.
If any damage, wear, cuts, defects, or
impaired operation are noted with the
seat belts, the vehicle should be taken
to a Dealer/Authorised Repairer for
immediate attention. Do not use the
vehicle if the seat belts cannot be
operated correctly.
Do not carry hard, fragile, or sharp
items between your person and the
seat belt.
Seat belts should be worn by all
vehicle occupants, for every journey
no matter how short.
Never wear just the lap belt or just the
shoulder belt of a lap/shoulder
diagonal seat belt. Both of these
actions are extremely dangerous and
may increase your risk of injury.

When using seat belts to restrain items
other than occupants, make sure the
belts are not damaged, or exposed to
sharp edges.
SEAT BELT CHECKS
Note: If the vehicle is parked on an incline, the
seat belt mechanism may lock. This is not a
fault and the belt should be gently eased out
from the upper anchorage.
The seat belts should be inspected regularly to
check for fraying, cuts, wear to the webbing,
and the condition and security of the
mechanism, buckles, adjusters, and mounting
points.
• With the seat belt fastened, give the
webbing near the buckle a quick upward
pull. The buckle must remain securely
locked.
er
• With the seat belt unfastened, unreel the
ov
seat belt to the limit of its travel. Check that
it unreels smoothly with no snatches or
R
snags. Allow the belt to fully retract, again
nd
checking for smooth operation.
La
• Partially unreel the seat belt, then hold the
tongue plate and give a quick forward pull.
ar
The mechanism must lock and prevent any
further unreeling.
gu
If any of the seat belts fail to meet those criteria,
Ja
immediately contact your Dealer/Authorised
Repairer.
©
SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONERS
The seat belt pre-tensioners activate in
conjunction with the Supplementary Restraint
System (SRS) to provide additional protection
in the event of a severe frontal impact. They
automatically reduce any slack in a seat belt, to
reduce forward movement of a front seat
occupant.
R
Seat belts
The seat belt pre-tensioners will
activate only once and then must be
replaced. Failure to replace them will
reduce the effectiveness of the SRS in
reducing the risk of serious injury or
death in the event of an accident.
After any impact, have the seat belts
and pre-tensioners checked and, if
necessary, replaced by a
Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
15
SEAT BELT REMINDER
20
The Seat belt reminder commences when the
vehicle is motion and the driver's belt is
d
unbuckled. Dependent on the market, the
ite
warning indicator in the Instrument panel
illuminates, and an audible chime sounds. See
m
35, SEAT BELT (RED).
Li
The visual and audible warnings applicable to
the Seat belt reminder feature are market
dependent to meet individual market
requirements. The warning signals given may
also change depending on whether the vehicle
is stationary or when the vehicle's speed
exceeds a predetermined threshold. In certain
markets, the Seat belt reminder feature also
applies to the front passenger seat.
Note: Objects placed on the front passenger
seat may activate the seat belt warning lamp
and chime. It is recommended that any objects
placed on the front passenger seat are secured
using the seat belt. See 35, SEAT BELT (RED).
19
L
Child safety
CHILD SAFETY LOCKS
CHILD SAFETY LOCKS: If children are to be
carried in the rear seat positions, it is
recommended that the rear door interior handles
are disabled.
er
To change the child lock settings:
ov
• Open the door to access the child safety
R
lock.
• Insert the emergency key into the slot, and
nd
rotate a quarter of a turn to enable or
La
disable the interior door handle, as required.
ar
CHILD SEATS
gu
For optimum safety, children should
Ja
travel in the rear of the vehicle at all
times; front passenger seat travel is
©
not recommended. However, if it is
essential that a child travels in the
front (not permitted in Australia), set
the vehicle's seat fully rearward and
seat the child in an approved
forward-facing child seat. Do not use
a rear-facing child seat - an inflating
airbag could impact with the seat and
cause serious injury.
20
Do not use a forward-facing child seat
until the child using it is above the
minimum weight of 9 kg (20 lb.) and
able to sit up unaided. Up to the age
of 2, a child's spine and neck are not
sufficiently developed to avoid injury
in a frontal impact.
Do not allow a baby or infant to be held
or carried on the lap. The force of a
crash can increase effective body
weight by as much as thirty times,
15
making it impossible to hold onto the
child.
20
Children typically require the use of a
booster seat appropriate to their age
d
ite
and size, thereby enabling the seat
belts to be properly fitted, reducing the
m
risk of injury in a crash. Children could
Li
be endangered in a crash if their child
restraints are not properly secured in
the vehicle.
Do not use a child seat that hooks over
the seatback. This type of seat cannot
be satisfactorily secured and is unlikely
to be safe for your child.
The seat belts fitted to your vehicle are designed
for adults and larger children. For their safety,
it is very important for all infants and children
under 12 years of age to be restrained in a
suitable child safety seat appropriate to their
age and size.
If it is essential that a child travels in the front
passenger seat (and national legislation permits
this), Land Rover recommends that the
following preparations are made before fitting
the child restraint:
• Disable the front passenger airbag.
• Adjust the front passenger seat fully
rearwards.
• Adjust the lumbar support to its minimum
support position.
 R
Child safety

• Adjust the seat cushion to its highest

position. If cushion rake adjustment is
possible, adjust it to its lowest position.
• Adjust the seatback to the fully upright
position.
• Adjust the seat belt adjustable upper
anchorage to its lowest position.
Extreme hazard! Do not use a rearward
facing child restraint on a seat This symbol is fixed to the passenger side
protected by an airbag in front of it! sun-visor.
NEVER use a rearward facing child

15
restraint on a seat protected by an CHILD SEAT POSITIONING

20
ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or Information given within the table is
SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can correct at the time of going to press.

d
occur. iteHowever, availability of child restraints
The following symbols warn against the use of may change. Please consult your
m
a rear-facing child seat in the front passenger Dealer/Authorised Repairer for the latest
Li

seat, when a front passenger airbag is fitted and recommendation.

is operational. Note: The information contained in the following
er

table may not be applicable to all countries. If

ov

you are in any doubt regarding the type and

R

fitment of child seats, seek advice from your

Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
nd

Crash statistics show that children are

La

safest when properly restrained in a

child or infant restraint system that is
ar

secured in a rear seating position.

gu

This symbol is fixed to the end of the fascia on Note: Ages given are approximate. In case of
doubt, the child’s weight, not age, should be
Ja

the passenger side.

used when considering an appropriate child
©

seat.
Note: The legislation which governs how and
where children should be carried when travelling
in a vehicle is subject to change. It is the
responsibility of the driver to comply with all
regulations in force.

21
L
Child safety

Mass group 0 = Up to 10 kg 0+ = Up to 13 I = 9-18 kg II = 15-25 kg III = 25-36 kg

(22 lb) kg (29 lb) (20-40 lb) (33-55 lb) (55-80 lb)
0-9 months 0-18 months 9 months to 4 4-9 years 8-12 years
years
Seating
positions
Front UF* UF* U* U* U*
passenger*
Rear outboard U U U U U
Rear centre U U U U U

15
20
* Always make sure the passenger airbag has • Make sure all slack is removed from the
been disabled before using a child restraint in adult seat belt.

d
this seating position. The seatback needs to be •
ite
Always attach the top tether when installing
adjusted to the fully upright position. an ISOFIX seat.
m
• U = Suitable for universal category • Always check the security of the child
Li

restraints approved for this mass group. restraint.

er

• UF = Suitable for forward-facing universal • Do not dress a child in bulky clothing, or

ov

category restraints approved for this mass place any objects/padding between the child
group. and the restraint.
R

• Regularly check the fit and condition of child

nd

RECOMMENDED CHILD SEATS restraints. If the fit is poor, or wear/damage

La

Child size/age Recommended seat is visible, replace the restraint immediately.

Groups 0 and 0+ Britax/Römer Baby • Set a good example - always wear your seat
ar

Safe Plus belt.

gu

WARNING: Child restraint anchorages

Group I Britax/Römer Duo Plus
are designed to withstand only those
Ja

Group II and III Britax/Römer Kid Plus loads imposed by correctly fitted child
restraints. Under no circumstances are
©

CHILD RESTRAINT CHECK LIST
Every time a child travels in the vehicle, observe
the following:
• Use appropriate child restraints.
• Carefully follow the restraint system
manufacturer's instructions.
• Adjust the harnesses for every child on
every trip.
they to be used for adult seat belts,
harnesses or for attaching other items
or equipment to the vehicle.
ISOFIX ANCHOR POINTS
Do not attempt to fit ISOFIX restraints
to the centre rear seating position. The
anchor bars are not designed to hold
an ISOFIX restraint in this position.

22
 R
Child safety

If the restraint is not correctly This symbol is shown on a label

anchored, there is a significant risk of sewn into the seats to indicate the
injury to the child in the event of a position of the ISOFIX lower
collision or emergency braking. anchorages.
Both of the outer seat positions on the rear seat
are equipped to accept ISOFIX restraints.
Mass group as shown on child restraint Size classes Fixtures Rear outboard seats
Carrycot F/G ISO L1/L2 X
0 = Up to 10 kg (22 lb) 0-9 months E ISO R1 IL*
0+ = Up to 13 kg (29 lb) 0-18 months C/D/E ISO R1/R2/R3 IL*

15
I = 9 to 18 kg (20 to 40 lb) 9 months - C/D ISO R2/R3 X

20
4 years A/B1/B ISO F2/F2X/F3 IUF

d
II = 15 to 25 kg (33 to 55 lb) 4-9 years N/A N/A
ite N/A
III = 25 to 36 kg (55 to 80 lb) 8-12 years N/A N/A N/A
m
Li

• IUF = Suitable for ISOFIX forward child

INSTALLING ISOFIX CHILD
er

restraint systems of universal category

approved for use in the mass group. RESTRAINTS
ov

• IL = These ISOFIX child restraint systems

R

are of the specific vehicle, restricted or

nd

semi-universal categories.
La

• X = Not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint

fitment in this mass group.
ar

• * = Child seat suitable for use in these

gu

locations, is the Britax/Römer Baby Safe

Plus ISOFIX.
Ja

Note: Ages given are approximate. In case of

doubt, the child’s weight, not age, should be
©

used when considering an appropriate child

seat.
Note: The information contained in the table
may not be applicable to all countries. If you
are in any doubt regarding the type and fitment
of child seats, seek advice from your
Dealer/Authorised Repairer.

To install an ISOFIX child seat:

23
L
Child safety

1. Raise or remove the head restraint. See 15,
HEAD RESTRAINTS.
2. Locate the ISOFIX locking mechanism.
3. Slide the child seat into the locking
mechanism.
4. Test the security of the child restraint. To
do this, attempt to pull the restraint away
from the vehicle's seat and twist the
restraint from side to side. Even if the
restraint appears secure, check the anchor
points visually to make sure of correct
Note: A tether anchorage is provided for the
centre seat position. Do not use this anchor
position with an ISOFIX child seat.
INSTALLING TETHER ANCHORAGE
CHILD RESTRAINTS
Child restraint anchorages are
designed to withstand only those loads
imposed by correctly fitted child
restraints. Under no circumstances are
they to be used for adult seat belts,

15
fitment. harnesses, or for attaching other items
or equipment to the vehicle.

20
Note: ISOFIX child restraints are only fitted to
the second row of seats. Always follow the child seat or restraint

d
system manufacturer’s instructions
Note: Always make sure that if an upper tether ite
when fitting tether straps.
is provided, it is fitted and tightened correctly.
m
When fitting a child seat or restraint
Li

TETHER ANCHORAGE POINTS system, always pass the tether strap

over the top of the seatback and
er

Child restraint anchorages are beneath the head restraint.

designed to withstand only those loads
ov

imposed by correctly fitted child If a child seat or restraint system is to

R

restraints. Under no circumstances are be fitted to the centre seating position,

the centre armrest must be in the
nd

they to be used for adult seat belts,

harnesses, or for attaching other items stowed position (folded into the seat).
La

or equipment to the vehicle. Your vehicle is equipped with anchorage points

Always follow the child seat or restraint on the back of the second row seat frames.
ar

system manufacturer’s instructions These should be used to attach straps from

gu

when fitting tether straps. child seats or restraint systems.

Ja

When fitting a child seat or restraint

system, always pass the tether strap
©

over the top of the seatback and

beneath the head restraint.
If a child seat or restraint system is to
be fitted to the centre seating position,
the centre armrest must be in the
stowed position (folded into the seat).
Your vehicle is equipped with anchorage points
on the back of the second row seat frames.
These should be used to attach straps from
child seats or restraint systems.

24
 R
Child safety

15
20
d
ite
m
Li

1. Install the child restraint securely in one of

er

the rear seating positions.

ov

2. Pass the tether strap over the seatback and

R

beneath the head restraint.

3. Attach the tether strap hook to the tether
nd

anchor point on the back of the seat. Make

La

sure the tether strap hook is facing the

correct way (see illustration).
ar

4. Tighten the tether strap according to the

gu

manufacturer's instructions.
Ja

BOOSTER SEATS
©

In a situation where a child is too large to fit

into a child safety seat, but is still too small to
safely use just the 3-point belt, a booster seat
is recommended for maximum safety. Follow
the manufacturer's instructions for fitting and
use, and adjust the seat belt to suit.

25
L
Airbags

AIRBAGS

15
20
d
ite
m
Li
er
ov
R
nd

1. Passenger front airbag.

2. Side airbags. FRONT AIRBAGS
La

3. Main curtain airbag. The front passenger and driver airbags are able
to deploy in 2 stages, depending on the severity
ar

4. Driver’s front airbag. of the frontal impact. In a severe impact, the

gu

5. Knee bolster airbag. airbags inflate fully to offer maximum

protection. In a lesser impact, full deployment
Ja

Note: The general location of airbags fitted to

the vehicle are marked by the word AIRBAG. is not required, so the airbags are partially
©

inflated. The knee bolster airbag will always fully

Always contact your Dealer/Authorised Repairer
inflate.
if:
• An airbag inflates.
SIDE AND CURTAIN AIRBAGS
• The front or sides of the vehicle are
The seat mounted side airbags are designed to
damaged.
protect the thorax region of the torso and will
• Any part of the Airbag Supplementary deploy only in the event of a side impact and
Restraint System (SRS) shows signs of then, only on the side of the impact.
cracking or damage, including trim covering
airbags.
• The amber airbag warning lamp illuminates.

26

The curtain airbags are deployed in side impact
and rollover events, providing greater protection
from serious head injuries. They deflate at a
slower rate than the front or side airbags.
AIRBAG OPERATION
For the airbags to operate correctly,
the roof lining and door post trims must
be in good condition, correctly fitted,
and free from obstruction. Any
damage, wear, or incorrect fitment
should be referred to your
Dealer/Authorised Repairer as soon as
possible for examination and repair.
Do not allow passengers to obstruct
the operation of the airbags by placing
any part of their person, or any objects,
in contact with, or close to, an airbag
module. Only use approved
er
accessories (e.g., seat covers).
ov
Make sure a gap is maintained
between the side of the vehicle, and
R
the head and torso. This will enable
nd
unobstructed inflation of the curtain,
and seat mounted side airbags.
La
Airbags inflate at high speeds. To
minimise the risk of injury, make sure
ar
all vehicle occupants wear correctly
gu
positioned seat belts, sit correctly in
Ja
the seats, and position the seats as far
back as is practical.
©
Airbag inflation takes place
instantaneously, and cannot protect
against the effects of secondary
impacts. Under these circumstances,
the only protection will be provided by
a correctly worn seat belt.
R
Airbags
Phone systems should only be installed
by qualified persons familiar with the
operation of, and requirements for,
vehicles fitted with SRS. If you are in
any doubt, seek advice from your
Dealer/Authorised repairer.
Airbag deployment is dependent on the rate at
which the passenger compartment changes
velocity following the collision. Circumstances
affecting different collisions (vehicle speed,
angle of impact, type and size of object hit, etc.),
15
vary considerably and will affect the rate of
deceleration accordingly.
20
Airbags cannot deploy correctly if they are
obstructed. Examples of obstructions are:
d
•
ite
Any part of an occupants body in contact
with, or close to, an airbag cover.
m
• Objects placed on, or close to, an airbag
Li
cover.
• Clothing, sun screens, or other material
hanging from grab handles.
• Clothing, cushions, or other material,
covering seat mounted airbags.
• Seat covers which are not approved by Land
Rover, or specifically designed for use with
seat mounted airbags.
This list is not exhaustive, and it remains the
responsibility of the driver and passengers to
make sure the airbags are not obstructed in any
way.
Note: The airbags and SRS are not designed to
operate as a result of:
• Rear impacts.
• Minor front impacts.
• Minor side impacts.
• Heavy braking.
• Driving over bumps and pot holes.
27
L
Airbags
High speed impacts may cause serious
injury or death, irrespective of safety
features fitted to a vehicle.
The airbag SRS cannot provide
protection in some types of impact.
Under these circumstances, the only
protection will be provided by a
correctly worn seat belt.
AIRBAG DEPLOYMENT EFFECTS
When an airbag inflates, a fine powder
is released. This is normal and not an
indication of a malfunction. The
powder may cause irritation to the skin
and should be thoroughly flushed from
eyes and any cuts or abrasions.
Airbags inflate at high speed and can
cause injuries. To minimise the risk of
injury, make sure all occupants wear
er
correctly positioned seat belts, sit
ov
correctly in the seats and position the
seats as far back as is practical.
R
Airbag deployment is accompanied by
nd
a very loud noise, which may cause
discomfort and temporary loss of
La
hearing.
ar
After inflation, some airbag
components will be very hot. Do not
gu
touch the airbag components until they
Ja
have cooled sufficiently.
©
AIRBAG WARNING LAMP
The airbag warning indicator is mounted in the
Instrument panel, and will illuminate as a bulb
check when the ignition is turned on. See 36,
AIRBAG (AMBER).
If the warning lamp indicates that a
fault is present in the system, do not
use a child restraint on the front
passenger seat.
28
If any of the following warning indicator
conditions occur, the vehicle should be checked
by your Dealer/Authorised Repairer immediately:
• The warning indicator fails to illuminate
when the ignition is turned on.
• The warning indicator fails to extinguish
within 6 seconds of the ignition being
turned on.
• The warning indicator illuminates at any
time other than the bulb check, when the
ignition is turned on.
15
When the ignition is turned on, a diagnostic
20
control unit monitors the readiness of the
system's electrical circuits. The elements of the
d
Supplementary Restraint System (SRS) being
ite
monitored include:
m
• SRS warning indicator.
Li
• Rotary coupler.
• Airbag modules.
• Seat belt pre-tensioners (front seats).
• Front seat buckle switches.
• Airbag diagnostic control unit.
• Crash and rollover sensors.
• Airbag wiring harness.
• Airbag status indicator.
AIRBAG SERVICE INFORMATION
Do not attempt to service, repair,
replace, modify, or tamper with any
part of the SRS. This includes wiring
or components in the vicinity of SRS
components. Doing so may cause the
system to trigger, or render the system
inoperative.
Do not use any electrical test
equipment or devices in the vicinity of
SRS components or wiring. Doing so
may cause the system to trigger, or
render the system inoperative.
 R
Airbags

All of the following operations should only be

carried out by a Dealer/Authorised Repairer, or
suitably qualified person:
• Removal or repair of any wiring or
component in the vicinity of any SRS
components.
• Installation of electrical, or electronic,
equipment and accessories.
• Modification to the front or sides of the
vehicle's exterior.
• Attachment of accessories to the front or

15
sides of the vehicle.

20
DISABILITY MODIFICATIONS

d
Occupants with disabilities which may require ite
modification of the vehicle, must contact a
m
Dealer/Authorised Repairer before any
Li

modifications are made.

er

DISABLING THE PASSENGER AIRBAG

ov

(Not Australia) To disable the passenger airbag:

R

Note: The passenger airbag should be disabled 1. Remove the emergency key blade from the
nd

only when a rearward-facing child restraint is Smart key.

fitted to the front passenger seat. 2. Insert the end of the emergency key blade
La

Crash test data and statistics show that into the slot in the switch, and rotate the
switch to the off position.
ar

the safest place for a child to be

restrained is in a child seat correctly As soon as the child seat is removed
gu

fitted to the vehicle's rear seat. from the front passenger seat, the
Ja

Do not use a child restraint on a seat airbag must be turned on. Failure to
protected by an operational airbag in do so will put any front seat passengers
©

front of it. Doing so presents a high risk at greater risk of death or serious injury
of death or serious injury to the child in the event of an accident.
in the event of an accident.
Do not fit a child restraint to the front
passenger seat if the SRS warning
lamp illuminates continuously with the
ignition on.

29
L
Airbags

15
When checking the operational status
of the front passenger airbag, make

20
sure the ignition is switched on.
The passenger airbag operational status

d
indicator illuminates amber when the airbag has
ite
been disabled.
m
Note: The indicator will only illuminate when
Li

the ignition is turned on or the engine is

er

running.
ov
R
nd
La
ar
gu
Ja
©

30
 R
Instrument panel

INSTRUMENT PANEL If the amber low fuel warning lamp

illuminates, the vehicle should be refuelled
as soon as possible. The approximate
distance that can be travelled on the
remaining fuel can be viewed via the Trip
computer range function.
As a reminder for the location of the fuel
filler, there is an arrow head next to the fuel
pump symbol pointing to the relevant side
of the vehicle.

INSTRUMENT PANEL MENU

15
20
1. Speedometer.
2. Message centre.

d
3. Tachometer.
ite
m
4. Temperature gauge.
Li

Serious engine damage can occur if the

vehicle is driven while the engine is
er

overheating.
ov

If the pointer moves onto the red line, the

R

engine is overheating. Stop the vehicle as

soon as safety permits, and allow the engine
nd

to idle until the temperature reduces. If,

La

after several minutes, the temperature does

not reduce, switch off the engine and allow
ar

to cool. If the problem persists, seek

qualified assistance immediately.
gu

Note: If engine overheating occurs, there

Ja

may be a noticeable reduction in engine

power and the air conditioning may cease
©

A number of vehicle features and display

operation. This is a normal operating
strategy, to reduce load on the engine and
assist with cooling.
5. Fuel gauge.
Never allow the engine to run out of fuel.
The resultant misfire can seriously
damage the catalytic converter.
settings may be configured via the Instrument
panel menu.
To display and navigate through the Instrument
panel menu, operate the menu control on the
steering wheel.
1. Steering wheel menu control.
2. Close and return to the previous menu.
3. Shows any active warnings.
4. Access the Vehicle Set-up menu.

31
L
Instrument panel

5. Access the Trip Computer menu. USING THE TRIP COMPUTER

6. Access the Display Settings menu.
7. Access the Service Menu.

WARNING AND INFORMATION

MESSAGES
Do not ignore warning messages, take
appropriate action as soon as possible.
Failure to do so, may result in serious
damage to the vehicle.

15
For information regarding the individual
messages, their meanings, and any action

20
required, please refer to the relevant section
within this handbook.

d
If more than one message is active, each is
ite
displayed in turn for 2 seconds in order of
m
priority.
Li

Note: Messages are displayed in order of

er

importance, with critical warning messages Press the i button (1) to cycle through the Trip
computer information. The options available
ov

being the highest priority.

are:
Warning messages may be accompanied by an
R

audible warning, and the message text may have • Date and Odometer.
nd

the handbook symbol next to it. Warning • Trip distance.

messages are displayed until the condition
La

• Trip average speed.

causing the fault is rectified or the message is
• Trip average fuel consumption.
suppressed using the OK button on the steering
ar

wheel. If the message is suppressed, a warning • Instantaneous fuel consumption.

gu

icon will remain illuminated until the cause of • Range available from remaining fuel.
Ja

the message is rectified. • Blank display.

To reset the Trip computer values to zero, press
©

TRIP COMPUTER and hold the i button for 2 seconds.

The computer memory stores data for a journey,
To reset the fuel consumption value, press and
or a series of journeys, until it is reset to zero.
hold the i button until the display clears.
The displayed information is for guidance only,
as it can be affected by traffic, road and weather The distance, average speed, and average fuel
conditions. economy values for trip A and trip B can be
reset. Set the Trip computer display to show
There are 3 trip memories available, A, B and
the trip that you wish to reset, then press and
Auto. The viewable trip memory can be selected
hold the i button until the message resetting
through the Instrument panel menu.
trip is displayed.

32
 R
Instrument panel

It is not possible to manually reset the Auto trip

memory. This resets automatically each time
the ignition is switched on.
Trips may be added together, to record a
continuous journey, or removed. Press the i
button for longer than 1 second, when Auto trip
memory values for distance, average speed, or
average fuel economy are displayed, then
adding last journey or removing last journey
will appear on the screen. Press the i button for
longer than 1 second, and the previous trip

15
information will be added to or removed from
the current trip and the new total will be

20
displayed.

d
TRIP DISTANCE ite
Distance travelled since the last memory reset.
m
The maximum trip reading is 9 999.9
Li

(kilometres or miles). The computer will

er

automatically reset to zero if this distance is

exceeded.
ov
R

RANGE
nd

This shows the predicted distance (kilometres

or miles) that the vehicle should travel on the
La

remaining fuel, assuming fuel consumption

stays constant.
ar
gu

METRIC/IMPERIAL/MIXED DISPLAY
Ja

The Trip computer readings can be changed

between metric, imperial, and mixed units via
©

Trip Computer in the Instrument panel menu.

See 31, INSTRUMENT PANEL MENU.
Note: Temperature display can be changed
between °C (Celsius) and °F (Fahrenheit)
independently of metric or imperial units.

33
L
Warning lamps
WARNING LAMPS AND INDICATORS
RED warning lamps are for primary warnings.
A primary warning must be investigated
immediately by the driver or qualified
assistance, before continuing.
AMBER and YELLOW warning lamps are for
secondary warnings. Some indicate that a
vehicle system is in operation, others indicate
that the driver must take action and then seek
qualified assistance as soon as possible.
GREEN and BLUE lamps within the Instrument
panel indicate system status.
LAMP CHECK
A warning lamp bulb check is initiated when the
ignition system is switched on and lasts for 3
seconds (except for the airbag warning lamp
which will remain on for 6 seconds). If any
warning lamp remains on after this period,
er
investigate the cause before driving.
ov
Some warning lamps have associated messages
R
displayed in the Message centre.
nd
Note: Not all warning lamps are included in the
check (for example, high beam headlamps and
La
direction indicators).
ar
CRITICAL WARNING MESSAGE (RED)
gu
Illuminates when a critical warning
Ja
message is available in the Message
centre.
©
GENERAL WARNING/INFORMATION
MESSAGE (AMBER)
Illuminates when a non-critical
warning message or an information
message is available in the Message
centre.
34
LOW OIL PRESSURE (RED)
If the lamp flashes, or illuminates
while driving, stop the vehicle as
soon as safety permits and switch
off the engine immediately.
Check and top up the oil level, if necessary. Start
the engine: If the lamp remains illuminated,
switch the engine off immediately and seek
qualified assistance before continuing.
BATTERY CHARGE (RED)
15
20
Illuminates, as a bulb check, when
the ignition is switched on and
d
extinguishes when the engine is
itestarted.
m
If the lamp remains on or illuminates while
driving, there is a fault with the battery charging
Li
system. Seek qualified assistance urgently.
BRAKE (RED)
Illuminates briefly, as a bulb check,
when the ignition is switched on. If
the lamp illuminates while driving,
suspect low brake fluid level or a
fault with the Electronic Brake
Distribution (EBD) system.
Stop the vehicle as soon as safety permits and
check and top up the brake fluid, if necessary.
If the lamp remains illuminated, seek qualified
assistance before continuing.
PARKING BRAKE (RED)
Illuminates when the Electric Parking
Brake (EPB) is correctly applied. If
the lamp flashes, a fault has been
detected. Seek qualified assistance
urgently.
 R
Warning lamps

SEAT BELT (RED) GLOW PLUGS (AMBER)

Illuminates, accompanied by a
chime, when the vehicle is in motion
and an occupied front seat belt is
unbuckled. The lamp will extinguish
when the relevant seat belt(s) is
(are) buckled.
Note: Objects on the front passenger seat may
activate the Seat belt reminder feature. It is
recommended that any objects placed on the
front passenger seat are secured using the seat
Illuminates when the ignition is
switched on, to indicate that the
glow plugs are active.
DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)
(AMBER)
Illuminates briefly, as a bulb check,
when the ignition is switched on.

15
If the lamp flashes while driving, the DSC
belt. See 17, USING THE SEAT BELTS.
system is active.

20
ENGINE/TRANSMISSION (AMBER) A fault with the DSC system is indicated by the

Illuminates briefly, as a bulb check,
when the ignition is switched on. If
the lamp illuminates when the
d
warning lamp illuminating and an associated
ite
warning message, or the warning lamp flashing
continuously when DSC is not active. The
m
vehicle can still be driven, but without DSC
Li

engine is running, there is an assistance. Seek qualified assistance as soon

er

emissions related fault with the as possible.

engine or transmission. The vehicle
ov

can be driven, but may enter DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)

R

Limp-home mode with the

OFF (AMBER)
possibility of reduced performance.
nd

Seek qualified assistance as soon as Illuminates when DSC is switched

La

possible. off.
If the warning lamp flashes while the engine is
ar

running, reduce speed and seek qualified

ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)
gu

assistance urgently.
(AMBER)
Ja

BRAKE (AMBER) Illuminates briefly, as a bulb check,

©

when the ignition is switched on.

Illuminates briefly, as a bulb check,
when the ignition is switched on. If
If the lamp remains on or illuminates while
the lamp illuminates after starting
driving, there is a fault with the ABS system.
the engine or while driving, suspect
Drive with care, avoiding heavy brake
worn brake pads or a fault with the
application and seek qualified assistance
Emergency Brake Assist (EBA)
urgently.
system.
The vehicle can still be driven with care, but
seek qualified assistance urgently.

35
L
Warning lamps
AIRBAG (AMBER)
Illuminates, as a bulb check, when
the ignition is switched on and
extinguishes when the engine is
started.
If the lamp illuminates when driving, there is a
fault with the Airbag system. Seek qualified
assistance as soon as possible.
REAR FOG LAMP (AMBER)
Illuminates when the rear fog lamps
are switched on.
EXTERNAL TEMPERATURE (AMBER)
Illuminates when the external
temperature is low enough that ice
may be present on the road.
er
ov
TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (YELLOW)
R
nd
The warning lamp illuminates,
accompanied by a message in the
La
Message centre, to warn that one or
more tyres are significantly
ar
under-inflated. Stop the vehicle as
gu
soon as possible, check the tyre
pressures and inflate to the
Ja
recommended pressure.
©
The lamp will flash to indicate a system fault.
HIGH BEAM (BLUE)
Illuminates when the high beam
headlamps are switched on or
flashed.
36
GEAR SHIFT (GREEN)
The gear shift indicator illuminates
briefly at the recommended gear
change point (upshift).
The gear shift indicator will not illuminate while
Cruise control is active and not being overridden
by pressing the throttle pedal.
Note: This warning indicator is only a guide. It
remains the responsibility of the driver to
operate the vehicle in an appropriate manner
15
for the prevailing conditions.
20
INTELLIGENT STOP/START (GREEN)
d
Illuminates when the engine is shut
itedown by the Intelligent stop/start
m
system.
Li
Note: Other warnings normally associated with
an engine shutdown, for example, the ignition
warning lamp, do not illuminate during an
engine shutdown by the Intelligent stop/start
system.
SIDE LAMPS (GREEN)
Illuminates when the side lamps are
switched on.
FRONT FOG LAMPS (GREEN)
Illuminates when the front fog lamps
are switched on.
DIRECTION INDICATORS (GREEN)
The appropriate warning lamp will
flash when the direction indicators
are operated.
 R
Warning lamps

HILL DESCENT CONTROL (GREEN)

Illuminates continuously when HDC
is selected and HDC operating
conditions are met. See 80, HDC
OPERATION.
If the lamp flashes, HDC has been selected, but
the operating conditions are not being met or
HDC fade-out is occurring.

CRUISE CONTROL (GREEN)

15
Illuminates when Cruise control is

20
active.

d
TRAILER DIRECTION INDICATORS ite
(GREEN)
m
Li

Illuminates, as a bulb check, when

the ignition is switched on and
er

extinguishes when the engine is

ov

started.
R

If a trailer is attached, the warning lamp will

flash in conjunction with the direction indicator
nd

warning lamp. If the lamp fails to flash, the

La

direction indicator bulb on the trailer may be

faulty.
ar
gu
Ja
©

37
L
Exterior lights

LIGHTING CONTROL

15
20
d
ite
m
Li

1. With the headlamps on, push the control 6. Front fog lamps: Will operate only while side
away from the steering wheel to select high lamps, headlamps or Auto lamps are
er

beam. The warning lamp will illuminate. See selected. Rotate the collar away from the
ov

36, HIGH BEAM (BLUE). steering wheel and release. The Instrument
R

Note: Do not use high beam where it may panel warning lamp will illuminate. See 36,
FRONT FOG LAMPS (GREEN).
nd

distract or dazzle other road users.

To turn off the Front fog lamps, rotate the
2. Pull the control towards the steering wheel
La

collar away from the steering wheel again

and release to flash the high beam on and
and release. The warning lamp will
off. The high beam will remain on for as
ar

extinguish.
long as the switch is held.
gu

7. Rear fog lamps: Will operate only while side

3. Side lamps.
lamps, headlamps or Auto lamps are
Ja

4. Headlamps. selected. Rotate the collar towards the

5. AUTO: With Auto lamps selected, when steering wheel and release. The Instrument
©

ambient light fades and the ignition is on,
the side lamps, tail lamps, dipped beam
headlamps, and number plate lamps will
switch on automatically. Headlamp courtesy
delay and Windscreen wiper detection may
also be activated.
Note: Low ambient light levels, caused by
adverse weather conditions, may also cause
Auto lamps to activate.
panel warning lamp will illuminate. See 36,
REAR FOG LAMP (AMBER).
To turn off the Rear fog lamps, rotate the
collar towards the steering wheel again and
release. The warning lamp will extinguish.
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS
With the lighting control in the Off position,
Daytime running lamps will switch on
automatically under the following conditions:

38
 R
Exterior lights

• The engine is running. Use the headlamp levelling control to account

• The gear selector is out of Park (P). for vehicle loading changes.
• The Electric Parking Brake (EPB) is not Vehicle load Switch position
applied (is released) - market dependent.
Driver only 0
Unless required or prohibited by law, Driver and front seat 0
Daytime running lamps can be passenger
disabled or enabled by your
Dealer/Authorised Repairer. Driver and passengers Rotate down 1
in all seats position from 0
HEADLAMPS - CONDENSATION Maximum gross Rotate down 2

15
Misting of lamp lenses can occur under some vehicle weight positions from 0
atmospheric conditions. This will not affect the Maximum rear axle Rotate down 3

20
performance of the lamps and will clear during load positions from 0
normal operation.

d
ite
HEADLAMPS - DRIVING ABROAD
m

The headlamp beam pattern is suitable for

Li

driving on either side of the road. There is no

er

need for any mechanical adjustment or external

ov

decals.
R

HEADLAMP LEVELLING
nd
La
ar
gu
Ja
©

39
L
Interior lights

INTERIOR LIGHTS

15
20
d
ite
m
Li
er
ov
R
nd
La
ar

1. Footwell lamps.
gu

2. Glove box lamp.

Ja

3. Puddle lamps.
4. Sun visor lamps.
©

5. Map light controls (on/off).

6. Main interior lamp control (on/off/Auto).
To activate or deactivate Auto mode, press
and hold for longer than 3 seconds. In Auto
mode, the lamps will illuminate when a door
is opened.
7. Luggage compartment lamp.

40
 R
Wipers and washers

WIPER OPERATION 1. Automatic rain sensing mode: The front

Do not operate the wipers on a dry
screen.
In freezing or hot conditions, make sure
the wipers have not stuck to the glass.
Use the Winter park position to lift the
wiper blades away from the screen. See
43, WINTER PARK POSITION.
Remove any snow, ice, or frost from the
windscreen, around the wiper arms and
wipers will respond and adapt automatically
to the ambient rain conditions, selecting the
appropriate wiper frequency for the
prevailing conditions. The sensitivity of the
system can be adjusted by rotating the
collar (2).
Make sure the wipers are switched off
before entering a car wash. If the
Automatic rain sensing system operates
during the car washing process, damage

15
blades, and the windscreen scuttle, may occur to the wiper mechanism.
before operating the wipers. 2. Rotate the collar to adjust the sensitivity of

20
the Automatic rain sensing mode when
position (1) is selected. The higher the

d
ite
sensitivity position the more responsive the
system will become.
m
When Automatic rain sensing mode is
Li

selected, or when sensitivity is increased,

the system will perform a single wipe.
er

3. Low speed continuous wipe.

ov

4. High speed continuous wipe.

R

5. Single wipe of the windscreen, or hold down

nd

for further continuous wipes.

La

6. Windscreen wash/wipe: Pull and release to

operate the front washers and wipers. The
ar

wipers will operate for 2 further wipes after

gu

the wiper control is released. After a few

seconds, a drip wipe will clear any residual
Ja

washer fluid from the windscreen. If more

washer fluid is required, pull and hold the
©

wiper control position.

Vehicles with a rain sensor:
Note: The front wipers will not operate while
the bonnet is open.
7. INT: Rear wiper, intermittent operation.
Wiper frequency will increase with vehicle
speed.
8. ON: Rear wiper, continuous operation.

41
L
Wipers and washers
9. Rear window wash/wipe: Press and release
to operate the rear washer and wiper. The
wiper will operate in a set cycle to minimise
drips when the button is released. If more
washer fluid is required, push and hold the
button.
Vehicles without a rain sensor:
1. Intermittent wipe: The time delay between
wipes can be adjusted by rotating the collar
(2).
Make sure the wipers are switched off
before entering a car wash. If the wipers
operate during the car washing process,
damage may occur to the wiper
mechanism.
2. Rotate the collar to adjust the time delay
between wipes when position (1) is
selected. The higher the setting the more
frequently wipes occur.
er
Note: Wipe frequency will increase with
ov
vehicle speed.
R
3. Low speed continuous wipe.
nd
4. High speed continuous wipe.
5. Single wipe of the windscreen, or hold down
La
for further continuous wipes.
ar
6. Windscreen wash/wipe: Pull and release to
operate the front washers and wipers. The
gu
wipers will operate for 2 further wipes after
Ja
the wiper control is released. After a few
seconds, a drip wipe will clear any residual
©
washer fluid from the windscreen. If more
washer fluid is required, pull and hold the
wiper control position.
Note: The front wipers will not operate while
the bonnet is open.
7. INT: Rear wiper, intermittent operation.
Wiper frequency will increase with vehicle
speed.
8. ON: Rear wiper, continuous operation.
42
9. Rear window wash/wipe: Press and release
to operate the rear washer and wiper. The
wiper will operate in a set cycle to minimise
drips when the button is released. If more
washer fluid is required, push and hold the
button.
Note: When Reverse gear (R) is selected and
the front wipers are operating, the rear wiper
will activate.
Note: The rear wiper will not operate while the
tailgate is open.
15
Note: If the wipers leave smears on the glass
20
after the vehicle has been washed, this may be
due to wax or other residue. Should this occur,
d
clean the glass with the recommended Land
ite
Rover screen cleaning paste. See 199,
LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS.
m
Note: The windscreen will no longer be wiped
Li
effectively and the Automatic rain sensing
function will degrade if the wipers become worn.
Always replace worn or damaged wiper blades
as soon as possible. The wipers Winter park
position will move the wipers to allow wiper
blade replacement. See 43, WINTER PARK
POSITION.
Note: If the wiper blades become stuck or
jammed, an electronic cut-out will temporarily
halt the wiper's operation. If this happens,
switch off the wipers and vehicle ignition, when
safe to do so. Clear any obstructions and free
the wiper blades, before attempting to switch
on the ignition.
SPEED-DEPENDENT MODE
Front wipers
If the vehicle's speed drops below 8 km/h (5
mph) with the wipers operating, the wipers will
switch to the next lowest speed. When the
vehicle's speed increases to over 8 km/h (5
mph), the original wiper speed setting will be
restored automatically.

Vehicles without a rain sensor fitted will also
increase the frequency of the intermittent front
wipe when the vehicle's speed increases.
This feature can be enabled/disabled
by your Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
Rear wiper
The frequency of the intermittent rear wiper will
increase when the vehicle's speed increases.
This feature can be enabled/disabled
by your Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
RAIN SENSOR
The rain sensor is mounted on the inside of the
windscreen, behind the rear-view mirror. The
sensor is able to detect the presence and
amount of water on the windscreen and
automatically activate the windscreen wipers
er
accordingly.
ov
Note: Static droplets may not be detected on
initial start-up. A single wipe should be used to
R
clear the windscreen.
nd
To activate the rain sensitive wipers, move the
La
wiper control to the AUTO position. The
behaviour of the system can be adjusted to the
ar
driver's preference by rotating the collar (2).
gu
Note: If the wiper control is turned to the AUTO
position, the wipers will not operate if either of
Ja
the front doors are open.
©
Note: In dry and often sunny conditions, optical
influences and dirt accumulation on the
windscreen may result in the windscreen wipers
activating inadvertently. To prevent this, it is
recommended that under these conditions the
wiper controls are returned to the OFF position.
R
Wipers and washers
HEADLAMP WASHERS
The headlamp power wash operates
automatically with the windscreen wash. It will
only operate if the headlamps are switched on,
and there is sufficient washer fluid in the
reservoir.
Headlamp power wash operates with every
fourth operation of the screen washers,
provided the headlamps are still switched on,
and approximately 10 minutes have elapsed
since the last headlamp power wash. Switching
15
the headlamps or the ignition off, and back on
again, will reset the cycle. See 38, LIGHTING
20
CONTROL, or 65, SWITCHING OFF THE
d
ENGINE.
ite
Note: The headlamps are washed alternately to
m
prevent the washer fluid from reducing the light
output from both headlamps simultaneously.
Li
WINTER PARK POSITION
The wipers can be set to park in a higher
position than normal. This allows the wiper
blades to be lifted away from the screen, while
the vehicle is stationary. This limits the risk of
freezing to the glass and helps facilitate the
removal of debris or obstructions, for example,
snow, mud, leaves, etc. The Winter park
position can be enabled/disabled from the
Vehicle Set-up menu. See 31, INSTRUMENT
PANEL MENU.
Note: Do not drive the vehicle with the wipers
in the Winter park position. The wipers should
always be re-set to their normal park position
before the vehicle is driven.
43
L
Mirrors

EXTERIOR MIRRORS

15
20
d
ite
m
Li
er
ov
R
nd
La
ar
gu

1. Left mirror adjustment. Note: If the mirrors are manually folded or

knocked into the folded position accidentally,
Ja

2. Right mirror adjustment.

the mirror head will be loose. To re-engage the
Note: The mirrors can be adjusted for up
©

mechanism, fold, then unfold the mirrors using

to 5 minutes when the ignition is switched
off, provided the driver’s door is not
opened.
3. Press both switches together to fold/unfold
the mirrors.
the switches.
A thermal cut-out switch will temporarily disable
the power-fold feature if the switches are
operated repeatedly.
Power-fold will only operate if the vehicle is
stationary, or travelling at 20 km/h (12 mph) or
less.

44
 R
Mirrors

The mirrors can be configured by

your Dealer/Authorised Repairer to
automatically fold when the vehicle
is locked, and unfold when it is
unlocked.

MIRROR DIP WHEN REVERSING

Selecting Reverse (R) gear will cause the door
mirrors to automatically adjust, providing an
improved viewing angle for reversing.
The exact dipped position can be adjusted when

15
the mirrors are dipped. The next time R is

20
selected, the newly adjusted position will be
selected.

d
When the gear selector is moved out of R, the ite
mirrors will return to their previous position.
m
Note: If the vehicle's speed exceeds 7 km/h (4
Li

mph) in reverse, the mirrors will return to their

normal driving position for enhanced visibility.
er

The automatic Mirror dip feature can be enabled

ov

or disabled using the Vehicle Set-up menu. See

R

31, INSTRUMENT PANEL MENU.

nd
La
ar
gu
Ja
©

45
L
Garage door opener

GARAGE DOOR TRANSCEIVER For best results, fit a new battery to the
hand-held transmitter of the garage door opener
Do not use the transceiver with any
(or other device) before programming. If your
garage door opener that lacks the
garage door opener receiver (located in the
safety stop and reverse feature, as
garage) is equipped with an antenna, make sure
required by safety standards.
the antenna is hanging straight down.
When programming the transceiver to
a garage door opener or entry gate,
PROGRAMMING
make sure the area is clear. This will
prevent potential harm or damage as
the gate or garage door will activate
during the program.

15
This device may suffer from interference

20
if operated in the vicinity of a mobile or
fixed station transmitter. This

d
interference is likely to affect the ite
hand-held transmitter, as well as the
m
in-car transceiver.
With the engine switched off:
Li

The door transceiver is located in the rear-view

mirror. It can be programmed to transmit the 1. Make sure the ignition system is on.
er

Radio Frequencies (RFs) of up to 3 different 2. Hold the end of the original garage door
ov

transmitters, which can be used to operate opener hand-held transmitter 50 to 150 mm

garage doors, entry gates, home lighting, (2 to 6 inches) away from the transceiver
R

security systems or other Radio Frequency (RF) in the rear-view mirror, keeping the
nd

operated devices. indicator lamp in view.

La

Although this section mainly describes the 3. Using both hands, simultaneously press
procedures for a garage door opener, it equally and hold both the chosen transceiver button
ar

applies to the previously mentioned on the rear-view mirror, as shown above,

applications. and the hand-held transmitter button. Keep
gu

In some countries, this feature is also known both buttons pressed. The indicator lamp
Ja

as the HomeLink™ Universal Transceiver. will flash slowly at first and then change to
a fast flash. When the indicator lamp flashes
©

For further information, see 48, INFORMATION
AND ASSISTANCE.
BEFORE PROGRAMMING
When programming a device that may
require you to press and re-press the
hand-held transmitter (cycle), unplug
the device during the cycling process to
prevent possible motor failure.
rapidly, release both buttons. The rapid
flashing lamp indicates successful
programming.
4. If, after 60 seconds, the indicator lamp does
not flash rapidly, release both the
transceiver and the hand-held transmitter
buttons and repeat the procedure starting
with Step 2. Position the hand-held
transmitter at a different angle and/or
distance.

46
 R
Garage door opener

5. Press and hold the programmed garage
door opener button and observe the
indicator lamp.
• If the indicator is continuous,
programming is complete. Your device
should operate when the garage door
opener button is pressed and held for
approximately 1 to 2 seconds and then
released.
• If the indicator lamp blinks rapidly for
2 seconds and then illuminates
• The name of the button or switch may
vary between manufacturers.
2. Press and release the learn or smart button.
3. Return to the vehicle and firmly press and
hold the programmed garage door opener
button for 2 seconds and release.
4. Repeat the press, hold, release sequence 3
times to complete the programming
process.
The garage door opener, in the rear-view mirror,
should now activate the rolling code device.

15
continuously, proceed with the
following programming instructions for

20
rolling code device equipment. REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE GARAGE
DOOR OPENER BUTTON

d
TO ERASE ALL PROGRAMMING
ite
To programme a device to a previously
programmed button:
m
For first time programming, make sure the
engine is switched off: 1. Press and hold the desired pre-programmed
Li

1. Make sure the ignition is on (but with the garage door opener button for at least 20
er

engine switched off). seconds, but no longer than 30 seconds,

ov

until the indicator lamp begins to flash.

2. Press and hold the 2 outer buttons on the
2. Without releasing the rear-view mirror
R

transceiver in the rear-view mirror. Keep

the buttons pressed until the indicator lamp button, position the hand-held transmitter
nd

begins to flash (this will take approximately approximately 50 to 150 mm (2 to 6 inches)

away from the transceiver in the rear-view
La

20 seconds), then release the buttons.

mirror, keeping the indicator lamp in view.
All memories in the garage door opener have
ar

now been cleared. 3. Carry out Step 3 of Programming.

gu

Note: Do not perform this procedure when

programming the additional garage door opener ENTRY GATE PROGRAMMING
Ja

buttons. The technology of some entry gates requires

you to press and re-press (cycle) the hand-held
©

ROLLING CODE DEVICE EQUIPMENT transmitter button every 2 seconds during

programming.
PROGRAMMING
Continue to press and hold the desired rear-view
Note: The assistance of a second person, may
mirror button while you cycle your hand-held
make the following steps quicker and easier.
transmitter until the indicator lamp flashes
Once the button has been pressed, there are
rapidly.
only 30 seconds in which to complete Step 3.
1. At the garage door opener receiver (motor
head unit) in the garage, locate the learn or
smart button/switch.

47
L
Garage door opener

INFORMATION AND ASSISTANCE

It is recommended that when you sell
or dispose of the vehicle, the
programmed transceiver buttons be
erased for security purposes.
For information on the range of available
compatible products or accessories, or for
assistance, you should contact your Dealer/
Authorised Repairer or contact HomeLink via
their website.
Note: Keep the original transmitter for future

15
use or programming procedures if, for example,

20
you purchase a new vehicle.
Note: The manufacturer is not responsible for

d
any radio or TV interference caused by ite
unauthorised modifications to this equipment.
m
Such modifications could void the user’s
Li

authority to operate the equipment.

er
ov
R
nd
La
ar
gu
Ja
©

48
 R
Windows

ELECTRIC WINDOWS

15
20
d
ite
m
Li
er
ov

1. Window switches: Wherever possible, remove any snow,

ice, dirt, and leaves etc. from the sunroof
R

Note: The windows will operate for 5

minutes after the engine is switched off, as mechanism before closing. Failure to do
nd

long as none of the doors are opened. so may damage the sunroof mechanism.
La

2. Rear window isolator button: • With the roof closed, briefly press to tilt
the sunroof open.
Make sure you remove the Smart key
ar

when leaving the vehicle. This will • With the roof fully open, briefly press
gu

prevent unsupervised operation of the to close the roof.

windows, which may result in an Press the button again to stop movement.
Ja

injury. 4. Sunroof open/close switch:

©

If children are carried in the rear seats, • With the roof closed, briefly press to
the isolator switch should be used to fully open. Press again to stop
prevent operation of the windows. If movement.
the windows are operated by young • With the roof tilted open, press and
children there is a risk of serious injury hold to close the roof. Releasing the
or death. switch will stop roof movement.
3. Sunroof close/tilt switch: Note: The sunroof will only operate when
the ignition is on.
5. Sun blind:

49
L
Windows

• To open, push upwards on the textured
part of the handle. Slide the blind into
the panel between the sunroof and the
headlining.
• To close the sun blind, pull across the
aperture until it locks in place.
Note: If this procedure fails to remove the
blockage, the window operation may need to
be reset. See 155, WINDOW RESET.
Note: The sunroof Anti-trap mechanism works
differently and does not require reset if
activated. See 155, SUNROOF RESET.

WINDOW ANTI-TRAP PROTECTION

The Anti-trap mechanism does not
operate when closing the sunroof from
the tilted position. The sunroof can

15
cause serious injury should a body part

20
become trapped. Always make sure
the sunroof is free from obstructions

d
before closing.
Before closing a window or the
ite
m
sunroof, make sure no occupants have
any part of their body in a position
Li

where it could be trapped. Even with

er

an Anti-trap system, death or serious

ov

injury could occur.

Anti-trap protection will stop window or sunroof
R

movement if an obstruction or resistance is

nd

detected. Check the window or sunroof and its

aperture, and remove any obstructions (for
La

example, ice, etc.).

ar

If it is still necessary to raise the window or

close the sunroof, the override procedure is as
gu

follows:
Ja

1. Attempt to close the window/sunroof.

Anti-trap will prevent closure and lower the
©

window/open the sunroof slightly.

2. Within 10 seconds, attempt to raise the
window/close the sunroof again. Anti-trap
will prevent closure and lower the
window/open the sunroof slightly.
3. Attempt to close the window/sunroof for a
third time, this time hold the switch in the
close position. Hold until closed.

50

TOUCH SCREEN HOME MENU
er
ov
R
nd
Always run the engine during prolonged
use of the Touch screen. Failure to do
La
so may discharge the vehicle's battery;
preventing the engine from starting.
ar
Avoid spilling or splashing liquids onto
gu
the Touch screen.
Ja
1. Press to select the Touch screen Setup
menu.
©
Note: Depending on the specification of
your vehicle, this will be either a Touch
screen soft key, or a button on the centre
console.
2. Touch to select Valet mode. During menu
mode, the icon is changed to the Back soft
key; touch to return to the previous screen
displayed.
3. Press to select the Home menu.
R
Touch screen
15
20
d
ite
m
Li
4. Touch or press to select the Audio/Video
menu, see 82, AUDIO/VIDEO CONTROLS.
5. While navigation is operating, touch to
repeat the last given navigation instruction.
During a phone call, the icon is changed;
touch to end the call.
6. Touch to adjust the time/date.
7. Touch or press to select the On road
Navigation menu. The current set
destination is displayed.
8. Touch or press to select the Phone menu.
9. Press to turn the screen on/off.
10. Press to select the Extra features menu.
11. To change the shortcuts, see 52, TOUCH
SCREEN SETUP.
12. Press to turn the Audio system on/off.
51
L
Touch screen

TOUCH SCREEN USE Clock adjust: Select 12 or 24 hour clock. Set

Always run the engine during prolonged
use of the Touch screen. Failure to do
so may discharge the vehicle's battery;
preventing the engine from starting.
Avoid spilling or splashing liquids onto
the Touch screen.
TOUCH SCREEN CARE
Do not use abrasive cleaners on the
the current time. Select Date to change the date,
or to alter the date format. Select Set, to store
new settings.
Note: The clock can also be adjusted from the
Touch screen time display.
Home menu shortcuts: Select up to 2 items
from the displayed list to appear as shortcuts
on the Home menu. Select Clear to deselect
highlighted items.
Language: Select the required language. Select

15
Touch screen. For approved cleaning
products, contact your Dealer/ Male or Female voice. Touch Change to select

20
Authorised Repairer. alternatives for voice and text displays. Follow
the on-screen instructions to confirm.

d
TOUCH SCREEN SETUP Note: Some languages are not yet available for
ite
both System display text and Voice control. In
Select Setup from the Home menu.
m
this event, it will be necessary to select a
The set up screen is divided into categories: separate language for Voice control.
Li

• Screen. Volume presets: Adjust the volume for the

er

• System. available systems (announcements, parking aid,

ov

• Voice. phone, voice, etc.).

R

• Audio.
VOICE SETTINGS
nd

SCREEN SETTINGS • Command list: Pressing the 'I' soft key next
La

to any command, will display alternative

Volume pop-up: Displays the Volume pop-up ways of saying the same command.
ar

on/off icon.
• Voicetags: View the categories. Select a
gu

Screensaver: Change screensaver. category to manage the Voicetags for the

Time out home: Sub-menu selection screens chosen system. See 102, VOICETAGS.
Ja

can be set to revert to the Home menu after a • Operating guide: View brief Voice system
©

predetermined length of time. instructions. Select Voice tutorial for more

Theme: Changes appearance of the Touch detailed instructions (cancel via the
screen soft keys. displayed pop-up, or by pressing and
holding the voice button).
SYSTEM SETTINGS • Preferences: Select to alter the following
Button feedback: Select to turn the soft key settings:
confirmation tone on/off.

52

• Voice profile: The Voice system can be
trained to have a greater recognition of
a particular voice or accent.The default
setting is Standard. To build a voice
profile for either User 1 or User 2, it is
necessary to complete a training
programme first.
To complete the training for the first
time, select either User 1 or User 2 and
follow the on-screen and audible
instructions.
• Voice feedback: Select On/Off.
• Feedback volume: Adjust using the +/-
buttons. It is not possible to reduce the
volume to zero.
• Voice training: Select to access the Voice
system training program, designed to
enable the system to better recognise the
vocal characteristics of a user.
er
Select User 1 or User 2 and follow the
ov
on-screen and audible instructions. See 102,
VOICE TRAINING.
R
The training session can be cancelled, at any
nd
time, by touching the on-screen pop-up or by
La
pressing and holding the Voice button on the
steering wheel. See 101, USING VOICE
ar
CONTROL.
gu
SELECTING VALET MODE
Ja
Valet mode allows the vehicle to be driven and
locked by a parking attendant, without giving
©
access to the loadspace. Valet mode also
prevents operation of the Touch screen, to
prevent access to telephone numbers or
navigation addresses.
Each time Valet mode is used, a Personal
Identification Number (PIN) must be entered.
1. From the Home menu, select Valet.
R
Touch screen
2. Enter a memorable 4 digit PIN. You will be
prompted to confirm the PIN. If you wish
to cancel the PIN, select Delete. If the PIN
is cancelled, or incorrectly entered, you will
be prompted to enter the PIN again.
3. Valet mode activated is displayed, to
indicate that a PIN has been accepted.
The luggage compartment is now securely
locked in Valet mode and the Valet mode On
screen is displayed.
15
DESELECTING VALET MODE
20
1. When you re-enter the vehicle, select Valet.
2. Enter your memorable 4 digit PIN and touch
d
the OK button.
ite
Valet mode deactivated is displayed, to indicate
m
that a PIN has been accepted.
Li
• The luggage compartment will return to the
previously set security requirement.
• The Touch screen will be enabled.
Note: If the PIN is forgotten, Valet mode can
only be deactivated by your Dealer/Authorised
Repairer.
EXTRA FEATURES
This menu allows selected extra features to be
displayed for adjustment, switching on/off, or
for information.
There are more extra features available than can
be displayed at any one time; therefore, they
are displayed in alphabetical order. Use the
forward or back soft keys to move to the next
screen.
53
L
Heating and ventilation

MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL

15
20
d
1. Temperature control, rotate to adjust. ite
2. Air Conditioning: Press to switch on/off.
m
3. Air distribution: Rotate to direct air flow.
Li

4. Heated front screen: Press to switch on/off.

er

5. Blower speed: Rotate to adjust air flow

ov

speed through the vents. The current speed

selection is indicated by an illuminated LED.
R

6. Heated rear screen: Press to switch on/off.

nd

7. Recirculation:
La

• Press briefly to turn on recirculation for

4 minutes, or to turn it off.
ar

• Press and hold to turn on recirculation,

gu

or until it is turned off.

Ja

8. Seat heaters: Press once to turn on high,

twice to turn on low, and a third time to turn
©

off.
Note: The amber tell-tale indicators in the
switches will illuminate when the function is
selected.
Note: In low temperatures, it is advisable to
close the centre face-level vents, and direct air
flow from the outer face-level vents towards the
side windows. This will help to keep the
windows clear of ice.

54
 R
Heating and ventilation

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL

15
20
d
ite
m
1. Left and right temperature controls: Rotate 9. Blower speed: Rotate to adjust air flow
Li

either control to adjust. speed through the vents. In manual mode,

the current speed selection is indicated by
er

Note: It is not possible to achieve a

temperature differential of more than 4°C an illuminated LED.
ov

(7°F) between the left and right sides. 10. Recirculation:

R

2. Seat heaters: Press once to turn on high, • Press briefly to turn on recirculation for
nd

twice to turn on low, and a third time to turn 4 minutes, or to turn it off.
off. • Press and hold to turn on recirculation,
La

3. Air distribution: Press the relevant button or until it is turned off.

to set the air distribution to the required
ar

11. Air quality sensor: press repeatedly to

points. It is possible to select more than toggle between:
gu

one option by pressing the required

• AUTO - The system automatically
Ja

combination of buttons.
selects fresh air, or recirculation,
4. Heated windscreen: Press to switch on/off. depending on the levels of humidity and
©

5. Maximum defrost programme: Press to pollution present.

switch on/off. The system will automatically • MAN - The system locks to
adjust the blower output for maximum recirculation.
clearing. In addition, the front and rear
• Off - The system locks to fresh air
screen heaters will be activated.
intake.
6. Heated rear screen: Press to switch on/off.
Note: The amber tell-tale lights in the switches
7. Air Conditioning: Press to switch on/off. will illuminate when the function is selected.
8. AUTO mode: Press to select fully automatic
operation.

55
L
Heating and ventilation
Note: In low temperatures, it is advisable to
close the centre face-level vents, and direct air
flow from the outer-face level vents towards the
side windows. This will help to keep the
windows clear of ice.
AIR QUALITY SENSOR
To change options, press the switch repeatedly
until the required option is selected.
1. Auto LED illuminated: In this mode, the
system automatically selects fresh and
recirculated air dependent on pollution and
cabin humidity.
2. Manual LED illuminated: Recirculation mode
is selected permanently.
3. Both LEDs off: The system is in fresh air
mode.
HEATED SEATS
er
Press the relevant button to operate the required
ov
seat heater at the highest level. Both LEDs will
R
illuminate.
nd
Press a second time to heat the seat at a lower
level. One LED will extinguish.
La
Press a third time to switch off.
ar
HEATED SCREENS
gu
Press the relevent button to operate the required
Ja
screen heater. The screen heater(s) will operate
for a predetermined timed period before
©
automatically switching off.
The screen heaters will be automatically
switched on if Defrost mode is activated or if
the external air temperature is low.
Do not attach labels to the rear screen.
Do not scrape or use abrasive materials
to clean the inside of the screen.
56
AUXILIARY HEATER
Your vehicle may be fitted with an auxiliary
heater, which is powered by fuel drawn from
the vehicle's tank. The heater operates at low
ambient temperatures. Alternatively, it can be
controlled by the Timed climate control system,
or from the Timed climate remote control.
When the heater is operating, exhaust fumes
from the heater may be visible exiting from
under the front of the vehicle. This is normal
and is not a cause for concern.
15
Do not operate the auxiliary heater
20
when refuelling the vehicle. Doing so
may cause fuel vapours to combust,
d
causing a fire/explosion.
ite
Do not operate the auxiliary heater
m
while the vehicle is in an enclosed
Li
space. Doing so can cause a build up
of highly toxic fumes, which may cause
unconsciousness or death.
TIMED CLIMATE CONTROL
The Timed climate control system provides a
comfortable temperature inside the cabin in
advance of the driver and passengers entering.
Dependent on the external temperature, the
system draws in fresh air to cool the cabin or
operates the auxiliary heater to warm it.
The auxiliary heater is also operated to warm
the engine and aid starting in very cold
conditions.
Note: If the auxiliary heater is used to warm the
engine, the cabin will not be warmed.
The Timed climate control system is controlled
by the Touch screen and can be
activated/deactivated by the Timed climate
remote control.
The system may not operate, or will switch off
automatically in the following scenarios:
• If the fuel level is low.

• If the vehicle’s battery charge is low.
• If the coolant temperature is at or above its
required temperature.
SETTING TIMED CLIMATE
The Touch screen can be used to either preset
activation times or to operate the system
manually.
When the system is operating, the LED in the
Climate control AUTO or A/C button will flash.
AUTO indicates the engine or cabin are being
heated. A/C indicates that the cabin is being
ventilated. The choice of operation is
automatically determined by the system,
depending on external temperature.
Note: The system will cease operation when the
engine is started.
er
ov
R
nd
La
ar
gu
Ja
To set a Timed climate program:
1. Press the HOME MENU hard key.
©
2. Touch the Timed Climate soft key. This soft
key may be set on a personal shortcut or
accessed via the Extra Features soft key.
Select 7 day timer, or single event, then
select the timer button. If 7 day timer is
selected, then select the day for which you
want to set a program. Alternatively, select
All Week to select the same start time for
every day.
R
Heating and ventilation
3. Touch the Timer 1 or Timer 2 icon. The
timers can be toggled between on and off
by using the Power soft key.
4. Touch the up or down arrows to set the
start time. Hours and minutes are adjusted
separately.
5. Touch OK. The screen will display the
activation time. If required, set the time for
the other timer, using the same process.
6. Once set, the timer events can be turned on
or off, as required, in the Timed climate
15
screen, by selecting the 7 day timer or the
20
single event soft key.
Note: Set times should to be programmed 20
d
minutes before the planned journey.
ite
Note: The time format, 12/24 hour clock, is
m
determined by the time settings currently
Li
selected in the Vehicle Set-up menu. See 31,
INSTRUMENT PANEL MENU.
Note: Timed climate will only operate once
between engine starts. For example, a remote
Timed climate request will not be performed if
a programmed Timed climate event has already
occurred.
A current heating cycle will be cancelled if the
engine is started. Any programmed heating
cycle may be cancelled by touching the relevant
Power soft key on the timer setup menu, or the
Power soft key on the Timed Climate
information home menu.
57
L
Storage compartments

STORAGE COMPARTMENTS

15
20
d
ite
m
Li
er
ov
R
nd
La
ar
gu
Ja
©

Make sure that any items stored in the 2. Glove box.

vehicle are secure and cannot move.
If the vehicle is involved in an
accident, or subject to sudden braking
or direction change, loose items can
cause serious injury.
Do not drink, or use the cup holders
when driving.
1. Storage tray.
3. Front door bottle holders.
4. Storage tray.
5. Rear door bottle holders.
6. Rear compartment and cup holders.
7. Additional storage.
8. Power sockets.

58
 R
Storage compartments

9. Centre console storage.

Only use Land Rover approved
accessories. Using any other equipment
may damage the vehicle's electrical
system. If you are in any doubt, contact
a Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
The engine should be running when
using accessories for long periods.
Failure to do so can discharge the
battery.
Note: Power sockets can be used to power

15
approved accessories that use a maximum of

20
180 Watts.

d
ite
m
Li
er
ov
R
nd
La
ar
gu
Ja
©

59
L
Load carrying

LOADSPACE COVER 2. Lower the right end into position by pulling

Never place objects on top of the
loadspace cover. During an accident
or sudden manoeuvre, loose objects
can cause serious injury or death.
back the release button. Make sure the
release button returns to the locked position
when the cover is in place.
3. Pull the loadspace cover blind towards the
rear of the vehicle. Engage the end pegs
into the recesses provided in the loadspace
side trims.
Do not store the loadspace cover loose
in the vehicle.

15
LUGGAGE ANCHOR POINTS

20
d
ite
m
Li
er
ov
R
nd
La
ar
gu
Ja
©

All items carried in the loadspace area

should be properly secured.
1. Load securing rings:
• To assist in safely securing large items
of luggage, 4 fixing points are located
in the rear loadspace floor.
2. Bag hooks:
1. Insert the location peg, on the left end of • The bag hooks should only be used to
the loadspace cover, into the slot. secure light items such as shopping
bags.

60
 R
Load carrying

Note: A range of approved luggage retention 2. Pull the panel towards the rear of the
accessories are available from your vehicle, to release it from the retaining
Dealer/Authorised Repairer. channels (B).
3. Reverse the floor, relocate in the retaining
LOADSPACE FLOOR channels (B) and lower into position.
When removing or replacing the
loadspace floor, take care to avoid
getting your hands or fingers trapped
between the floor panel and the
vehicle.
When removing or replacing the

15
loadspace floor, make sure children

20
and pets are kept at a safe distance to
avoid injury.

d
The loadspace floor is reversible to allow for a ite
choice of carpeted or hard surfaces to be made.
m
Li
er
ov
R
nd
La
ar
gu
Ja
©

To reverse the loadspace floor:

1. Using the finger loop (A), raise the floor
panel.

61
L
Towing

ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS Do not loop the breakaway cable over

• When calculating the laden weight of the
trailer, remember to include the weight of
the trailer, plus the weight of the load.
• If the load can be divided between the
vehicle and the trailer, loading more weight
into the vehicle will generally improve
stability. Do not exceed the vehicle's weight
limits.
• Make sure the trailer tyre pressures are set
to trailer manufacturer's recommendations.
the tow ball, as it may slide off.
Do not exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight (GVW), maximum rear axle
weight, maximum trailer weight, or
nose weight. Exceeding any of these
limits could cause instability and loss
of control.
Australia only:
• Tyre pressures - Increase rear pressures
of the towing vehicle to those for maximum

15
Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) conditions.
• If the vehicle is loaded to the maximum

20
Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW), the nose • Nose weight - Must be a minimum of 7%
weight is limited to 150 kg (330 lbs). See of the gross caravan/trailer weight, up to a

d
63, TOWING WEIGHTS. maximum of 250 kg (550 lb).
ite
• If a greater tow ball nose weight is required,
m
the weight can be increased by up to an
Li

extra 100 kg (220 lb), but the vehicle's load

must be reduced by the same amount. This
er

makes sure the GVW and maximum rear

ov

axle load are not exceeded, and also allows

R

for a maximum tow ball nose weight of 250

kg (550 lb).
nd

• If it is necessary to increase the nose weight

La

up to a maximum of 250 kg (550 lbs), the

vehicle's load should be reduced
ar

accordingly. This makes sure the GVW and

gu

maximum rear axle load are not exceeded.

• Make sure a suitable breakaway cable or
Ja

secondary coupling is used. Refer to the

©

trailer manufacturer's instructions for

guidance.
• Make sure the tow ball is secure.
• Check the operation of all of the trailer
lights.
• It is essential that the trailer is loaded, so
that it remains parallel to the ground. This
is particularly important when towing
twin-axled trailers.

62
 R
Towing

TOWING WEIGHTS
Maximum permissible towing On-road Off-road
weights
Unbraked trailers 750 kg (1650 lbs) 750 kg (1650 lbs)
Trailers with overrun brakes 2000 kg (4400 lbs)* 750 kg (1650 lbs)
Nose weight 150 kg (330 lbs) -

* For diesel vehicles in Algeria, Egypt, India,

Libya, Morocco, Pakistan, and Tunisia, the TOWING A TRAILER

15
maximum permissible towing weight for a trailer Never exceed the maximum weights
with overrun brakes is 1500 kg (3307 lbs).

20
for either the vehicle, or the trailer.
See 201, WEIGHTS, for details of the Gross Doing so can cause accelerated wear

d
Vehicle Weight (GVW), Gross Train Weight and damage to the vehicle. It can also
(GTW), axle weights, and maximum payload.
ite
adversely affect vehicle stability and
braking, which in turn can lead to loss
m
Note: When towing, provided that the vehicle's
road speed is limited to a maximum of 100 km/h of control and increased braking
Li

(60 mph), the maximum GVW can be increased distance, resulting in a rollover or
er

by up to 100 kg (220 lb). crash.

ov

Note: When calculating rear axle loading, To preserve handling and stability, only
remember that the trailer nose weight, the load fit Land Rover approved towing
R

in the vehicle's loadspace area, weight on the accessories.

nd

roof rack, and the weight of rear seat Never use towing eyes or lashing
passengers must all be added together. points to tow a trailer. They have not
La

been designed for this purpose and

doing so may cause them to fail,
ar

TRAILER ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

resulting in injury or death.
gu

Only connect approved electrical circuits,

which are in good condition, to the
Ja

trailer socket.
©

When a trailer's electrical connection is made

and the vehicle’s direction indicators are used,
the trailer warning indicator will flash in time
with the direction indicators. See 37, TRAILER
DIRECTION INDICATORS (GREEN).

63
L
Towing

TOW BAR DIMENSIONS AND MOUNTING POINTS

15
20
d
ite
m
Li
er
ov

All measurements in millimetres.

R
nd
La
ar
gu
Ja
©

64
 R
Starting the engine

STARTING THE ENGINE
Never start the engine, or leave it
running, when the vehicle is in an
enclosed space. Exhaust gases are
poisonous and can cause
unconsciousness and death, if inhaled.
If the engine fails to start, do not
continue cranking as this will discharge
the battery. It may also damage the
catalytic converter due to unburnt fuel
passing through the exhaust.
1. Make sure Park (P) is selected for vehicles
with an automatic transmission, or Neutral
for a manual transmission vehicle. Apply
the Electric Parking Brake (EPB).
2. Press and release the engine START/STOP
button.
While the vehicle is moving:
It is not advisable to switch off the
engine while the vehicle is moving.
However, if a situation arises where
engine switch off is urgent, the following

15
Note: The Smart key may not be detected if it procedure applies:

20
is placed within a metal container, or if it is 1. Press and hold the engine START/STOP
shielded by a device with a back-lit LCD screen button for 2 seconds, or;

d
such as a smart phone, laptop (including laptop 2. Press and release the engine START/STOP
ite
bag), games console, etc. Keep the Smart key button twice within 2 seconds.
m
clear of such devices when attempting Keyless
entry or Keyless starting.
Li

To start the engine:

er

1. Make sure a valid Smart key is inside the

ov

vehicle.
R

2. Make sure Park (P) or Neutral (N) is

nd

selected.
3. Automatic transmission: Firmly press the
La

brake pedal.
Manual transmission: Firmly press the
ar

clutch pedal.
gu

4. Press and release the engine START/STOP

Ja

button.
Note: For diesel engined vehicles, the delay
©

period before cranking begins will be longer

in low ambient temperatures due to
extended glow plug operation. During this
extended delay, the brake pedal must
remain pressed.
Once the engine has started, the brake pedal
can be released if it is safe to do so.

SWITCHING OFF THE ENGINE

While the vehicle is stationary:

65
L
Starting the engine

SWITCHING ON THE IGNITION ROLLING RE-START

A rolling re-start can be initiated by selecting
Neutral (N) and pressing the engine
START/STOP button.

KEYLESS START BACKUP

If the vehicle has been unlocked using the
emergency key blade, or the Smart key is not
detected by the vehicle, it will be necessary to
use the Keyless start backup to disarm the alarm
and start the engine.

15
The Keyless start backup can only be used when

20
the message Smart Key Not Found - Refer to
Handbook is displayed in the Message centre.

d
ite
m
Li
er
ov
R
nd
La

To switch on the ignition without starting the

engine:
ar

1. Make sure a valid Smart key is inside the

gu

vehicle.
Ja

2. Press the START/STOP button until the

warning lamps illuminate.
©

1. Position the Smart key against the

3. Press the START/STOP button again to
underside of the steering column cover,
switch off.
with the buttons facing downwards.
Applying the brake/clutch pedal when
2. Automatic transmission: Firmly press the
pressing the START/STOP button will
brake pedal.
start the engine for automatic/manual
Manual transmission: Firmly press the
transmissions respectively.
clutch pedal.
3. Press and release the engine START/STOP
button.

66
 R
Starting the engine

Once the engine has started, the brake pedal

can be released if it is safe to do so.
If the Smart key is not recognised, or the engine
still fails to start, consult a Dealer/Authorised
Repairer.

15
20
d
ite
m
Li
er
ov
R
nd
La
ar
gu
Ja
©

67
L
Intelligent stop/start

INTELLIGENT STOP/START • The Climate control system demand

requires the engine to be running (for
The Intelligent stop/start system is designed to
example, in Defrost mode).
improve fuel efficiency and is automatically
activated when the ignition is turned on. Unless • The battery charge is low.
it is required to support other vehicle systems, • The bonnet is opened.
the engine will turn off if the vehicle is stopped, • Intelligent stop/start is deactivated.
for example, at traffic lights. When the brake
pedal is released and a drive gear is selected,
the engine will restart automatically.
DEACTIVATING INTELLIGENT STOP/
START
During operation of the Intelligent stop/start
system, a warning lamp will illuminate. See 36, To switch the system off, press the ECO switch.

15
INTELLIGENT STOP/START (GREEN). See 238, DRIVER CONTROLS.

20
To activate an automatic engine stop: Note: The engine will restart automatically if the
switch is pressed while an automatic engine
• Stop the vehicle, select Neutral and fully

d
stop is in progress.
release the clutch. ite
To confirm that the system is off, the message
For manual transmissions, the engine will
m
ECO Stop/Start Off is momentarily displayed in
restart when the clutch pedal is fully pressed,
the Message centre.
Li

prior to engaging a gear.

Note: The intelligent stop/start system will
er

The engine will also restart if one of the

automatically reactivate the next time the
following occurs:
ov

ignition is turned on.

• Intelligent stop/start is deactivated.
R

If the ECO switch is pressed while there is a

• The accelerator pedal is pressed. fault, the message Eco Stop/Start Not Available
nd

• Climate control system demand increases. is displayed.

La

• The vehicle’s speed exceeds approximately

4 km/h (2.5 mph).
ar

• Battery charge becomes low.

gu

• Brake vacuum has been reduced (for

Ja

example, using the brake pedal repeatedly

with the engine off).
©

The following conditions will prevent an

automatic engine stop:
• The external temperature is less than
approximately 0°C (32°F).
• The external temperature is more than
approximately 40°C (104°F).
• The engine has not reached operating
temperature.
• The driver’s seat belt is not fastened.

68
 R
Gearbox

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

15
20
d
ite
m
Li
er
ov
R
nd
La
ar
gu

1. To select Drive (D) when the vehicle is To use CommandShift™, first select M/S
stationary, apply the brake pedal and press mode, then move the gear selector forward
Ja

the gear selector release button. to move up a gear, and backward to move
down gear.
©

Note: If pressure is applied to the gear

selector before the brake pedal is applied,
any gear selected may not be available,
irrespective of the lever position. In this
situation, remove pressure from the gear
selector, make sure the brake pedal is
applied, and select the required gear.
2. To select Manual/Sport (M/S) mode, move
the gear selector to the left while in D.
Confirmation will be displayed in the
Message centre.
To return to automatic mode, move the gear
selector back to the D position. The D on
the gear selector display will illuminate to
confirm that automatic mode has been
selected.
3. The selected gear will be displayed in the
Message centre.
Park (P) should be engaged and the
Electric Parking Brake (EPB) applied
when the vehicle is stationary.

69
L
Gearbox

Always select P and switch off the HILL DESCENT

ignition before leaving the vehicle.
Never select Park (P) while the vehicle
is in motion.
Never select Reverse (R) while the
vehicle is in forward motion.
Never select a forward gear while the
vehicle is in rearward motion.
Do not rev the engine or allow it to run
above normal idle speed, while selecting
D or R, or while the vehicle is stationary
With Hill Descent Control (HDC) selected in
either automatic, Sport or CommandShift
modes, a low gear will be selected and
maintained to provide maximum engine braking.
Should the gear selector be moved to D from
the Manual/Sport (M/S)/CommandShift position,
the selected gear will be retained until the
descent is completed. See 80, HDC
OPERATION.

15
with any gear selected.
TRANSMISSION FAULT

20
In the event that the transmission develops a
Do not allow the vehicle to remain
fault, a warning message may be displayed in
stationary for any length of time, with a

d
the Message centre and only limited gears may
gear selected and the engine running. ite
become available. You should seek qualified
Always select P or Neutral (N) if the
assistance immediately.
m
engine is to idle for a prolonged period.
Li

MANUAL GEAR SELECTION MANUAL TRANSMISSION

er

Selection of Reverse (R) gear is

If CommandShift™ is selected, 1st gear must
ov

prevented when the vehicle is travelling

be used for moving off from stationary.
R

in excess of 24 km/h (15 mph). Never

To return to Manual/Sport (M/S) mode after attempt to engage R gear while the
nd

CommandShift™ has been selected, move the vehicle is in forward motion. This may
gear selector into the Drive (D) position, then
La

result in serious transmission damage

back to M/S mode. and costly repairs.
ar

TRANSMISSION COMMANDSHIFT SELECTED A gear shift indicator warning lamp will

will appear in the Message centre when the
gu

illuminate briefly at the recommended (upshift)

transmission is in CommandShift mode. gear change point. See 36, GEAR SHIFT
Ja

Note: In order to protect the engine, the (GREEN).

transmission will automatically change up to
©

prevent over-revving or down if the engine is

labouring.
CommandShift™ can be effective when rapid
acceleration and engine braking are required.
A gear shift indicator warning lamp will
illuminate briefly at the recommended (upshift)
gear change point. See 36, GEAR SHIFT
(GREEN).

70
 R
Stability control

DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)

Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) is
unable to compensate for driver
misjudgement. It remains the driver's
responsibility to drive with due care
and attention, in a manner which is
safe for the vehicle, its occupants, and
the other road users.
DSC optimises vehicle stability, even in critical To disable DSC, press and briefly hold the DSC
driving situations. The system controls dynamic OFF switch on the fascia. The DSC off warning
stability when accelerating and when starting lamp will illuminate continuously. See 35,

15
from a standstill. Additionally, it identifies DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC) OFF
unstable driving behaviour, such as understeer

20
(AMBER). Deactivating DSC also reduces the
and oversteer, and helps to keep the vehicle level of Traction control intervention and may

d
under control by manipulating engine output lead to an increase in wheel spin.
and applying the brakes at individual wheels.
ite
Some noise may be generated when the brakes SWITCHING DSC ON
m
are applied.
Li

DSC is re-enabled by one of the following:

• Press and briefly hold the DSC OFF switch.
er

SWITCHING DSC OFF

• Start the engine.
ov

Safety may be reduced by

inappropriately disabling DSC. In the • Select a new Terrain response special
R

majority of driving situations, and program.

nd

particularly on-road, it is
recommended that you do not disable
La

DSC.
ar

In some driving conditions, it may be

appropriate to disable DSC to improve traction.
gu

These conditions include:

Ja

• Rocking the vehicle out of a hollow or deep

rut.
©

• Pulling away in deep snow, or on a loose

surface.
• Driving through deep sand or mud.

71
L
Brakes
IMPORTANT INFORMATION
Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal
while the vehicle is in motion.
Never allow the vehicle to coast
(freewheel) with the engine turned off.
The engine must be running to provide
full braking assistance. The brakes will
still function with the engine off, but
far more pressure will be required to
operate them.
If the red brake warning indicator
illuminates, safely bring the vehicle to
a stop as quickly as possible, and seek
qualified assistance.
Never place non-approved floor
matting or any other obstructions under
the brake pedal. This restricts pedal
travel and braking efficiency.
Driving through heavy rain or water can have
er
an adverse effect on braking efficiency. Under
ov
such circumstances, it is recommended that
R
you lightly apply the brakes intermittently, to
dry the brakes.
nd
La
STEEP SLOPES
If the vehicle is stationary on a steep, slippery
ar
slope, it may begin to slide, even with the brakes
gu
applied. This is because, without wheel rotation,
the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) cannot
Ja
determine vehicle movement.
©
To counteract this, briefly release the brakes to
allow for some wheel rotation and then re-apply
the brakes to allow the ABS to gain control.
72
EMERGENCY BRAKE ASSIST (EBA)
If the driver rapidly applies the brakes, EBA
automatically boosts the braking force to its
maximum, in order to bring the vehicle to a halt
as quickly as possible. If the driver applies the
brakes slowly, but conditions mean that the
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) operates on
the front wheels, EBA will increase the braking
force in order to apply ABS control to the rear
wheels.
EBA stops operating as soon as the brake pedal
15
is released.
20
The amber brake warning lamp illuminates
briefly when the ignition is turned on. See 35,
d
BRAKE (AMBER).
ite
A fault with the EBA system is indicated by the
m
amber brake warning lamp illuminating and an
Li
associated warning message. Drive with care,
avoiding heavy brake application and seek
qualified assistance.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE FORCE
DISTRIBUTION (EBD)
EBD controls the balance of braking forces
supplied to the front and rear wheels, in order
to maintain maximum braking efficiency.
If the vehicle has a light load (only the driver in
the vehicle, for example), EBD will reduce the
braking force applied to the rear wheels. If the
vehicle is heavily laden, EBD will allow greater
braking force to the rear wheels.
The red brake warning lamp illuminates briefly
when the ignition is turned on. See 34, BRAKE
(RED).
A fault with the EBD system is indicated by the
red brake warning indicator illuminating and an
associated warning message. Gently and safely
stop the vehicle and seek qualified assistance.

ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE (EPB)
The Electric Parking Brake (EPB)
operates on the rear wheels; therefore,
secure parking of the vehicle is
dependent on being on a hard and stable
surface.
Do not rely on the Electric Parking Brake
(EPB) to operate effectively, if the rear
wheels have been immersed in mud or
water.
Note: If the vehicle is used in severe off-road
conditions (for example, wading, deep mud,
etc.), additional maintenance and adjustment
of the EPB will be required. Consult your
Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
er
ov
R
nd
La
ar
gu
Ja
With the ignition turned on, press the brake
pedal and press down on the EPB switch. This
©
will release the EPB.
With the vehicle stationary, pull up the EPB
switch and release it to apply the Electric
Parking Brake. The parking brake warning lamp
(see 34, PARKING BRAKE (RED)) illuminates
to indicate that the EPB is applied.
If the EPB is operated when the vehicle's speed
is less than 3 km/h (2 mph), the vehicle will be
brought to an abrupt stop. The stop lamps will
not be illuminated.
R
Brakes
With manual transmission, the EPB is applied
automatically if the ignition is switched off and
the vehicle's speed is below 3 km/h (2 mph).
To prevent automatic operation, when the
vehicle is stationary, press and hold the EPB
switch in the release position. Within 5 seconds,
switch off the ignition and continue to hold the
EPB switch for a further 2 seconds.
With automatic transmission, manual
application of the EPB is required.
Driving the vehicle with the EPB applied,
15
or repeated use of the EPB to slow the
vehicle, may cause serious damage to
20
the brake system.
d
In an emergency, with the vehicle travelling at
ite
more than 3 km/h (2 mph), pulling on the EPB
switch and holding gives a gradual reduction in
m
the speed. The brake warning lamp will
Li
illuminate accompanied by a warning tone and
a warning message in the Message centre. The
stop lamps will illuminate.
If the vehicle is stationary with the EPB applied
and the transmission in Drive (D) or Reverse
(R), pressing the accelerator will release the
EPB and allow the vehicle to move off.
Note: Automatic release of the EPB is only
possible when the driver’s door is closed, or
the driver’s seat belt is buckled.
If the system detects a fault with the EPB, the
amber brake warning lamp will illuminate
accompanied by a message in the Message
centre.
If the system detects a fault while the EPB is
operating, the red parking brake warning lamp
will flash, accompanied by a message in the
Message centre.
Note: The red parking brake warning lamp will
continue to be illuminated for at least ten
seconds after the ignition has been turned off.
73
L
Parking aids

USING THE PARKING AID

15
20
d
ite
m
Li
er
ov
R
nd
La

Parking aids may not detect moving To manually activate the front sensors,
press the PDC button. The button indicator
ar

objects, such as children and animals,

until they are dangerously close. will illuminate to confirm.
gu

Always use extreme caution when To turn off the system when active, press
Ja

manoeuvring. the button. The button indicator will

extinguish to confirm.
The Park Distance Control (PDC)
©

sensors may not detect some
obstructions (for example, narrow posts
or small objects close to the ground).
Note: The rear sensors are automatically
disabled when a trailer is connected.
1. When Reverse (R) is selected, the front and
rear parking sensors are activated
automatically, and the switch indicator will
illuminate.
2. The range of the Parking aid sensors varies
between the front, rear, and corners of the
vehicle.
The front sensors will remain active, as long as
the vehicle's forward speed does not exceed 16
km/h (10 mph).
Selecting Neutral (N) from R will keep the front
and rear sensors active.

74

When objects are detected, the Parking aid
emits a warning tone, which increases in
frequency as the vehicle gets closer to the object
and then becomes constant when the obstacle
is within 300 mm (12 inches).
Note: The front Parking aid provides an audible
proximity warning when driving forwards and
when reversing.
Note: The sensors should be kept clean to
maintain accuracy and performance. See 156,
SENSORS AND CAMERAS.
PARKING AID SYSTEM FAULT
If a system fault is detected, a long high-pitched
tone will sound, and the switch indicator will
flash. Contact your Dealer/Authorised Repairer
as soon as possible.
REAR CAMERA
er
It remains the driver's responsibility
ov
to detect obstacles and estimate the
R
vehicle's distance from them when
reversing.
nd
La
ar
gu
Ja
©
R
Parking aids
When Reverse (R) gear is selected, the screen
automatically displays a wide-angle, colour
image from the rear of your vehicle.
The Rear camera system provides a rear-view
image to assist in reversing the vehicle. Overlaid
on the image are reversing guide lines.
Rear-view camera display on the Touch screen
will discontinue when either of the following
apply:
• Drive (D) is selected for longer than 5
seconds.
15
• Drive (D) is selected and/or the vehicle's
20
speed is greater than 18 km/h (11 mph).
To adjust the camera settings while in Reverse
d
(R), touch anywhere on the Touch screen to
ite
display the user options.
m
Li
1. Solid line: The projected path based on the
current steering wheel position.
75
L
Parking aids

2. Dotted line: The safe working width of the

vehicle (including exterior mirrors).
3. Taildoor access guideline: Do not reverse
beyond this point, if taildoor access is
required.
4. Parking sensor activation: A coloured area
appears, to indicate which rear sensor(s)
has been activated.
5. User option: Touch to enable/disable (1),
(2) and (3).
6. User option: Touch to enable/disable (4)

15
Parking sensor.

20
7. User option: Touch to enable/disable Hitch
assist guidance lines.

d
The camera must be kept clean and free
ite
from debris or obstructions, for
m
example, ice, frost, snow, leaves, mud,
Li

or insects. Failure to keep the camera

clean may result in miscalculation or
er

false indications.
ov
R
nd
La
ar
gu
Ja
©

76
 R
Cruise control

USING CRUISE CONTROL Note: When setting the Cruise control to

In certain conditions, such as a steep
gradient, the vehicle's speed may
exceed the set cruising speed. This is
because engine braking is unable to
maintain or reduce the vehicle's speed.
Driver intervention may be required.
Note: Cruise control is not available when using
Hill Descent Control (HDC) or when a Terrain
response special program has been selected,
except for the Grass-Gravel-Snow (GGS)
the speed limit, it is important to remember
that it is possible for the vehicle's speed to
increase when travelling downhill. This may
result in the vehicle's speed exceeding the
speed limit.
2. RES: Press to resume the set speed.
RES should be used only if the driver is
aware of the set speed and intends to
return to it.
3. Press to decrease the set speed.

15
program. 4. CAN: Press to cancel, but retain the set

20
Note: Do not use Cruise control when driving speed in the memory.
off-road. Cruise control will also be cancelled if the

d
Note: Do not use Cruise control with brake pedal is pressed, the gear selector is
ite
Manual/Sport (M/S) mode selected. moved to Neutral (N), or if HDC is activated.
m
The system is operated by controls mounted
Li

on the steering wheel. The driver can also

intervene, at any time, by use of the brake or
er

accelerator pedals.
ov

Note: If the accelerator pedal is pressed for

R

more than 5 minutes, Cruise control will be

cancelled.
nd
La
ar
gu

1. SET+: Press to set the speed or to increase

Ja

the set speed. The Cruise control warning

lamp will illuminate to confirm that Cruise
©

control is operational. See 37, CRUISE

CONTROL (GREEN).
The cruising speed can also be increased
using the accelerator. When the desired
speed is reached, press the button to set
and maintain the new speed and then
release the accelerator.
Note: Cruise control can only be engaged
at speeds in excess of 30 km/h (18 mph).

77
L
Terrain response
BEFORE DRIVING OFF-ROAD
Before venturing off-road, it is absolutely
essential that inexperienced drivers become
fully familiar with the vehicle's controls. In
particular, CommandShift™, Hill Descent
Control (HDC) and the Terrain response system.
TERRAIN RESPONSE OPERATION
Terrain response selection is via the centre
console switches. Use the switches to move
through the different program selections. The
currently selected program icon will be
er
displayed in the Message centre.
ov
Messages relating to the Terrain response
system are displayed in the Message centre.
R
See 32, WARNING AND INFORMATION
nd
MESSAGES. Most of the messages that appear
will be for information only and require no driver
La
intervention.
Note: Changing between special programs will
ar
alter various vehicle settings, for example,
gu
engine revs while at the current accelerator
Ja
pedal position may alter or the steering feel
might change. These changes are not dramatic,
©
but will be noticeable.
It is advisable to experiment with the available
settings in an environment that will not effect
other road users.
78
GENERAL PROGRAM (SPECIAL
PROGRAMS OFF)
This program is compatible with all
on and off-road conditions. If not
already active, it should be selected
before driving on surfaces which are
similar to a hard road surface. Dry
cobbles, tarmac, dry wooden planks,
etc., all fall into this category.
This program should be selected once the need
15
for a special program has passed. Once the
special program has been deselected, all of the
20
vehicle's systems will return to their normal
settings, except Hill Descent Control (HDC).
d
HDC will remain active, if it was selected
ite
manually.
m
Li
GRASS/GRAVEL/SNOW
This program should be used where
a firm surface is covered with loose
or slippery material.
Note: For deep gravel, it is recommended that
the Sand program is selected.
Note: If the vehicle is unable to gain traction in
deep snow, switching Dynamic Stability Control
(DSC) off may help. DSC should be switched
on again, as soon as the difficulty is overcome.
MUD-RUTS
This program should be used for
crossing terrain that is muddy,
rutted, soft, or uneven. Hill Descent
Control (HDC) is automatically
selected with this program.
SAND
This program should be used for
terrain which is predominantly soft,
dry sand or deep gravel.
 R
Terrain response

Note: If the vehicle is unable to gain traction in
extremely soft, dry sand, switching DSC off may
help. DSC should be switched on again as soon
as the difficulty is overcome.
If the sand to be crossed is damp/wet, and
sufficiently deep enough to cause the wheels to
sink into the surface, the Mud-Ruts program
should be used.
DRIVER OVERRIDE OPTIONS
Although Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) is
If the system becomes completely inoperable,
all of the special program indicators will be
switched off and a relevant message will be
displayed in the Message centre.
WADING
The maximum advisable wading depth is 500
mm (20 in). If the vehicle remains stationary in
water above the door sill level, severe electrical
damage may occur.
Do not switch off the engine when

15
automatically engaged when a special program wading and avoid stopping. If the engine

20
is selected, it can be turned off, if required. See stalls, restart immediately. If water has
71, SWITCHING DSC OFF. entered the engine air intake, switch off

d
Hill Descent Control (HDC) is automatically immediately. The vehicle must be
engaged for some Terrain response programs.
iterecovered from the water and be
transported to a Dealer/Authorised
m
If required, HDC can be deselected or engaged
independently of Terrain response. See 80, Repairer.
Li

SELECTING HDC.
er

The HDC status will be displayed in the Message

ov

centre, whether it is engaged, or disengaged,

by the system or by the driver.
R
nd

SYSTEM DIFFICULTIES
La

Use of an incorrect program will impair

the vehicle's response to the terrain and
ar

can reduce the life of the suspension and

gu

drive systems.
If the system becomes partially inoperable for
Ja

any reason, it may not be possible to select

©

special programs and a relevant message will

be displayed in the Message centre.
If a participating vehicle's system becomes
temporarily inoperable, the General program
will be automatically selected. Once the system
returns to normal operation, the previously
active program will be reactivated unless the
ignition has been turned off in the meantime.

79
L
Hill descent control (HDC)

SELECTING HDC If the HDC warning lamp flashes, See 37, HILL
DESCENT CONTROL (GREEN), HDC has been
selected but is not operating. This is caused by
the system’s operating conditions not being met
(for example, the vehicle's speed is too high).
If HDC is deselected while operating, the
warning lamp will flash, See 37, HILL DESCENT
CONTROL (GREEN), and the system will fade
out, allowing the vehicle's speed to gradually
increase.
If the vehicle's speed exceeds 80 km/h (50

15
mph), HDC will disengage and the HDC indicator
will extinguish.

20
Note: HDC is automatically deselected if the

d
ignition is switched off for more than 6 hours.
ite
HDC OPERATION
m
Li

With HDC engaged, the speed of descent can

be altered using the Cruise control steering
er

wheel switches, as follows:

ov

• To increase speed, press and hold the +

R

switch (2) until the desired speed is

Hill Descent Control (HDC) is designed to achieved.
nd

restrict vehicle speed to a set limit when • To decrease speed, press and hold the -
La

travelling downhill. switch (3) until the desired speed is

1. Press to switch HDC on and off. achieved.
ar

2. Press to increase the set speed. When the switch is released, the selected speed
gu

will be maintained.
3. Press to decrease the set speed.
Ja

To increase or decrease speed gradually, tap

HDC can be selected at speeds below 80 km/h
the + or - switch as required. Each tap of the
(50 mph).
©

switch will increase/decrease the speed in

Manual transmission: HDC can be used in first
or Reverse (R) gears.
Automatic transmission: HDC can be used in
Drive (D), R or CommandShift 1. When in D,
the vehicle will select the most appropriate gear.
Note: HDC is automatically selected by some
of the Terrain response special programs.
To select HDC, press and release the HDC on/off
switch (1).
increments/decrements of 0.5 km/h (0.3 mph).
The accelerator pedal can also be used to
increase speed, up to the threshold in each gear.
Note: Each gear has a predetermined minimum
speed.
Descent speed will only increase on a slope
steep enough to provide additional momentum;
therefore, use of the + switch on a gentle slope
may not increase the speed.

80
 R
Hill descent control (HDC)

When using HDC in manual transmission BRAKE TEMPERATURE

vehicles, pressing the clutch pedal will prevent
HDC from controlling the speed of descent.
If the brake pedal is pressed, HDC will be
overridden and the brakes will operate as
normal. When the brake pedal is released, HDC
will resume control of the descent.
If HDC is overridden during a descent, via the
brake pedal, HDC assistance will fade out
gradually. This is to prevent loss of control if
HDC is switched off in error. HDC will resume
In extreme circumstances, the HDC system may
cause brake temperatures to exceed their preset
limits. If this occurs, the warning HDC
TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE will be displayed
in the Message centre. HDC will then fade out
and become temporarily inactive.
Once the brakes have reached an acceptable
temperature, the message will disappear (or the
warning indicator will extinguish) and HDC will,
if required, resume operation.

15
control when switched back on, if assistance is
still required, but at the speed the vehicle is

20
SYSTEM FAULT
travelling when the brake pedal is released.
If a fault is detected in the HDC system, HDC

d
FAULT SYSTEM NOT AVAILABLE will appear in
ite
GRADIENT RELEASE CONTROL (GRC)
the Message centre.
m
With HDC activated, if the vehicle is stopped on
If the fault is detected while the system is
a slope using the brake pedal, GRC will become
Li

operating, HDC assistance will fade out.

active (except in Terrain response Sand
er

program). During a hill ascent, when the brake If a fault is detected, contact your
Dealer/Authorised Repairer as soon as possible.
ov

pedal is released, GRC will automatically delay

and graduate the brake release, to allow the
R

vehicle to move smoothly away. When

nd

descending a hill, a similar brake hold and

gradual release is employed to provide a smooth
La

transition into HDC control.

GRC operates in forward and reverse gears and
ar

requires no driver intervention.

gu
Ja

WARNING MESSAGES
Do not attempt a steep descent if the
©

HDC system is inoperative or if any

HDC warning messages are displayed
in the Message centre.

81
L
Audio/video overview

AUDIO/VIDEO CONTROLS

15
20
d
ite
m
Li
er
ov
R
nd

In the interest of safety, only operate, 4. AUDIO VIDEO: Press for direct access to
La

adjust, or view the system when it is the Audio/Video menu.

safe to do so. 5. CD/Digital Versatile Disc (DVD) eject button.
ar

Sustained exposure to high sound 6. CD/DVD loading slot:

gu

levels (greater than 85 decibels) can The player will accommodate 1 disc at a
damage your hearing. time, but up to 10 CDs can be uploaded into
Ja

1. Press to switch the Audio system on/off. the CD store. Only Compact Disc Digital
Audio (CDDA) discs can be uploaded into
©

Note: The Audio system will operate with

the ignition on or off, but will always switch the CD store.
off when the ignition is switched off. Switch Only discs with CDDA tracks and no other
the audio on again, if required. type, can be uploaded to the Stored CD
store.
2. Rotate to adjust the volume level.
Insert a disc into the loading slot until
Note: If the volume is turned to zero while resistance is felt. The player mechanism will
a Compact Disc (CD) is playing, the CD will complete the loading.
pause play. Play will resume when a greater
7. Press to increase the volume for any
volume is selected.
source.
3. Touch screen.
8. Seek up:

82
 R
Audio/video overview

Short press: 14. Seek down:

• To select the next radio preset.
• To select the next track on the chosen
audio source - CD, MP3, etc.
• when the telephone is in use, press to
scroll up lists of calls or phonebook
entries.
• To select the next TV channel on the
channel list, or the next DVD chapter.
Long press:
• Short press to auto-seek to the previous
radio station or previous track on the
chosen audio source.
• Long press to activate manual-seek or
to scan backwards though a track.
15. Press to display the Audio settings menu.
AUDIO SETTINGS
To view the Audio settings menu, press the

15
• To auto-seek up the frequency to the Audio settings hard key or select Settings, then
next radio station. Audio settings from the touch screen.

20
9. Press to decrease the volume for any To adjust the sound settings:
source.

d
1. Touch the + or - soft keys to adjust Bass,
ite
10. MODE: Press repeatedly to scroll through Treble, or Subwoofer levels.
all of the audio/video sources.
m
2. If surround sound is fitted, touch DPLIIx,
DTS Neo:6, Meridian Trifield, or select
Li

11. Seek down:

Short press: Stereo to switch surround sound off.
er

• To select the previous radio preset. Note: Surround sound options are not available
ov

• To select the previous track or start of for certain sources where the surround sound
R

the current track on the chosen audio mode is set automatically.

source - CD, MP3, etc. To adjust balance and fade:
nd

• When the telephone is in use, press to

La

scroll down lists of calls or phonebook

entries.
ar

• To select the previous TV channel on

gu

the channel list, or the previous DVD

Ja

chapter.
Long press:
©

• to auto seek down the frequency to the

next radio station.
12. Menu navigation control: Rotate to scroll
through menu items.
13. Seek up: 1. From the Sound settings menu, select
Balance/Fade.
• Short press to auto-seek to the next
radio station or the next track on the 2. Touch the arrow soft keys to move the
chosen audio source. sound focal point to the desired area of the
vehicle. Alternatively, touch the sound focal
• Long press to activate manual-seek or
point and 'drag' it to the required position.
to scan forwards though a track.

83
L
Audio/video overview

LOADING DISCS LICENSING

Do not force the disc into the slot.

Do not use irregular shaped CDs or

DVDs, and those with a scratch
protection film or self-adhesive label
attached.
The CD unit will play Compact Discs
(CDs) that conform to the international
Red Book standard audio specification.
Playback of CDs not conforming to this

15
standard cannot be guaranteed.

20
Recordable (CD-R) discs and re-writable
(CD-RW) discs may not function

d
correctly. ite
Recordable (DVD-R or DVD+R) discs
m
may not function correctly.
Li

Dual format, dual-sided discs (DVD Plus,

CD-DVD format) are thicker than normal
er

CDs, and so playback cannot be

ov

guaranteed and jamming may occur.

R

Use only high quality 12 cm (4.7 in.) circular

discs.
nd

The unit will play Compact Disc Digital Audio

La

(CDDA) discs, MP3, WMA, WAV, and AAC files.

The player will accommodate one CD or DVD Manufactured under licence from Dolby
ar

disc at a time, but up to 10 CDs can be uploaded Laboratories.

gu

onto the virtual CD store. Dolby, Pro Logic, and the double-D symbol are
Ja

Only CDDA discs can be loaded onto the virtual registered trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
CD store.
©

84

Manufactured under licence, under U.S. Patent
#’s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380;
5,978,762; 6,487,535; 7,003,467 & other U.S.
and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS,
the Symbol, and Neo:6 are registered
trademarks, & DTS Digital Surround and the
DTS logos are trademarks of DTS, Inc. Product
includes software. © DTS, Inc. All Rights
Reserved.
er
ov
Manufactured under licence, under U.S. Patent
R
#’s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380;
nd
5,978,762; 6,487,535 & other U.S. and
worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS and
La
the Symbol are registered trademarks, & DTS
2.0+ Digital Out and the DTS logos are
ar
trademarks of DTS, Inc. Product includes
gu
software. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Ja
©
DivX Certified® to play DivX® video.
DivX®, DivX Certified® and associated logos
are registered trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are
used under licence.
R
Audio/video overview
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX® is a digital video
format created by DivX, Inc. This is an official
DivX Certified device that plays DivX video. Visit
www.divx.com for more information and
software tools to convert your files into DivX
video.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX
Certified® device must be registered in order
to play DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) content.
To generate the registration code, locate the
DivX VOD section in the device setup menu.
15
1. Follow the route, Home Menu - Audio Video
- TV/My video - Settings - VOD.
20
2. An 8 digit code will be displayed. This is
d
your unique DivX code. Make a note of this
ite
code and keep it for future reference.
m
Go to http://vod.divx.com with this code to
complete the registration process and learn
Li
more about DivX VOD.
Covered by one or more of the following U.S.
Patents: 7,295,673; 7,460,668; 7,515,710;
7,519,274.
Music and video recognition technology and
related data are provided by Gracenote®.
Gracenote is the industry standard in music
recognition technology and related content
delivery. For more information, please visit
www.gracenote.com.
85
L
Audio/video overview
CD, DVD, Blu-ray Disc, and music and
video-related data from Gracenote, Inc.,
copyright © 2000 to present Gracenote.
Gracenote Software, copyright © 2000 to
present Gracenote. One or more patents owned
by Gracenote apply to this product and service.
See the Gracenote website for a non-exhaustive
list of applicable Gracenote patents. Gracenote,
CDDB, MusicID, MediaVOCS, the Gracenote
logo and logotype, and the "Powered by
Gracenote" logo are either registered trademarks
or trademarks of Gracenote in the United States
and/or other countries.
Japan only
This product uses copyright protection
technology, and Rovi corporation and other
copyright holders are protected by the patent
laws of the United States and other intellectual
property rights. Use of this copyright protection
technology requires authorization from Rovi
er
corporation. Further, without special
ov
authorization from Rovi corporation, use is
R
restricted to the home and other private
appreciation. Reverse engineering and
nd
disassembly are prohibited.
La
GRACENOTE® END USER LICENSING
ar
AGREEMENT
gu
This application or device contains software
Ja
from Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville, California
(“Gracenote”). The software from Gracenote
©
(the “Gracenote Software”) enables this
application to perform disc and/or file
identification and obtain music-related
information, including name, artist, track, and
title information (“Gracenote Data”) from online
servers or embedded databases (collectively,
“Gracenote Servers”) and to perform other
functions. You may use Gracenote Data only by
means of the intended End-User functions of
this application or device.
86
You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, the
Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers for
your own personal non-commercial use only.
You agree not to assign, copy, transfer or
transmit the Gracenote Software or any
Gracenote Data to any third party. YOU AGREE
NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA,
THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE
SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED
HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive licence to
15
use the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software,
and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you
20
violate these restrictions. If your licence
terminates, you agree to cease any and all use
d
of the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software,
ite
and Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves all
m
rights in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Li
Software, and the Gracenote Servers, including
all ownership rights. Under no circumstances
will Gracenote become liable for any payment
to you for any information that you provide. You
agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its rights
under this Agreement against you directly in its
own name.
The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier
to track queries for statistical purposes. The
purpose of a randomly assigned numeric
identifier is to allow the Gracenote service to
count queries without knowing anything about
who you are. For more information, see the web
page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for the
Gracenote service.
 R
Audio/video overview

The Gracenote Software and each item of

Gracenote Data are licensed to you “AS IS.”
Gracenote makes no representations or
warranties, express or implied, regarding the
accuracy of any Gracenote Data from in the
Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves the right
to delete data from the Gracenote Servers or to
change data categories for any cause that
Gracenote deems sufficient. No warranty is
made that the Gracenote Software or Gracenote
Servers are error-free or that functioning of
Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers will

15
be uninterrupted. Gracenote is not obligated to

20
provide you with new enhanced or additional
data types or categories that Gracenote may

d
provide in the future and is free to discontinue ite
its services at any time.
m
GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
Li

EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT

LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
er

MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A

ov

PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND

NON-INFRINGEMENT. GRACENOTE DOES NOT
R

WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE

nd

OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE

SOFTWARE OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN
La

NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR

ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
ar

DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR

gu

LOST REVENUES.
Ja

© Gracenote, Inc. 2009

©

87
L
Radio

RADIO CONTROLS

15
20
d
ite
m
Li

In the interest of safety, only operate Note: When manual seek is selected,
er

or adjust the system when it is safe to auto seek cannot be selected for
do so. approximately 10 seconds.
ov

Sustained exposure to high sound 4. Information: More information from the

R

levels (greater than 85 decibels) can broadcasting station.

nd

damage your hearing. 5. Seek up:

1. AM/FM: Waveband selection: Touch to view
La

• Short touch to auto seek up the

and select a waveband. The radio will tune frequency to the next radio station.
ar

to the last used station on that waveband.

• Long touch to activate manual seek
Touch again to close.
gu

mode. Further short touches change

The waveband selection box will close
the frequency in single increments. A
Ja

automatically after 5 seconds without use.

further long touch will scan forwards
2. Display showing information about the through the current waveband until the
©

current station. soft key is released.

3. Seek down: 6. Settings: Touch to view and
• Short touch to auto seek down the activate/deactivate the following features:
frequency to the next radio station. RDS, Traffic, News, AF, and REG. See 89,
• Long touch to activate manual seek RADIO DATA SYSTEM (RDS).
mode. Further short touches change
the frequency in single decrements. A
further long touch will scan backwards
through the current waveband until the
soft key is released.

88
 R
Radio

7. Station list (FM only): Select to view a list • Alternative Frequency (AF): Select to allow
of available stations on the waveband. The the radio to automatically re-tune to a
list can be sorted by Frequency, Name, or stronger Alternative Frequency (AF) for the
PTY (pop, news, sport, etc.), by selecting current station. This is useful on a journey
the appropriate soft key. Touch to select the where the vehicle travels through different
chosen station. transmitter areas.
If the stations are sorted by category, touch
the chosen category to view and select a
corresponding station.
8. Frequency input: Select to enter a known
frequency of a station on the current

15
waveband, using the numeric keypad that
appears. Select OK or wait for 2 seconds to

20
tune to the entered frequency.
9. Station presets: Each waveband has 6

d
preset positions. ite
• Touch and release to tune to the station
m
stored on that preset.
Li

• Touch and hold to store the current

er

station on that preset (the radio will

ov

mute while the station is stored and

then beep).
R

• Use the seek buttons on the steering

nd

wheel to change to the next or previous

preset station.
La
ar

RADIO DATA SYSTEM (RDS)

gu

Your radio is equipped with RDS, which enables

the audio unit to receive additional information
Ja

with normal FM radio signals.

©

Note: Not all FM radio stations broadcast RDS

information.
Select Settings to view or alter RDS settings.
• Traffic/News: Provides local travel or news
information.
• Regionalisation (REG): Select to prevent
the radio tuning into an alternative local
station that has a stronger signal.

89
L
DAB radio

DAB RADIO CONTROLS

15
20
d
ite
m
Li

In the interest of safety, only operate • Short touch to find the next available
er

or adjust the system when it is safe to channel.

do so.
ov

• Long touch to find the next available

Sustained exposure to high sound Ensemble. The first channel in the new
R

levels (greater than 85 decibels) can Ensemble will be selected.

nd

damage your hearing. 6. Settings: Touch to view the DAB Settings

1. DAB 1/2/3: Touch to view and select a DAB menu:
La

band (DAB 1, 2, or 3). The radio will tune • Options: To activate/deactivate FM

ar

to the last used channel on that band. Touch Traffic and Link DAB, and to alter DAB
again to close.
gu

country and DAB format settings (with

2. Display showing the current channel, the the vehicle stationary).
Ja

associated Ensemble and the relevant DAB • Announcements: Select an alarm

radio text. announcement and up to 3 other
©

3. Seek down: announcement types (traffic, news, etc.)

• Short touch to seek a previous available
channel.
• Long touch to seek a previous available
Ensemble. The first channel in the new
Ensemble will be selected.
4. Channel information: Touch to view DAB
text and channel information.
5. Seek up:
from the list. The selected
announcements will interrupt the
current programme, when broadcast.
7. Channel list: Touch to view a list of
available Ensembles and channels. The list
can be sorted by Ensemble, Channel,
Subchannel, or by Category.

90

• If an Ensemble is selected from the list,
all available channels from that
ensemble will be displayed.
• Sorting by Subchannel is only available
when the current channel is
broadcasting subchannels.
• If Category is selected, touch the
chosen category to view corresponding
channels, before making your selection
from the list.
Once the desired selection has been made,
select the Back soft key to return to the
main DAB menu.
8. Subchannel: If subchannels are broadcast
by the current channel, this soft key will be
active. Select to allow subchannels, then
select the required subchannel with the seek
down/up keys.
9. Auto-tune: Select to scan for all available
er
DAB Ensembles/channels. This needs to be
ov
done before using the DAB radio for the first
time.
R
Auto-tune is also useful when travelling long
nd
distances, so regional Ensembles can be
tuned.
La
During Auto-tune, a pop-up shows tuning
progress.
ar
The Auto-tune process will not affect
gu
current presets, but some presets may not
operate if the channel they relate to is no
Ja
longer available (No reception displays).
©
10. Station presets: Each DAB band has 6
preset positions.
• Touch and release to tune the radio to
the station stored on that preset.
• Touch and hold to store the current
station on that preset (the radio will
mute while the station is stored).
• Use the seek buttons on the steering
wheel to select the next or previous
preset station.
R
DAB radio
Note: If you attempt to select a preset
channel that is now unavailable or invalid,
No reception is displayed.
DAB RADIO SETTINGS
In Settings:
• If the Link DAB setting is switched on and
the signal strength for a channel falls below
an acceptable level, the audio unit will
automatically search for other available
ensembles for a channel with the same
15
name.
20
If an alternative local channel is found, the
new channel is played automatically after a
d
few seconds. If the channel is not found
ite
after a few seconds, the message No
reception is displayed.
m
The word Link is displayed at the top of the
Li
Touch screen when Link DAB is enabled.
• Select DAB country if driving into another
country. Scroll through the country options
to choose the appropriate one. This will
prompt an Auto-tune.
Note: This option is disabled while the
vehicle is moving.
• Choose DAB format if moving to a region
that uses a different digital band. Available
formats are:
• L Band.
• Band III.
• L Band & Band III.
• L Band Canada.
• L Band Can & Band III.
This will prompt an Auto-tune.
Note: This option is disabled while the
vehicle is moving.
91
L
DAB radio

ENSEMBLES
Unlike AM/FM radio, DAB transmits several
channels/stations on a single frequency. A
group of channels is known as an ensemble.
Some channels within the ensemble may have
subchannels offering several listening options.
If reception is lost when the vehicle is in motion,
the vehicle may be out of range of the ensemble.
To build a new list of ensembles, select
Auto-tune.

15
20
d
ite
m
Li
er
ov
R
nd
La
ar
gu
Ja
©

92

PORTABLE MEDIA CONTROLS
Do not adjust the main audio unit's
er
controls, or allow the system to distract
the driver while the vehicle is moving.
ov
Driver distraction can lead to
R
accidents, causing serious injury or
death.
nd
Sustained exposure to high sound
La
levels (greater than 85 decibels) can
damage your hearing.
ar
See 82, AUDIO/VIDEO CONTROLS.
gu
My Music includes CD, iPod, USB, AUX, and
Ja
Bluetooth® wireless technology devices. The
full infotainment system also includes Stored
©
CD.
1. Touch the Source icon to display all of the
options. Select an option.
Note: Sound quality and volume levels
available from devices connected to the
auxiliary input may vary widely.
2. Display of information about the current
track, including elapsed run-time. Some of
this information is also displayed in the
Instrument panel.
R
Portable media
15
20
d
ite
m
Li
Note: Only connected devices that support
ID3 shall have the information displayed.
3. Settings: Select to switch traffic and news
announcements on or off. Additionally, for
MP3 recorded media, you can select the
number of list entries that are skipped when
you use the page up/down arrows, when
navigating a list.
4. Track list: Select to view the current CD or
Stored CD track list. Select a track to start
playback.
5. Browse: (iPod, USB, and Stored CD modes
only).
• Select to view the contents of the
connected device, which are displayed
as dictated by the file structure.
• Select a file to start playback (Browse
view will remain). Select a folder or
subfolder to view their contents.
• To return to the Controls menu, select
the Back soft key.
93
L
Portable media
Note: If the iPhone is connected via a
USB cable, so that audio can be played
or for phone charging, Bluetooth®
wireless technology devices audio is
disconnected.
6. Upload: Applicable to the Stored CD menu
only.
Select to view and manage the CDs loaded
onto the CD store.
• Select Upload, alongside an empty slot,
to upload the current CD. There are 10
slots available.
• If the CD store is full, select Replace to
overwrite an existing CD.
In each case, a confirmation pop-up will
appear. Select Yes to continue.
Note: Loading time is dependent on content
type. A % count up is displayed. Other
features can be selected while upload is in
er
progress.
ov
7. Skip/Scan forwards:
R
• Touch and release to skip to the next
track.
nd
• Touch and hold to scan forwards
La
through the current track. Play will
resume when the soft key is released.
ar
8. Repeat:
gu
In CD mode:
Ja
• Touch and release to repeat the current
track continuously until Repeat mode
©
is cancelled. Repeat track is displayed.
• Touch and release again to repeat the
current Stored CD (or folder for MP3
discs) continuously until Repeat mode
is cancelled. Repeat disc or Repeat
folder is displayed.
• Touch and release a third time to cancel
Repeat mode.
94
Note: Selecting Shuffle will cancel Repeat
mode, but Repeat track can be selected
with Shuffle mode active (cancels the
previously selected Shuffle mode).
In USB or iPod mode:
• Select to repeat the current track.
• Select again to repeat the current folder
(USB) or to cancel Repeat mode (iPod).
Select again to cancel Repeat mode for
USB devices.
Note: Repeat mode is not available for
15
Bluetooth® wireless technology devices.
20
Note: Selecting Shuffle will cancel Repeat
mode.
d
9. Pause/Play: Select to pause playback. Select
ite
again to resume playback.
m
10. Information: More information about the
Li
current track.
11. Shuffle:
• Touch and release once to play random
tracks from the current CD, MP3 folder,
USB folder, or iPod playlist. A Shuffle
message is displayed.
• Touch and release again to play random
tracks from CD, MP3 disc, USB folders
or tracks on the media device, or tracks
loaded onto the CD store. Shuffle all is
displayed.
• Touch and release again to cancel
Shuffle mode.
Note: Shuffle mode is not available for
Bluetooth® wireless technology devices.
12. Skip/Scan backwards:
• Touch and release within 3 seconds of
track playback to skip to the previous
track.
• Touch and release after 3 seconds of
track playback to skip to the beginning
of the current track.
 R
Portable media

• Touch and hold to scan backwards
through the current track. Playback will
resume when the soft key is released.
PORTABLE MEDIA CONNECTIONS
Portable media devices can be connected to the
media hub, located in the cubby box. Rear seat
passengers can connect at the rear of the centre
console. Compatible portable devices include:
• USB mass storage devices (for example, a
memory stick). Devices must use FAT or
Note: Some MP3 players have their own file
system that is not supported by this system. To
use your MP3 player, you must set it to USB
Removable Device or Mass Storage Device
mode. Only music that has been added to the
device in this mode can be played.
For a list of compatible Bluetooth® wireless
technology devices, please refer to the Land
Rover website at: www.landrover.com.
The Bluetooth® wireless technology devices
listed have been tested for compatibility with

15
FAT32 file format. Land Rover vehicles. Performance will vary,
based on the device’s software version and

20
• iPod (iPod Classic, iPod Touch, iPhone, and
battery condition. Devices are warranted by their
iPod Nano are supported - full functionality
manufacturer; not Land Rover.

d
for older devices cannot be guaranteed). ite
iPod Shuffle functionality cannot be
CONNECTING A DEVICE
m
guaranteed.
Li

• Auxiliary device (personal audio, MP3

players, all iPods).
er

Note: Auxiliary devices have no Touch

ov

screen control.
R

If you are connecting an iPod, mass storage or

nd

Bluetooth® wireless technology device, use the

Touch screen to operate and search the device.
La

Many of the controls are similar to those

available for CD play.
ar

Please disconnect your iPod when

gu

leaving the vehicle. Failure to do so, may

result in the iPod battery discharging.
Ja

Note: The Audio system will play MP3, WMA,

©

and AAC files. Read the manufacturer's instructions for

To maximise playback quality, it is
recommended that lossless compression is
used for any media files on USB or iPod. Failing
this, it is recommended that compressed files
utilise a minimum bitrate of 192 kb/s (a higher
bitrate is strongly recommended).
Note: iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer
Inc., registered in the US and other countries.
any device, before it is connected to the
Audio system. Make sure the device is
suitable and that you comply with any
instructions regarding connection and
operation. Failure to do so, may result
in damage to the vehicle’s Audio system
or the auxiliary device.
Connect the device into the appropriate socket.
1. USB socket.

95
L
Portable media
2. 3.5 mm AUX socket.
Do not plug non-audio devices into the
USB port.
Note: Use the cable supplied with your media
device to connect to the USB socket.
Note: A USB hub cannot be used to connect
more than 1 USB device to the audio unit.
Note: Devices connected to the USB ports will
be charged, but devices that are fully discharged
will not play.
Note: In some cases, if an iPhone is connected
via a USB cable for music and also to a
Bluetooth® wireless technology device for other
phone functions, the audio will stream through
only the last connected port. For example, if a
Bluetooth® wireless technology device is the
last connection made to the iPhone and the iPod
lead is connected, no audio will be heard
through the speakers via the iPod lead. Track
er
title and time information will still be shown on
ov
the display. Audio output from the speakers will
only be obtained if the user chooses Audio
R
mode on the Bluetooth® wireless technology
nd
device. To address this issue, disconnect and
La
reconnect your device's USB cable, or open the
iPod application on the iPhone, select the
ar
Bluetooth® icon and select Dock Connector on
the pop-up.
gu
When an iPod is connected, playback will
Ja
continue from the point at which it was last
playing, provided the iPod battery is in a good
©
state of charge.
Note: Options, such as Repeat and Mix, relate
to the device currently playing; they will not
apply to any subsequent device.
The 3.5mm AUX socket allows extra equipment
(for example, personal stereos, MP3 players,
hand-held navigation units, etc.) to be
connected to the Audio system.
Note: iPod shuffle may be connected via the
AUX socket.
96
PLAYING A PORTABLE DEVICE
If you are using a USB mass storage device or
approved iPod, you can control playback using
the Touch screen controls.
If you are using a Bluetooth® wireless
technology device, you can control playback
using the Touch screen, but some controls are
unavailable.
If you are using any portable media device via
the AUX socket, then you must control playback
from the device itself.
15
Land Rover does not recommend the
20
use of a Hard Disc Drive via the USB link
while the vehicle is in motion. These
d
devices are not designed for in-car use
ite
and may be damaged.
m
Li
CONNECTING MULTIPLE DEVICES
Do not plug non-audio devices into the
USB port.
You can connect multiple devices
simultaneously to the portable media interface
and switch between them using the Touch
screen. Select iPod, USB, Bluetooth or AUX, to
switch between modes.
The device docked first will remain the active
device until you choose to change.
If, after changing to the newly-docked device,
you change back to the first device, play will
resume at the point you left it (USB and iPod
only).
Note: You cannot use a USB hub to connect
more than 1 USB device to the audio unit.
Note: Devices connected to the iPod and USB
ports will be charged, but devices that are fully
discharged will not play.
Note: Options, such as Repeat and Shuffle,
relate to the device currently playing; they will
not apply to any subsequent device.

PAIRING AND CONNECTING USING
THE MEDIA PLAYER
For further information on Bluetooth® wireless
technology, see 104, BLUETOOTH®
INFORMATION.
Note: The process of pairing and connecting
your media device with the vehicle, using the
media device, will vary depending on the type
of media device.
1. Switch on the ignition and make sure the
Touch screen is active.
2. From the Home menu, select Audio/Video,
then the My music + soft key.
3. Touch Bluetooth.
4. A menu will appear. Select Change device.
5. Select the Device to vehicle option.
Note: The vehicle’s Bluetooth® wireless
technology system is only discoverable for
er
3 minutes.
ov
6. Using the media device, search for
R
Bluetooth® wireless technology devices.
nd
On some media devices, this is referred to
as a new paired device. See your media
La
device’s operating instructions for further
information.
ar
7. When the vehicle’s Bluetooth® wireless
gu
technology system is discovered, follow the
on-screen instructions. Select Yes, when
Ja
prompted, to confirm the pairing.
©
Either your device or the vehicle's system
will ask for a PIN (Personal Identification
Number). When prompted, enter a PIN of
your choice and select OK to confirm.
8. Enter the same PIN into the other device.
9. Once your device is paired and connected
to the system, a confirmation message will
be displayed, before switching to the My
music, Bluetooth screen.
R
Portable media
Note: Some media devices do not
automatically connect and need to be
manually connected, via the device or by
using the Change device option.
PORTABLE MEDIA PAIRING AND
CONNECTING USING THE TOUCH
SCREEN
For further information on Bluetooth®, wireless
technology, see 104, BLUETOOTH®
INFORMATION.
15
1. Switch on your Bluetooth® wireless
20
technology device connection. Make sure
it is in Bluetooth® discoverable mode,
d
sometimes referred to as 'find me' mode
ite
(see your device’s operating instructions
m
for more information).
Li
2. Switch on the ignition and make sure the
Touch screen is active.
3. From the Home menu, select Audio/Video,
then My Music.
4. Touch Bluetooth.
5. A menu will appear. Select Change device.
6. Select the Vehicle to device option.
7. Identify your device from the displayed list
and select the corresponding Pair and
connect option.
Note: If more than 5 devices are detected,
it may be necessary to use the scroll bar to
see the entire list.
8. When prompted, enter the PIN (Personal
Identification Number) code into your
device. See your device's operating
instructions for more information.
9. Once your device is paired and connected
to the system, a confirmation message will
be displayed before switching to the My
music, Bluetooth view.
97
L
Portable media

Note: Due to the duration of a Bluetooth®

wireless technology search, it is advised that
the time out to home screen feature is switched
off before attempting to search for Bluetooth®
wire less technology devices. This setting can
be changed within Setup, Screen, Time out
home.

CHANGING/DISCONNECTING A DEVICE
1. From the Bluetooth menu, select Change
device.

15
2. Select Disconnect. A confirmation pop-up

20
will appear and then you will be given the
option to Search new or select a different

d
device from the list of paired devices.
ite
m
Li
er
ov
R
nd
La
ar
gu
Ja
©

98
 R
Video media player

VIDEO MEDIA PLAYER CONTROLS

15
20
d
ite
m
Li

1. Source: Video input selection. 4. Tools: The following options can be

er

Touch to view and select DVD or other selected:

forms of video media (CD/USB), provided
ov

• GOTO: The GOTO menu allows you to

the relevant media is present. The selected access specific parts of the video, by
R

option will be displayed. Chapter or Title number.

nd

Note: After 5 seconds without use, the My • Subtitles.

video menu will close.
La

• Angle.
2. Preview screen for video media information:
• Audio.
ar

Touch to select full screen mode.

Short touch the screen again to view the • Top menu.
gu

controls at any time. 5. Menu: Select to view the Video media menu.
Ja

To return to preview mode, touch and hold On some screens this may be replaced by
the full screen view. a Browse soft key.
©

3. Settings: Depending on the video media
specification, there are 3 sub-menus within
settings: Options, VOD (Video On Demand)
and Audio settings.
VOD allows playing of DivX VOD content
from a video media. The 8 digit registration
code will be displayed when the VOD soft
key is touched.
The player must also be registered with
DivX. See 84, LICENSING.
6. Seek up: Select to view the next DVD
chapter or to scroll through video media
files.
7. Select to pre-stop playback. A second touch
will stop and reset the DVD.
8. Select to start/restart play.
9. Seek down: Select to view the previous DVD
chapter or to scroll through video media
files.

99
L
Video media player

For information on the CD/DVD loading slot and

eject button, and the use of the Audio/Video
controls on the audio unit and steering wheel,
see 82, AUDIO/VIDEO CONTROLS.

VIDEO MEDIA INHIBIT WITH VEHICLE

MOVING
When the vehicle is moving, the video picture
will automatically be inhibited. The Touch screen
will display the My video screen and the relevant
safety message will be displayed.

15
FULL SCREEN VIEW

20
When full screen mode is selected, the seek

d
controls operate in the same manner as they ite
do in preview mode.
m
Use the relevant soft key to select the 4:3, 16:9
Li

or Zoom option to magnify the picture.

er
ov
R
nd
La
ar
gu
Ja
©

100
 R
Voice control

USING VOICE CONTROL

Note: The Voice system has been designed to
recognise a number of languages. However,
Land Rover cannot guarantee the system will
be compatible with every accent group within
those languages. Please speak to your
Dealer/Authorised Repairer about testing the
Voice System for compatibility with a particular
accent group.

15
20
d
ite
m
Li
er
ov
R
nd
La

1. Voice button: Press briefly to start a voice Note: As the commands are listed before
ar

session. A pop-up will appear on the Touch the system is ready to listen, it is important
gu

screen. Press and hold to cancel a voice to wait for the Voice symbol to appear
session. alongside the relevant command, before
Ja

Note: Briefly press the Voice button during using the command.
©

a voice session, to interrupt audible
feedback. Wait for the tone to sound before
giving the next command.
2. Voice symbol: Indicates that a command is
available. Wait for the symbol to appear and
a tone to sound before using the command.
3. Command list: Appears on the pop-up
panel, providing feedback and available
commands at each stage of the voice
session. Say an available command.
4. When displayed, say Cancel to cancel the
current voice session.
5. When displayed, say Help to get assistance
during a voice session.
Note: The currently selected user (User 1
or User 2) is identified at the bottom of the
command list.

101
L
Voice control

Note: If a listed item is longer than the
available space on the menu, ...> will
appear. Use the seek controls on the
steering wheel to view the entire entry. See
82, AUDIO/VIDEO CONTROLS.
5. Follow the on-screen and audible
instructions.
The training session can be cancelled, at any
time, by touching the on-screen pop-up or by
pressing and holding the Voice button.

VOICE TUTORIAL VOICETAGS

To listen to a tutorial detailing the operation of Voicetags enable the user to personalise the
the Voice system: Voice system so that a single name can be used
1. Briefly press the Voice button to start a to call up a navigation destination, telephone
voice session. number, or radio channel.

15
2. Wait for the tone to sound, then say Voice To add a Voicetag:

20
tutorial. 1. Briefly press the Voice button to start a
Alternatively, the tutorial can be selected using voice session.

d
the Touch screen, as follows: ite
2. Wait for the tone to sound and then say
1. Select Setup from the Touch screen Home Phone, Navigation, or Radio.
m
menu, or press the SETUP button on the 3. Say Store voicetag.
Li

Instrument panel..
Alternatively, Voicetags can be managed
er

2. Select Voice from the Setup menu. through the Touch screen as follows:
ov

3. Select Operating guide from the Voice 1. Select Setup from the Home menu, or press
settings menu.
R

the SETUP button on the Instrument panel.

4. Select Voice tutorial. 2. Select Voice from the Setup menu.
nd

The voice tutorial can be cancelled, at any time, 3. Select Voicetags from the Voice settings
La

by touching the on-screen pop-up or by menu.

pressing and holding the Voice button.
4. Select the system which the Voicetag is to
ar

activate (Phone, Navigation, or

gu

VOICE TRAINING Radio/DAB).

Ja

This is a feature designed to enable the system Follow the on-screen and audible instructions.
to better recognise the vocal characteristics of
©

a user, once the training has been completed.

To carry out Voice training:
1. Select Setup from the Touch screen Home
menu, or press the SETUP button on the
Instrument panel.
2. Select Voice from the Setup menu.
3. Select Voice training from the Voice
settings menu.
4. Select User 1 or User 2, to start the training.

102
 R
Voice control

NAVIGATION POI VOICE COMMANDS

To request the display of Points Of Interest
(POI) identifiers on the navigation display, say
Navigation with one of the following POI
categories:

15
20
d
ite
m
Li
er

Note: The word Navigation must be followed

ov

immediately by a category.
R

Icons will appear on the navigation display,

indicating the locations of the selected POI. For
nd

further information about POIs, see 118,

La

CATEGORIES AND SUB-CATEGORIES.

ar
gu
Ja
©

103
L
Telephone

TELEPHONE SYSTEM OVERVIEW

15
20
d
ite
m
Li

1. Change phone: Search for new or change 12. Delete: Touch to delete the last entered
er

to another paired phone. digit, and hold to delete the whole entered
number.
ov

2. Last 10: Access the last 10 dialled, received

and missed calls.
R

3. Phonebook: Access the downloaded BLUETOOTH® INFORMATION

nd

phonebook. Bluetooth® is the name for

La

4. Digit dial: Access Digit dial mode. short-range Radio Frequency (RF)
5. Touch and hold to retrieve your Voicemail. technology that allows electronic
ar

devices to communicate wirelessly

6. Status display: Displays the name and/or with each other.
gu

number dialled and call duration.

The Land Rover Bluetooth® wireless
Ja

7. Call Connect/Disconnect icons: Touch to technology system supports Bluetooth®

send/accept or end/reject a call. Hands-Free Profile (HFP), Advanced Audio
©

8. Settings: Access Voicemail setup, Answer
options and Phone options.
9. Mute microphone: Initiate Privacy mode.
While selected, the caller will not hear you
talking.
10. Auto reject: When active, any incoming calls
will be rejected or diverted to voicemail
(depending on mobile phone settings).
11. Use handset: Switch the call to your mobile
phone.
Distribution Profile (A2DP) and Audio Video
Remote Control Profile (AVRCP).
Note: HFP and A2DP/AVRCP profiles can be
connected independently, so a phone can be
connected via one, while a media device can be
connected via the other, at the same time.

104

Before making use of the vehicle’s Bluetooth®
wireless technology phone system, your
Bluetooth® wireless technology device must
be paired and connected to the vehicle's system.
This is done using 1 of 2 methods; via your
phone to the vehicle or from the Touch screen
to your phone. If one of these methods is not
successful, try the other option.
Each time the ignition is switched on, the
system will attempt to connect with the last
connected phone.
As mobile phones have a wide range of audio
and echo characteristics, it may take a few
seconds for the vehicle's system to adapt and
deliver optimum audio performance. To achieve
this, it may be necessary to reduce the
in-vehicle volume and ventilation fan speed
slightly.
TELEPHONE SAFETY
er
ov
Switch off your telephone in areas with
a high explosion risk. This includes
R
filling stations, fuel storage areas or
nd
chemical factories, as well as places
where the air contains fuel vapour,
La
chemicals or metal dust.
Always stow your mobile phone
ar
securely.
gu
Ja
The functioning of cardiac pacemakers
or hearing aids may be impaired when
©
the phone is in use. Check with a
doctor or manufacturer whether any
such devices you or your passengers
are using, are sufficiently protected
against high-frequency energy.
R
Telephone
The Health Industry Manufacturers' Association
recommends that a minimum separation of 15
centimetres (6 inches) is maintained between
a wireless phone antenna and a pacemaker, to
avoid potential interference with the pacemaker.
These recommendations are consistent with the
independent research by, and recommendations
of, Wireless Technology Research.
TELEPHONE COMPATIBILITY
Please refer to the Owner's section of the Land
15
Rover website at: www.landrover.com, for a
list of compatible phones.
20
Note: The Bluetooth® wireless technology
d
devices listed, have been tested for compatibility
ite
with Land Rover vehicles. Performance will vary,
based on the phone’s software version, battery
m
condition, coverage, and your network provider.
Li
Phones are warranted by their manufacturer;
not Land Rover.
PAIRING AND CONNECTING USING
THE PHONE
Note: The process of pairing and connecting
your phone with the vehicle, using the mobile
phone, will vary depending on the type of mobile
phone used.
1. Switch the ignition on and make sure the
Touch screen is active.
2. From the Home menu, select Phone.
3. A menu will appear. Select Search new.
4. Select the Device to vehicle option.
Note: The vehicle’s Bluetooth® wireless
technology system is discoverable for only
3 minutes.
5. Using the mobile phone, search for
Bluetooth® wireless technology devices.
On some phones, this is referred to as new
paired device. See your phone's operating
instructions for further information.
105
L
Telephone
6. When the vehicle's Bluetooth® wireless
technology system is discovered, follow the
on-screen instructions. Select Yes when
prompted, to confirm the pairing.
Either the phone or the vehicle's system will
ask for a PIN (Personal Identification
Number). When prompted, enter a PIN of
your choice and select OK to confirm.
7. Enter the same PIN into the other device.
8. Once your phone is paired and connected
to the system, a confirmation message will
be displayed before switching to the Digit
dial screen.
Note: Some mobile phones require the
Bluetooth® wireless technology device
pairing to be set as ‘authorised’ or ‘trusted’,
in order to automatically connect. Please
refer to your phone’s operating instructions
for further information.
er
PHONE PAIRING AND CONNECTING
ov
USING THE TOUCH SCREEN
R
1. Switch on your mobile phone’s Bluetooth®
nd
wireless technology device connection.
La
Make sure that your mobile phone is in
Bluetooth® wireless technology device
ar
discoverable mode, sometimes referred to
as find me mode (see your phone’s
gu
operating instructions for more
Ja
information).
2. Switch the ignition on and make sure the
©
Touch screen is active.
3. From the Home menu select Phone.
4. A menu will appear. Select Search new.
5. Select the Vehicle to device option.
6. Identify your phone from the displayed list
and select the corresponding Pair and
connect option.
106
Note: If more than 5 phones are detected,
it may be necessary to use the scroll bar to
see the entire list.
7. When prompted, enter the PIN code into
your phone. See your phone’s operating
instructions for more information.
8. Once your phone is paired and connected
to the system, a confirmation message will
be displayed before switching to the Digit
dial screen.
Note: Due to the duration of a Bluetooth®
15
wireless technology device search, it is advised
20
that the time out to home screen feature is
switched off before attempting to search for
d
devices. This setting can be changed via the
ite
Home menu screen, touch Setup, Screen, Time
out home
m
Li
CHANGING THE CONNECTED PHONE
Up to 10 mobile phones can be paired with the
vehicle in the same way. However, only 1 can
be connected and ready for use as a phone at
any one time.
To connect a different paired phone to the
vehicle, follow the steps below:
1. From the Home menu, select Phone.
2. A menu will appear. Select Change phone.
3. Identify and select your phone from the
displayed list.
4. Once your phone is connected to the
system, a confirmation message will be
displayed before switching to the Digit dial
screen.
TELEPHONE SYSTEM ICONS
Connect: Use to send or accept a
call and access the Last 10 calls list.
 R
Telephone

Disconnect: Use to end or reject a STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS

call.

No phone connected.

Phone signal strength indicator.

Phone battery level indicator.

15
Bluetooth: Indicates that a

20
Bluetooth® wireless technology
device is connected.

d
Tick: Indicates that a Bluetooth® ite
wireless technology device is paired.
m
Li

Voicemail: Press and hold to dial the

stored voicemail number.
er

1. Press to scroll back through received calls,

ov

Scroll bar up arrow: Use to scroll up the Last 10 list and finally to exit the list.
lists of detected phones, calls or
R

2. Increase the volume when in a call, scroll

phonebook entries.
nd

up a displayed list or number listed for a

Scroll bar down arrow: Use to scroll stored contact.
La

down lists of detected phones, calls 3. Press to scroll to the Last 10 list and
or phonebook entries. received calls.
ar

4. Decrease the volume when in a call, or

gu

scroll down a displayed list or number listed

Ja

for a stored contact.

5. Press to answer an incoming call. Press
©

and release to dial a number/contact. Press

and release to access the Last 10 dialled
list. Press and hold to access phonebook
list view.
6. Press to end a call or to reject an incoming
call.
Note: When scrolling through a phonebook or
the Last 10 list, each contact is also displayed
in the Message centre.

107
L
Telephone

Note: In order to scroll through any Last 10 list, Default.

the 'phone' button (5) must first be pressed.

CALL VOLUME Mobile.

The phone call volume is operated by the Audio
system’s volume control.
Home.
If the Audio system is in use when a phone call
is active, the Audio system source is suppressed
for the duration of the call. Work.

PHONEBOOK

15
Contacts stored in the memory of a paired

20
phone can be automatically downloaded to the
vehicle’s Phonebook each time the phone is

d
connected to the system. ite
Certain phones store the phonebook in 2
m
different areas; the SIM card and the phone
Li

memory. The vehicle's system will access only

those numbers stored in the phone's memory.
er

To access contacts from the Phonebook:

ov

1. From the Phone menu, select Phonebook.

R

2. Using the keyboard, select the letter you

nd

wish to search under.

La

3. Select List to view the Phonebook.

4. Identify the required contact from the
ar

displayed list and touch to call. If a contact

gu

has more than 1 number stored, select the

required number from the list.
Ja

Note: It may be necessary to use the scroll

©

bar to see the entire list.

There are also options to view more contact
information, by selecting the corresponding
i key.
If your phone supports contact type data, you
will be able to see a contact type icon in the
vehicle's Phonebook directory. These can be
seen on the right side of each contact in the
directory and will indicate one of the following
types:

108
 R
Navigation system

THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM Under certain conditions, it is possible for the

Navigation instruction is by map and turn
information displayed on the Touch screen and
can be complemented by Voice guidance, if
required. The system uses signals from Global
Positioning System (GPS) satellites combined
with information from vehicle sensors and from
data stored on the hard drive, to establish the
true vehicle position.
Note: Mapping data loaded on the hard drive is
relevant to the market in which the vehicle is
vehicle's position shown on the Touch screen,
to be incorrect. This may happen when:
• Driving on a spiral ramp in a building.
• Driving on or beneath elevated roads.
• 2 roads are close and parallel.
• The vehicle is transported to another
destination.
• The vehicle has been rotated on a turntable.
• The vehicle's battery has been

15
first sold and will provide guidance and disconnected.
information only for that area. Your

20
Dealer/Authorised Repairer will have details of USING THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM

d
software updates.
Using this combination of data sources, the
ite
m
vehicle's navigation computer enables you to
plan and follow a route map to your desired
Li

destination.
er

The Touch screen is used to control navigation

ov

via menus, text screens and map displays.

R

Operate the system only when it is safe

to do so.
nd

Note: The Navigation system fitted to this

La

vehicle does not support speed camera alerts.

The requirements of national Road Traffic
ar

Regulations always apply.

gu

Observation of traffic signs and local traffic 1. Navigation soft key: Touch for navigation.
Ja

regulations always take priority. 2. NAV shortcut button: Press for navigation.
The Navigation system serves solely as an aid 3. Destination entry: Touch to access the
©

to navigation. In particular, the Navigation Destination entry menu.

system cannot be used as an aid to orientation
when visibility is poor. Note: On vehicles with off-road navigation, the
soft key includes On road or Off road, to show
GPS signals may occasionally be interrupted the current Navigation mode.
due to physical barriers, such as tunnels and
roads under raised highways. If the navigation screen language has not been
set, select Language, and touch OK to confirm.
However, direction and speed sensors on the The CAUTION screen will return.
vehicle will minimise any adverse effect on the
Navigation system. Normal operation will
resume once the obstruction has been passed.

109
L
Navigation system

After touching Agree, the Touch screen will

display the previously displayed map view. This
will show the current vehicle position. Touch
the Nav menu soft key to display the main menu
screen.
At this point, the first time user should set up
personal preferences in the Nav set-up area.
These settings are applied whenever navigation
is used.

15
20
d
ite
m
Li
er
ov
R
nd
La
ar
gu
Ja
©

110
 R
Navigation system

MAIN MENU

15
20
d
ite
m
Li
er
ov
R
nd
La

1. More...: Displays the other Nav menu 7. Route voice guidance: Allows the Voice
ar

screen. guidance messages to be turned off for the

current journey. The soft key is highlighted
gu

2. Cancel guidance: Cancels the current route

guidance. while Voice guidance is enabled.
Ja

3. Destination entry: Provides a choice of 8. Quick POI shortcuts: This provides the
option to quickly enter a destination of a
©

options for entering a destination.

local POI. The categories can be changed
4. Previous destination: Displays previous
in the Navigation set-up menu.
destinations entered.
9. Return to map: Advances to the main map
5. Display/Hide POI: Turns the POI (Point Of
screen.
Interest) icons on the map on/off.
10. Detour: Allows a detour from the current
6. When a destination is set, the Land Rover
route.
logo is replaced by a soft key which enables
the last voice instruction to be repeated. 11. Nav set-up: Settings for the Navigation
system.

111
L
Navigation system

12. Route options: Allows selection of various

options for the route.
13. TMC (Traffic Message Channel): Not used
for entering a destination but, when
enabled, will provide data about road
conditions and any events that may affect
the journey.
14. Stored locations: Manages the stored
locations.

15
20
d
ite
m
Li
er
ov
R
nd
La
ar
gu
Ja
©

112
 R
Navigation system

MAP SPLIT SCREEN

15
20
d
ite
m
Li
er
ov
R

1. Compass (always indicates north): Press 9. Left map view, scale/zoom setting.
to select: north up, heading up, or bird's
nd

10. Opens the Navigation menu, 1 of 2 screens.

eye map style.
11. Distance/time to destination.
La

2. TMC (Traffic Message Channel) signal:

12. TMC event (traffic congestion).
Without a diagonal bar, a signal is being
ar

received; with a diagonal bar, a signal is not Touch to close the Intersection and
gu

being received. The icon will also change Motorway junction view. The
colour depending on the status of traffic on previously displayed map is shown
Ja

the route. after closing.

©

3. Next direction display: When intersection

map view has been switched off, touch the
icon to view again.
4. The current vehicle position and direction.
5. Right map view, scale/zoom setting.
6. Current location.
7. GPS signal indicator: The indicator is only
displayed when there is no reception.
8. Screen selection.
SCREEN MODES
Touch the screen mode selection key to view a
series of icons, each depicting a different screen
mode (as detailed below). Touch the relevant
icon to select the desired screen mode.
Full screen view.

113
L
Navigation system

Split screen view.
Shows a list of turn directions on
the right half of the screen.
Guidance screen: Shows a detailed
view of the next junction on the
motorway or intersection view on
non-motorway roads, in the right
half of the screen.
4. Scroll through the list and select the 3 letter
code that corresponds to the desired
destination area.
5. Select OK. The Destination entry menu is
shown and the information window shows
the currently selected search area.
MAP AUTO ZOOM
When under guidance, the map zooms in
automatically when approaching an intersection
or motorway junction.

15
Motorway information: This view is
1. From the map screen, touch the left map
only available when travelling on a

20
view, scale/zoom soft key.
motorway. It displays automatically
to show remaining motorway exits 2. Touch the Auto zoom soft key. The soft key

d
along your route. will be highlighted when auto zoom is
ite
enabled.
To turn off the Guidance or Motorway
m
information screens, proceed as follows:
Li

SETTING A DESTINATION
1. From the Nav menu, touch More....
er

1. After touching Agree, the initial map screen

2. Select Nav set-up.
is displayed, now touch Nav menu.
ov

3. Touch User settings.

2. From the Navigation menu, touch
R

4. Touch Guidance screen or Motorway Destination entry.

nd

information to deselect the option.

3. Touch Address from the Destination screen
5. Touch OK to confirm. and input the town name or postcode.
La

4. Once sufficient letters have been entered,

SEARCH AREA
ar

touch OK or List to display all of the

gu

The navigation map database is divided into possible towns.

countries, or areas of countries, called search 5. If necessary, use the scroll arrows to the
Ja

areas. When setting a route, the destination (or left of the list to search up or down. Select
waypoint) entered must be in the currently the town you require.
©

selected search area.

Before attempting to set a destination or
waypoint, set the correct search area as follows:
1. Select Destination entry from the main
navigation menu.
2. Touch More....
3. Touch Search area.
6. Now enter the road name. Once sufficient
letters have been entered, touch OK or List
to display all of the possible roads.
7. Select the road you require. Enter the house
number of the address (if known) and then
touch OK to confirm.
8. If the house number is not known, select
OK; the end of the road is then used as the
destination.

114

9. The map screen showing the selected
destination details is displayed. Touch GO
to calculate the default quick route, or
Review route for alternative routes.
10. Touch GO to start the journey.
START GUIDANCE
After selecting Review route, the system will
calculate the route.
1. There is now a choice to select 3 Routes,
Change route, or select GO to start
Navigation guidance.
2. Touch 3 Routes to display a choice of 3
different route options on the map. The
roads on the map are shown in 3 different
colours to highlight each route. EcoRoute
helps you find the most fuel-efficient route
available. A display of 3 leaves indicates the
most fuel-efficient route.
er
3. Select route 1, 2, or 3 by touching the
ov
respective box displayed on the right side
R
of the map.
nd
4. Touch Change Route followed by Route
Preferences to change the route settings.
La
If a destination is already set, touch
Waypoint to add a waypoint in the journey,
ar
if required.
gu
5. When you have made your selection, if any,
touch GO.
Ja
Note: As you approach a junction, in addition
©
to the Voice guidance, an inset on the map will
display an enlarged view of the junction.
AVOID POINTS
When calculating a route, an area to avoid can
be set and stored.
1. From the Nav menu, touch More....
2. Select Stored locations.
3. Select Avoid points.
R
Navigation system
4. Select Add.
5. Select the location of the area to avoid from
the Destination entry menu. Touch OK to
activate the view where the size of the area
to avoid can be set. The size of the area can
be adjusted by using the '+' and '-' symbols.
6. Touch OK. The area to avoid is now set and
stored.
To edit or delete an area to avoid from the
stored list.
1. From the Nav menu, touch More....
15
2. Select Stored locations.
20
3. Select Avoid points.
d
4. From the sub-menu, select Edit or Delete.
ite
EASY ROUTE
m
Li
In Route options, Easy Route can be turned On
or Off.
When On is selected, Easy Route changes the
calculation parameters of Route 3 in order to
reduce:
• Junctions.
• Turns.
• Turns that cross traffic.
• The priority of minor roads.
• Complex junctions and manoeuvres.
LEARN ROUTE
In Route options, Learn Route can be turned
On or Off.
When On is selected, if you make the same
deviation from the proposed route 3 times, then
the system will memorise the deviation and offer
that as the normal route from then on. Select
Reset all routes to delete any learnt routes and
return to the default settings.
115
L
Navigation system
VOICE GUIDANCE
To turn Voice guidance on or off but maintain
route guidance, proceed as follows:
1. Touch Nav menu on the navigation screen.
2. Touch the Route voice guidance soft key.
The soft key will be highlighted when Voice
guidance is enabled.
CANCEL ROUTE GUIDANCE
To cancel route guidance, proceed as follows:
1. Touch Nav menu on the navigation screen.
2. Touch the Cancel guidance soft key.
QUICK POI SELECTION
1. Touch the map to display the additional
options.
2. Touch the Point of interest (POI) soft key.
er
3. The screen shows 6 suggested categories,
ov
5 of which can be selected as Quick Points
Of Interest (POIs).
R
4. Select a Quick POI category, or touch
nd
More... to see further POIs. Touch OK to
confirm a selection.
La
5. The map with the POI icon(s) is displayed.
ar
Scroll the map to the POI icon, then touch
gu
Set destination to set and calculate the
route.
Ja
6. Touch GO to start the journey.
©
Note: Selected POIs can be hidden if required,
by selecting Nav menu followed by Hide POI.
Note: POI icons can only be displayed up to the
1 km (½ mile) zoom level.
RESTORE SYSTEM DEFAULTS
From the Navigation menu, select Nav set-up.
If you have made any changes to the system’s
default settings, use this menu to restore the
original settings.
116
FAVOURITES
This enables you to manage destinations such
as, place of work, home, favourite restaurant,
etc.
From the Favourites sub-menu in Stored
locations, you can save up to 400 stored
favourites.
1. From the Nav menu, touch More....
2. Select Stored locations.
3. Touch Favourite.
15
4. To store a favourite, select Add from the
20
sub-menu.
5. Select any destination entry method and
d
confirm your desired location.
ite
m
FAVOURITES DETAILS
Li
1. From the Stored locations menu, select
Favourite.
2. Select Edit or Delete.
3. Touch the selected favourite to display the
details.
4. Select the chosen detail to edit. Details
include Attribute, Name, Phone number,
Location, and Icon.
HOME
1. From the Nav menu, touch More....
2. Select Stored locations.
3. Touch Home location.
4. To store a home location, select Add from
the sub-menu.
5. Select any destination entry method to set
your home location. Touch OK to confirm.
6. Touch OK from the favourite summary;
home location is now set.
POSTCODE
Not all countries have this facility.
 R
Navigation system

1. From the Nav menu, select Destination RECALLING A PREVIOUS

entry.
2. Touch Postcode. Enter the postcode of your
waypoint or destination from the keypad.
The postcode must be entered precisely,
including any spaces or punctuation.
3. When the postcode has been entered, touch
OK.
EMERGENCY
Not all countries have this facility. Touch
DESTINATION
1. From the Nav menu, touch Previous
destination.
2. Touch your previous destination from the
list. The map showing the selected
destination is displayed.
3. Touch GO to start the journey.
MOTORWAY ENTRY/EXIT

15
Emergency on the Destination entry screen to 1. From the Nav menu, touch Destination
entry.

20
display a list of local police stations, hospitals
or Land Rover Dealerships. 2. Touch More....

d
Press Name to display the list in alphabetical 3. Touch Motorway Entry/Exit.
ite
order or Distance to display the list in order of 4. Enter the motorway name or number, or
m
proximity to the current vehicle location. select from List.
Li

Touch the name of the facility to set it as a 5. Touch Entrance or Exit.

destination or waypoint.
er

6. Enter the entrance or exit name for the

ov

chosen motorway, or select from List. The

MAP map showing the selected motorway and
R

Scroll the map to the area of your destination junction is displayed.

nd

or waypoint, zooming in if required. 7. Touch GO to start the journey.

This location can be stored as a favourite,
La

destination or waypoint. POINTS OF INTEREST (POI)

ar

1. From the Nav menu, touch Destination

COORDINATES
gu

entry.
From the navigation menu, select Destination 2. Touch More....
Ja

entry. Select More... and then Coordinates.

3. Touch Point of interest.
©

If you know the coordinates of your destination

they can be entered from this screen. The full
latitude must be entered first before the
longitude coordinates can be entered.
When the coordinates have been entered, touch
OK.
If the coordinates entered are not contained
within the area covered by the available maps,
a message will be shown. This can also occur
if the incorrect coordinates have been entered.
4. Touch POI name and touch OK to confirm.
5. Enter the POI name, or select from List.
6. Alternatively, choose Category to see all
categories of POI and make your selection.
See 118, CATEGORIES AND SUB-
CATEGORIES.
7. To narrow the search area, touch Town to
enter a town name.

117
L
Navigation system

8. Once the POI has been selected, the map
showing the selected destination is
displayed.
9. Touch GO to start the journey.
Note: If entering a POI name results in too many
matches being listed, try entering the town
name first. If you do not know the name of the
POI you want, try selecting a POI category.
Note: POI icons can only be displayed up to the
1 km (½ mile) zoom level.
• The POI file name must not exceed 35
characters.
• The icon file name must match the POI file
name.
• The icon size must not exceed 32x32 dots.
• The icon format must be a bitmap (.bmp)
or jpeg (.jpg).
To download files or icons, connect a USB
device containing the POIs. See 95,
CONNECTING A DEVICE.

15
1. From the Nav menu, touch More....
DEALER LOCATIONS
2. Select Stored locations.

20
Details of Land Rover Dealers are held on the
Navigation system as a POI category, under the 3. Touch My POI.

d
car/automotive category. See 118, LOCAL POI 4. Select Add to individually select each POI
ite
SEARCH. group to be downloaded. Select Edit to
m
change Name, Icon or Sound icon, or select
Li

CATEGORIES AND SUB-CATEGORIES Delete.

er

The POI database is divided into a number of

categories. Each main category is further
LOCAL POI SEARCH
ov

divided into a number of sub-categories. Use to select points of interest close to the
R

Touch the desired category, then choose desired vehicle's position.

nd

sub-categories. 1. From the Nav menu, touch Destination

entry.
La

MY POI 2. Touch More....

ar

Additional POIs can be downloaded and added 3. Touch Point of interest.

to the list. The system can store up to 50 000
gu

4. Touch POI near current and touch OK to

'My POIs', in up to 100 groups (whichever confirm.
Ja

comes first).
5. Select the relevant POI category, if required
Free POIs can be found on the internet and
©

select again from a sub-category and touch

downloaded onto the system. The name of the
imported file will be displayed as a group name.
Imported icons will be displayed on the map.
In order for a file or icon to be successfully
downloaded, the following conditions must
exist:
• The POI file must be in a GPS Exchange
(.gpx) format, version 1.1.
• The POI file name must not contain the
following characters; -, /, ;, *, ", <, >, or |.
OK to confirm.
6. Touch Show List or Select Category to
make further selections.
Note: Up to 5 categories can be chosen to
select a POI from.
7. Select your POI destination from the list.
The map showing the selected destination
is displayed.

118

8. Touch Destination to set and calculate the
route.
9. Touch GO to start the journey.
Note: Nav POI near current position can be set
as a Home menu shortcut. See 52, TOUCH
SCREEN SETUP.
ARABIC NAVIGATION
To turn Arabic navigation on or off:
1. From the Home menu, touch Setup.
2. Touch System.
3. Touch Language and select Arabic
navigation On.
4. Select Yes to continue with Arabic
navigation.
RDS-TMC OVERVIEW
RDS-TMC (Radio Data System-Traffic Message
er
Channel) is a feature that announces traffic
ov
hold-ups on your route, as broadcast by radio
R
stations that transmit TMC information.
nd
Touch the TMC button, on the Navigation menu,
to access the TMC menu.
La
TMC events ahead on route can be displayed
by touching the Events ahead soft key. TMC
ar
can be set to display on the map for all events,
gu
for major events, or can be switched off. During
Ja
route calculation, it can be set to avoid TMC
events along the route.
©
RDS-TMC DISPLAY
When a TMC signal is received, the icon in the
top left of the screen will appear green. If a TMC
signal is not being received, the icon will be
shown with a bar through it.
The system will inform the driver of any
roadworks, narrow road, contraflow, accidents,
slippery road, diversion, information, parking
information, congestion, or other hazard.
R
Navigation system
The driver is informed of a traffic event as
follows:
• A TMC event icon shown on the map at the
location of the event.
• Text can be displayed showing the details
of each occurrence, which can be selected
either by touching the screen icon or from
the traffic information list.
• Dynamic route guidance, which calculates
an alternative route when the system
receives the traffic event warning affecting
15
the route currently set in the Navigation
20
system.
• Traffic event list shows all events sorted by
d
road name/distance on your selected route,
ite
in a straight line or along your actual route.
m
The information regarding the hold-up is
Li
maintained and updated, even if the vehicle
crosses into another country.
RDS-TMC ICONS
Any traffic event (broadcast on TMC) in your
area, will be displayed as a warning icon on the
map and an alert may be displayed as a
message giving the road number(s) and
between which junctions the hold-up or event
occurs.
This data is stored in the system for up to 15
minutes.
The colour of the TMC icon changes in order to
show the type and priority of a TMC event. Red
icons have a higher priority than yellow icons.
The background colour of the icon returns to
normal when there is no longer an event or
hold-up, or if any re-route instructions are
calculated.
The TMC event icons appear on the navigation
map display to indicate the location and nature
of a TMC event.
119
L
Navigation system

TMC event icons will appear on the map, even Congestion.

if the event does not occur on your route.
Incident (Red star).
Delay.

Moving Tailback Ahead (Red arrow).

Diversion.

Moving Tailback Both Carriageways

Contraflow.
(Red double arrow).

15
Slow Traffic Ahead (Yellow arrow).
Event.

20
Slow Traffic Both Carriageways

d
Height Width Limit.
(Yellow double arrow). ite
m
Information (Yellow circle).
Li

USING TMC
er

Dynamic route guidance will calculate an

Incident (Yellow star).
alternative route to avoid a traffic event, when
ov

the system receives an event warning. The

R

Note: Single arrow icons indicate that the traffic system calculates a new route for all sections.
nd

event affects traffic travelling in the direction of However, if any waypoints are set, the system
the arrow. Double arrows indicate that both calculates for the next waypoint.
La

directions are affected. A new route message will be displayed in the

Touch screen if:
ar

If the map is scrolled to any of the above events,

further details are available and are indicated as • An event on the current route is serious, for
gu

one of the following icons: example a closed road.

Ja

Closed Road. • The new route is shorter that the current

route.
©

• The current route has not been recalculated

Special Warning (orange triangle). within the last 5 minutes.
This message will be displayed for 5 minutes.
If the new route is not accepted, the Navigation
Danger (red triangle). system will continue with the current route.

Stationary Traffic.

120

OFF-ROAD NAVIGATION
The system can be switched between On-road
and Off-road navigation by pressing the fascia
NAV button twice, from anywhere in the system,
then selecting On road or Off road, as required.
The Navigation soft key on the Touch screen
Home menu displays On road NAV or Off road
NAV, whichever is the current Navigation mode.
Off-road navigation maps are similar to the
on-road maps but have additional features and
information, such as a large compass display,
heading, altitude, latitude and longitude etc.
When switching to Off-road navigation mode
during On-road guidance, the current
highlighted route will be removed from the map
and On-road guidance will be suspended.
Waypoints and destination icons will remain
displayed. The destination is marked with a
double circle.
er
When exiting Off-road guidance, the system
ov
recalculates the route and reverts to On-road
R
guidance.
nd
Note: TMC is not available in Off-road navigation
mode.
La
NEW ROUTE
ar
Allows the following route entry methods:
gu
• Map.
Ja
• Previous.
©
• Distance and Bearing.
• Coordinates.
Entering destinations is achieved using the same
methods as in On road nav.
R
Navigation system
LOAD ROUTE
Load route allows a previously stored Off-road
route to be recalled. Touching the Load Route
soft key will bring up a list of stored routes;
touch the desired route to select. When loading
a route, the current vehicle location is stored as
the starting point, shown as the letter S on the
map screen.
ROUTE OPTIONS
Allows access to the following commands:
15
Edit Route
20
These menu items are identical in operation to
the On-road menus.
d
ite
A maximum of 20 off-road routes can be stored.
When the maximum is reached, the New Route
m
soft key will no longer be active.
Li
Stop Guidance
Allows a selected route to be cancelled. Touch
the soft key to cancel guidance. All waypoints
and icons will be removed.
Display Route
The whole route can be displayed during
guidance mode. It shows the total mileage of
each section and updates as the vehicle's
position changes.
CCPS (Current Car Position to Start)
A backward or return route can be made, at any
time. All waypoint icons of the original route are
reset and the system draws straight lines
between them.
The original start point is now designated as
the destination point and waypoints are
numbered in countdown order.
Waypoint List
Off-road navigation waypoints are shown in
numerical order. The nearest waypoint is the
last in the list. A maximum of 35 waypoints can
be stored.
121
L
Navigation system

During a forward route, the waypoint with the

smaller number is nearest on the guidance
display. During a backward or return route the
smaller number is furthest away.
The bearing (for example, R170) and distance
(for example, 1 mile) is a reference to the next
waypoint. The bearing is the angle between the
previous heading and the next waypoint. The
displayed information is continuously updated.
While the list is shown, if the destination is North is up
reached, the system first changes to the map • The compass North pointer will always be

15
screen and then shows the pop-up for arrival at the top.
at destination.

20
• The vehicle's position arrow, in the centre,
Skip Waypoint will point in the current direction of travel.

d
While on a route, this soft key can be selected • The coloured icon on the edge of the
ite
to skip the next waypoint. Guidance will then compass is the direction to the next
m
be given to the following waypoint. waypoint or destination. It will always stay
in that position.
Li

Trace Points
If Current Trace Point is selected via Route Vehicle is up
er

Options, trace point icons are automatically • The vehicle's position arrow, in the centre,
ov

placed along a route, as it is traversed. They are will always point up.
R

useful to backtrack along the route, if required. • The compass will rotate as the vehicle's
nd

Adjustments to trace point operation can be direction changes. The current direction of
made via the same screen. After selecting the travel is shown at the top.
La

Current Trace Point option, changes can be • The coloured icon on the edge of the
made to any registered trace point route. compass will move with the compass.
ar

Select one of the options, and make changes,

gu

as required (for example, trace points can be ORDNANCE SURVEY DATA

edited, renamed, turned off or deleted).
Ja

Please read this agreement carefully before

using the Navigation system.
©

COMPASS VIEW
Compass view is recommended while driving
off-road. Select the map screen and then the
compass view icon at the top of the screen.
The compass can be viewed as ‘north is up’ or
‘vehicle is up’.
This is a licence agreement to use the Ordnance
Survey (OS) Code-Point data incorporated in
the Navigation system. By using this Code-Point
data, you accept and agree to all of the terms
and conditions below.

122

OWNERSHIP
The OS Code-Point data is licensed by Ordnance
Survey with permission of Her Majesty’s
Stationery Office. © Crown Copyright. All rights
reserved.
LICENCE GRANT
OS grants you a non-exclusive licence to use
your copy of the OS Code-Point data for your
personal use solely as part of the Navigation
System. You may transfer the licence to a
subsequent purchaser of the vehicle with which
the Navigation System is supplied, provided
that the purchaser agrees to abide by each of
the terms of this licence.
LICENCE TERMS
These licence terms are governed by English
Law and are subject to the exclusive jurisdiction
er
of the English courts.
ov
R
LIMITATIONS OF USE
nd
The OS Code-Point data is restricted for use in
the specific system for which it was created.
La
Except to the extent explicitly permitted by
mandatory applicable laws, you may not extract
ar
or re-utilise any part of the contents of the OS
gu
Code-Point data, not reproduce, copy, modify,
adapt, translate, disassemble, decompile, or
Ja
reverse engineer any portion of the OS
Code-Point data.
©
R
Navigation system
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
Ordnance Survey does not warrant or represent
that any of the Code-Point data is accurate,
error-free or suitable for your purposes. In no
event shall OS or the supplier of the Navigation
System using the OS Code-Point data be liable
for any consequential, special, incidental or
indirect damages for any direct or indirect loss
of revenue, profits, business, data, or use,
incurred by you or any third party arising out
of your use of the OS Code-Point data, whether
15
in an action in contract or tort (including
negligence and breach of statutory duty) or
20
otherwise, even if OS or the supplier of the
Navigation System has been advised of the
d
possibility of such damages. In any event, OS’s
ite
liability for direct damages is limited to the price
m
of the copy of the OS Code-Point data. Nothing
Li
in these licence terms shall operate to exclude
or limit any liability which cannot be excluded
or limited by law.
THE DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY AND
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY, SET FORTH IN THIS
AGREEMENT, DO NOT AFFECT OR PREJUDICE
YOUR STATUTORY RIGHTS WHERE YOU HAVE
ACQUIRED THE DATABASE OTHERWISE THAN
IN THE COURSE OF A BUSINESS.
123
L
Navigation system
The DATABASE reflects reality as
existing before you received the
DATABASE and it comprises data and
information from government and other
sources, which may contain errors and
omissions. Accordingly, the DATABASE
may contain inaccurate or incomplete
information due to the passage of time,
changing circumstances, and due to
the nature of the sources used. The
DATABASE does not include or reflect
information on - inter alia -
neighbourhood safety; law
enforcement; emergency assistance;
construction work; road or lane
closures; vehicle or speed restrictions;
road slope or grade; bridge height,
weight or other limits; road or traffic
conditions; special events; traffic
congestion; or travel time.
er
ov
NAVTEQ CORPORATION
R
Please read this agreement carefully before
using the Navigation system.
nd
This is a licence agreement for your copy of the
La
Navigable Map Database, (the ‘DATABASE’)
originally made by NAVTEQ Corporation), used
ar
in the Navigation system. By using this
gu
DATABASE ,you accept and agree to all of the
terms and conditions below.
Ja
OWNERSHIP
©
The DATABASE and the copyrights and
intellectual property or neighbouring rights
therein are owned by NAVTEQ Corporation or
its licensors.
124
LICENCE GRANT
NAVTEQ Corporation grants you a non-exclusive
license to use your copy of the DATABASE for
your personal use or for use in your business’
internal operations. This license does not
include the right to grant sub-licenses.
LIMITATIONS OF USE
The DATABASE is restricted for use in the
specific system for which it was created. Except
to the extent explicitly permitted by mandatory
15
applicable laws, you may not extract or re-utilise
20
substantial parts of the contents of the
DATABASE, not reproduce, copy, modify, adapt,
d
translate, disassemble, decompile, or reverse
ite
engineer any portion of the DATABASE.
m
TRANSFER
Li
You may not transfer the DATABASE to third
parties, except together with system for which
it was created, provided that you do not retain
any copy of the DATABASE, and provided that
the transferee agrees to all of the terms and
conditions of this agreement.
DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY
NAVTEQ Corporation does not warrant or make
any representations, either express or implied,
regarding the use or results of the use of the
DATABASE in terms of its correctness,
accuracy, reliability, or otherwise and expressly
disclaims any implied warranties of quality,
performance, merchantability, fitness for a
particular purpose or non-infringement.
NAVTEQ Corporation does not warrant that the
DATABASE is or will be error-free. No oral or
written information or advice provided by
NAVTEQ Corporation, your supplier or any other
person shall create a warranty.
 R
Navigation system

LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
NAVTEQ Corporation does not warrant or make
any representations, either express or implied,
regarding the use or results of the use of the
DATABASE in terms of its correctness,
accuracy, reliability, or otherwise and expressly
disclaims any implied warranties of quality,
performance, merchantability, fitness for a
particular purpose or non-infringement.
NAVTEQ Corporation does not warrant that the
DATABASE is or will be error-free. No oral or

15
written information or advice provided by
NAVTEQ Corporation, your supplier or any other

20
person shall create a warranty.

d
GOVERNMENT END USERS
ite
m
If the DATABASE is for a region of North
Li

America and is being acquired by or on behalf

of the United States government or any other
er

entity seeking or applying rights similar to those

ov

customarily claimed by the United States

government, the DATABASE is licensed with
R

‘limited rights’.
nd

Utilization of the DATABASE is subject to the

La

restrictions specified in the ‘Rights in Technical

Data and Computer Database’ clause at DFARS
ar

252.227–7013, or the equivalent clause for

non-defence agencies. Manufacturer of the
gu

DATABASE of North America is NAVTEQ

Ja

Corporation, 10400 W. Higgins Road, Suite 400,

Rosemont, Illinois 60018, USA.
©

EUROPEAN DECLARATION OF
CONFORMITY
Hereby, DENSO CORPORATION
declares that this DN-NS-019 is in
compliance with the essential
requirements and other relevant
provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.

125
L
Standard audio system

STANDARD AUDIO SYSTEM CONTROLS

15
20
d
ite
m
Li
er
ov

Sustained exposure to high sound 6. CD eject button.

levels can damage your hearing.
R

7. CD loading slot.
Note: The maximum volume level will be
nd

8. Keypad.
restricted if the audio unit is used with the
9. Seek up:
La

engine switched off.

Short press to select the next station
1. Audio system on/off: Press to switch on upward in frequency, or to select the next
ar

and off. track on the chosen audio source.

gu

Note: The Audio system will switch off Long press to enter radio manual seek
automatically after 10 minutes if the ignition mode, or to scan forward through a CD
Ja

is turned off. track.

©

2. Volume control: Rotate to adjust the
volume.
Note: The maximum volume level will be
restricted if the Audio system is used with
the engine switched off.
3. PHONE: Press to select the telephone menu.
See 134, TELEPHONE SYSTEM.
4. FM/AM: waveband select (FM, FMAST, AM,
AMAST, plus if fitted DAB1, DAB2).
5. AUX input select.
In radio manual seek mode, further short
presses will change the frequency in single
increments.
10. OK and menu navigation control:
Use the menu navigation control to move
to any menu cursor/highlight. When the
required option is highlighted, press the OK
button to select.
11. Seek down:

126

Short press to select the previous radio
station downwards in frequency, or to select
the previous track on the chosen audio
source.
Long press to enter radio manual seek
mode, or to scan backwards through a CD
track.
In radio manual seek mode, further short
presses will change the frequency in single
decrements.
12. MENU: Press to select the Audio system
menu, with the following options:
• Audio settings.
• Clock settings.
• Language.
13. CD: Press to select CD mode.
14. Tone: Press to select the tone menu.
15. TA: Traffic information.
er
16. Audio system information display.
ov
17. MODE: Press repeatedly to scroll through
R
all audio modes.
18. Steering wheel volume up control.
nd
19. Steering wheel volume down control.
La
20. Seek down:
Short press to select the previous radio
ar
preset or the previous track on the chosen
gu
audio source.
Ja
Long press to scan backwards through a
track.
©
21. Seek up:
Short press to select the next radio preset
or the next track on the chosen audio
source.
Long press to scan forwards through a
track.
R
Standard audio system
ADAPTIVE VOLUME CONTROL (AVC)
The AVC feature adjusts the volume level, to
compensate for the changes in road noise as
the vehicle's speed increases or decreases.
Note: The AVC setting represents the volume
increase and not the volume level.
If the AVC level is set to zero, there will be no
volume increase. With a low level setting, the
volume increase at speed will be minimal. If a
high level setting is used, there will be a
noticeable increase of volume when travelling
15
at a greater speed.
20
To set the AVC level:
1. Press the MENU button, then using the
d
ite
menu navigation control (10), press up or
down to select AUDIO settings to access
m
the volume settings menu. Select Adaptive
Li
Vol.
2. Use the left and right buttons on the menu
navigation control (10) to adjust the AVC
setting.
3. Press OK to confirm the selection.
TONE ADJUSTMENT
Press the Tone button (14) to display the Tone
menu. The settings for bass, treble, balance,
and fade can be adjusted using the navigation
buttons. Press OK to store the settings and
return to the previous screen.
Note: If no adjustment is made within 10
seconds, the display will revert to the previously
displayed screen.
AUTO STORING RADIO STATIONS
AutoStore can be used to store the stations with
the strongest signals available, either from the
AM or the FM waveband.
Using Autostore:
127
L
Standard audio system
1. Press the FM/AM button (4) to select the
desired waveband.
2. Find a station. If necessary, use the seek
buttons (9 and 11).
3. Press and hold the FM/AM button until the
display confirms that Autostore is in
progress.
The system will search for stations with the
strongest signals on the selected waveband.
While the search is in progress, the volume is
muted.
When the search is complete, the previous
volume level will be restored. The radio will
switch to the FM-AST or AM-AST waveband
where the strongest signal stations have been
stored on the Autostore presets.
Note: AutoStore will store up to a maximum of
the 10 strongest signals available and overwrite
the previously stored stations.
er
Note: The AutoStore waveband can also be used
ov
to store stations manually, in the same way as
R
other wavebands.
nd
RADIO STATION PRESETS
La
This feature allows favourite stations to be
stored so that they can be recalled later.
ar
1. With the FM/AM button (4), select a
gu
waveband.
Ja
2. Tune to the required station. The station will
begin to play.
©
3. Press and hold one of the keypad buttons.
4. The station will be stored under the selected
number. The volume will mute momentarily
as confirmation.
5. Release the keypad button.
This can be repeated on each waveband and for
each preset button.
128
When in Radio mode, stored stations can also
be selected by pressing the menu navigation
control (10). Scroll to the desired preset station
and press OK.
Note: When driving to another area of the
country, FM stations that broadcast on
Alternative Frequencies (AFs) and are stored on
preset buttons, may be updated with the correct
frequency for that area.
RADIO DATA SYSTEM (RDS)
15
(STANDARD SYSTEM)
20
Your audio unit is equipped with RDS, which
enables the audio unit to receive additional
d
information with the normal radio signals.
ite
On the FM waveband, RDS enables the audio
m
to receive traffic and news information
Li
broadcasts. RDS also allows the audio to
automatically re-tune to stations that are linked
to the same network, if that network allows this.
Note: Not all FM radio stations broadcast RDS.
If a non-RDS station is selected, RDS features
will not be available.
REGIONALISATION (REG)
As you drive into different radio reception areas,
RDS automatically re-tunes the radio to the
strongest signal. When REG is on, the tuner is
locked to the current local radio station. With
REG switched off, the tuner is allowed to switch
to a stronger Enhanced Other Network (EON)
when the current EON linked radio station signal
becomes weak.
To enable/disable regionalisation:
1. Press the MENU button (12).
2. Select Audio Settings on the screen menu,
by using the menu navigation control (10).
3. Select Regional mode (REG).
4. Press OK to enable or disable REG.

ALTERNATIVE FREQUENCY (AF)
Some radio stations broadcast on different
frequencies, in different parts of the country. If
the selected station signal weakens, the radio
will automatically re-tune to a stronger
Alternative Frequency (AF), if one is available.
This feature is particularly useful on long
journeys, where the vehicle travels through
different transmitter areas serving the same
radio station.
To enable/disable AF:
1. Press the MENU button (12).
2. Select Audio Settings on the screen menu,
by using the menu navigation control (10).
3. Select ALTERNAT. FREQ. Turn AF on or
off.
4. Press OK.
er
SELECTING TRAFFIC INFORMATION
ov
Normal reception can be interrupted to
broadcast traffic information from stations on
R
the FM waveband or Radio Data System (RDS)
nd
and Enhanced Other Network (EON) links.
La
When a radio station capable of providing traffic
information is selected, the TP (Traffic Program)
ar
indicator appears on the top line of the display.
gu
Briefly press the TA button (15) to select the
Traffic Announcement (TA) function. The TA
Ja
indicator appears on the top line of the display.
©
As soon as a traffic announcement is received,
the current entertainment source (CD, USB,
iPod or Radio) is interrupted and the message
Traffic appears in the main display area, along
with the name of the station providing the
information.
If a non-traffic station is selected or recalled
using a preset button, the audio unit will remain
on that station unless TA is turned off, then on
again.
R
Standard audio system
TRAFFIC ANNOUNCEMENT VOLUME
Traffic announcements interrupt normal
broadcasts at a preset minimum level that is
usually louder than normal listening volumes.
To adjust the preset volume, use the volume
control to make the necessary adjustment
during an incoming TA broadcast. The display
will show the level selected.
All subsequent traffic announcements will be at
the set volume.
15
CANCELLING AN ANNOUNCEMENT
20
To cancel an announcement, briefly press the
TA button, or alternatively the MODE button
d
(17) on the steering wheel, during the
ite
announcement. This will not turn off TA.
m
Note: If TA is pressed at any other time, all
Li
announcements will be switched off.
SWITCHING OFF TRAFFIC
INFORMATION
Briefly press the TA button (the TA indicator will
disappear from the top line of the display). This
action will prevent traffic information broadcasts
from being received, until the feature is
reselected.
SELECTING NEWS INFORMATION
Normal reception can be interrupted, to
broadcast news bulletins from stations on the
FM waveband or Radio Data System (RDS) and
Enhanced Other Network (EON) linked stations,
in the same way that traffic information is
provided.
To set the NEWS feature:
1. Press the MENU button (12).
2. Select Audio Settings on the screen menu,
using the menu navigation control (10).
3. Select News.
129
L
Standard audio system

4. Press OK to enable or disable the News
feature.
To cancel an announcement, see 129,
CANCELLING AN ANNOUNCEMENT.
Note: Both traffic and news information can be
selected at the same time. However, the radio
will always give priority to traffic information.
DIGITAL (DAB) RADIO
If your vehicle is equipped for digital radio,
press the FM/AM button (4) to select either of
The national channels use the same ensembles
throughout a country and so there is usually no
need to search for these. If you have stored your
favourite national channels already, then they
will usually be found immediately on the same
preset buttons.
If reception is lost when the vehicle is in motion,
the vehicle may be moving out of range of the
ensemble. Use the Seek-up (9) or Seek-down
(11) buttons, or manual tuning, to search for
services which are stronger in that area.

15
Note: If any auxiliary electrical equipment is
2 groups DAB1 or DAB2. These 2 groups permit
connected to the vehicle, DAB radio reception

20
the storing of a total of 20 preset stations or
capability may be reduced.
'services' (ten in each group) using the buttons

d
0-9 on the keypad (8). ite
SELECTING AND STORING DIGITAL
DAB radio can significantly increase the number
SERVICES
m
of radio stations available. The DAB signals are
Li

transmitted to most major cities, towns and Select DAB1 or DAB2. In each band, the active
motorway networks. station will be the last one used. To select
er

Unlike AM/FM radio, digital transmits several another station, press the appropriate preset
ov

services on a single frequency. This group of button (0 to 9).

R

services is known as an ensemble. There may Any preset can be used to store any digital radio
be a number of ensembles receivable in some service, from any ensemble. If you switch
nd

areas, each typically carrying between 6 and 12 between presets which are on different
La

services. ensembles, the tuning time can take a few

Digital radio is transmitted from regional and seconds (the word 'Searching....' briefly
ar

local transmitters. Some services are national appears on the screen). Switching between
services within the same ensemble is virtually
gu

or regional and are replicated on multiple

transmitters throughout the region or country. immediate.
Ja

Other services are local and only available within If there is no service stored on a preset, or if
a limited range of one transmitter. the service is not receivable at the current
©

location, the message 'No Reception' will be

FINDING DIGITAL SERVICES displayed.
Press the Seek-up (9) or Seek-down (11)
buttons to search the waveband, to find the local
active ensembles. Note: Alternatively, the
steering wheel buttons (20 and 21) perform the
same function. A manual tuning function is also
available, see 131, DAB MANUAL TUNING.

130

If the service you want is not already stored on
a preset button or cannot be received, then you
can step through the other services in the
current ensemble by repeated short presses on
the steering wheel buttons (20 or 21), or the
Seek-up or Seek-down buttons (9 or 11). At the
end of the ensemble, a further press will show
'Searching....' for a few seconds and then the
next ensemble will be shown. You can then step
through each service in this new ensemble by
repeated short presses, as above.
To store a service on a preset:
While playing the desired service, press and
hold the desired preset button. A bar graph will
show, indicating how long you need to hold the
button, followed by a Preset Stored pop-up
message. Now release the button.
DAB SERVICE LIST
er
A quick way to see all the services available on
ov
the presets and all the other services which may
be received in the current ensemble, is to use
R
the left navigation button (10) to go to the
nd
waveband list, select either DAB1 or DAB2, then
the right navigation button to list the presets of
La
DAB1 or DAB2. If the desired station is not
listed, there is a Service List option at the top
ar
of the list. Scroll up to the Service List item and
gu
press the right navigation button to see all the
services of the current ensemble listed. Use the
Ja
navigation up/down buttons to scroll up and
down the list. If you want to select a service,
©
scroll the outline box onto the desired service
and press OK.
R
Standard audio system
DAB MANUAL TUNING
Press and hold the Seek-up or Seek-down
buttons (9 or 11), or the steering wheel buttons
(20 or 21), for approximately 3 seconds, to
enter Manual Tuning. The Manual Tuning
pop-up will appear on the display. Using the
Seek-up or Seek-down buttons (9 or 11), or the
steering wheel buttons (20 or 21), you can then
move through all services and ensembles in
turn.
If an ensemble is empty or not receivable, then
15
the tuning will move along to the next. If an
20
ensemble is only just strong enough to receive,
but the services are too weak to use, the tuning
d
may stop on that ensemble and display the
ite
ensemble's name, and possibly the service's
name, but without sound. If no sound is heard
m
within 5 to 10 seconds, then press the
Li
appropriate seek button again to move onto the
next useable ensemble.
To select and play a service of your choice,
locate it and make sure the audio is receivable,
then press OK.
The manual tuning mode allows up to 30
seconds of inactivity before it times out. If
manual tuning times out with no new service
tuned, the radio will revert to the service you
were tuned to at the start of your manual tuning
session.
SERVICELINK
ServiceLink is an item on the Menu (12) and
can be enabled or disabled using the OK button.
When ServiceLink is enabled, 2 additional
features come in to operation:
• If you are listening to a local service which
has a partner service in an adjacent area,
when the signal weakens, it will
automatically changeover to the new area's
partner service.
131
L
Standard audio system

• If you have selected a digital service which CD PLAYER

has an equivalent FM service in the area and
Do not use discs with paper labels, dual
your digital service has deteriorated, then
discs or DVDPlus discs. The front
the radio will automatically switch to the
loading CD player may load and play this
alternative FM service until the digital
type of disc, however it is likely that the
reception becomes adequate again.
disc will not eject and will block the CD
We advise that ServiceLink is switched off when mechanism. Such damage to a CD player
searching for ensembles or using manual will not be covered under warranty.
tuning.
Do not force the disc into the slot.

DAB DISPLAYED MESSAGES Note: Copy-protected CDs may fail to play in

15
'Searching....' is displayed when the radio is your CD changer or may be played subject to
various limitations (for example, sound quality

20
tuning itself to the correct ensemble. You will
see this for a few seconds during some preset may be impaired). If you experience a problem,
try the CD in other players before contacting

d
changes and when seeking up or down to
another ensemble.
ite
the CD vendor.
m
If ServiceLink is enabled and no alternative
signal can be found, 'Searching....' may show LOADING A COMPACT DISC
Li

for a long period of time, since in this mode the Gently place a CD into the loading slot, the disc
er

radio will continue to search round all the bands will be drawn into the player and loaded.
ov

automatically until you command it to go to a Press the CD button on the fascia to select CD
different service or switch off ServiceLink.
R

playback mode.
'No Reception' is displayed when ServiceLink If a CD is already loaded, playback will resume
nd

is not enabled and you have selected a service from the point of last play.
which cannot be received in the vehicle's current
La

position. Select an alternative service, or search

for an alternative ensemble.
TRACK SELECTION
ar

When playing a CD, the display will show the

'Serv00', 'Serv01' etc. may be shown when the
gu

current track being played, the total number of

radio can detect signals from an ensemble but
tracks on the CD and the time elapsed since the
Ja

cannot decode the service names. These are

current track began to play.
default labels to replace the non-receivable
©

service names. In these cases, the audio is
generally impossible to receive from the
vehicle's current location. Select an alternative
service, or search for an alternative ensemble.
You can move to the previous or next track by
briefly pressing the backwards or forwards seek
buttons on either the audio unit or steering
wheel.
Pressing and holding the seek buttons will fast
forward or rewind the CD.
To select a track from the CD track list:
1. Press the right side of the menu navigation
control (10) to access the CD track list.

132
 R
Standard audio system

2. Press the up or down arrows on the menu
navigation control to scroll to the required
track.
3. Press the OK button to play the selected
track.
REPEAT AND SHUFFLE
Repeat will play the current track repeatedly.
Shuffle plays the tracks in a random sequence.
To enable/disable Repeat or Shuffle when a CD
When connecting a portable storage device, use
the AUX button (5). Many of the controls are
similar to those available for CD play.
Please disconnect your iPod when
leaving the vehicle. Failure to do so, may
result in the iPod battery discharging.
Note: The Audio system will play MP3, WMA,
and AAC files.
To maximise playback quality, it is
recommended that lossless compression is
used for any media files on USB or iPod. Failing

15
is playing:
this, it is recommended that compressed files
1. Press the MENU button (12).

20
utilise a minimum bitrate of 192 kb/s (a higher
2. Select Audio Settings on the screen menu bitrate is strongly recommended).

d
by using the menu navigation control (10). For media files delivered via USB or MP3
ite
3. Select Repeat or Shuffle. players, the highest compression rate supported
m
4. Press OK. is 320 kbits per second (kbps). If anything less
than 128 kbps is used, Digital Signal Processing
Li

(DSP) functionality may be lost.

PORTABLE MEDIA
er

Note: Some MP3 players have their own file

Portable media devices can be connected to the
ov

system that is not supported by this system. To

media hubs, located in the cubby box lid and
use your MP3 player, you must set it to USB
R

the rear of the floor console. Compatible

Removable Device or Mass Storage Device
nd

portable devices include:

mode. Only music that has been added to the
• USB mass storage devices (for example, a device in this mode can be played.
La

memory stick). Devices must use FAT or

FAT32 file format.
ar

CONNECTING A DEVICE (STANDARD

• iPod® (iPod Classic, iPod Touch, iPhone™, SYSTEM)
gu

and iPod Nano are supported - full

Ja

functionality for older devices cannot be

guaranteed). iPod Shuffle functionality
©

cannot be guaranteed.
Note: iPod and iPhone are trademarks of
Apple Inc., registered in the USA and other
countries.
• Auxiliary devices (personal audio, MP3
players, all iPods).
Devices with Bluetooth® connectivity (devices
must support A2DP and AVRCP Bluetooth®
protocols).

133
L
Standard audio system
1. 3.5 mm AUX socket.
2. USB socket.
Connect the device into the appropriate socket.
Note: Use the cable supplied with your media
device to connect to the USB socket.
When an iPod is connected, playback will
continue from the point at which it was last
playing, provided the iPod battery is in a good
state of charge.
If a USB or Bluetooth® device is already
connected when AUX is selected, playback will
continue from the point at which it was last
playing.
Please refer to the Ownership section of the
Land Rover website at: www.landrover.com,
for a list of compatible devices.
The Bluetooth® equipped devices listed on
www.landrover.com have been tested for
er
compatibility with Land Rover vehicles.
ov
Performance will vary, based on the device’s
software version and battery condition. Devices
R
are warranted by their manufacturer; not Land
nd
Rover.
Do not plug non-audio devices into the
La
USB port.
ar
TELEPHONE SYSTEM
gu
Switch off your telephone in areas with
Ja
a high explosion risk. This includes
filling stations, fuel storage areas or
©
chemical factories, as well as places
where the air contains fuel vapour,
chemicals or metal dust.
Always stow your mobile phone
securely.
134
The functioning of cardiac pacemakers
or hearing aids may be impaired when
the phone is in use. Check with a
doctor or manufacturer whether any
such devices you or your passengers
are using, are sufficiently protected
against high-frequency energy.
The Health Industry Manufacturers' Association
recommends that a minimum separation of 15
cm (6 in) is maintained between a wireless
phone antenna and a pacemaker, to avoid
15
potential interference with the pacemaker. These
recommendations are consistent with the
20
independent research by, and recommendations
of, Wireless Technology Research.
d
ite
PAIRING AND DOCKING A MOBILE
m
PHONE
Li
Bluetooth® is the name for
short-range Radio Frequency (RF)
technology that allows electronic
devices to communicate wirelessly
with each other.
The Land Rover Bluetooth® system supports
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Profile (HFP), Advanced
Audio Distribution Profile (A2DP) and Audio
Video Remote Control Profile (AVRCP).
Note: HFP and A2DP/AVRCP profiles can be
connected independently, so a phone can be
connected via one, while a media device can be
connected via the other, at the same time.
Before making use of the vehicle’s Bluetooth®
phone system, your Bluetooth® phone must
be paired and connected to the vehicle's system.
Note: The process of pairing and docking your
phone with the vehicle using the mobile phone,
will vary depending on the type of mobile phone
used.
For telephone compatibility, see 105,
TELEPHONE COMPATIBILITY.
 R
Standard audio system

1. Switch the ignition on and make sure the
Audio system is active and that no other
phone is currently docked to the vehicle's
Bluetooth® system.
2. Using the mobile phone, search for
Bluetooth® devices. On some phones, this
is referred to as a new paired device. See
your phone's operating instructions for
further information.
3. When the vehicle's Bluetooth® system is
discovered (named Land Rover), select this
As mobile phones have a wide range of audio
and echo characteristics, it may take a few
seconds for the vehicle's system to adapt and
deliver optimum audio performance. To achieve
this, it may be necessary to reduce the
in-vehicle volume and ventilation fan speed
slightly. The same then applies when using the
hands-free system.

15
device from the list.

20
4. When prompted, enter the Bluetooth® PIN
(Personal Identification Number) into the

d
mobile phone. This 4 digit number is ite
randomly generated by the vehicle's system
and will be displayed on the screen.
m

5. Once your phone is paired and docked to

Li

the system, it can dock automatically. If it

er

does not automatically dock, you will have

ov

to dock manually with the Land Rover

Bluetooth® system, via the mobile phone.
R

Please consult the mobile phone's

nd

instructions for further information.

Note: Some mobile phones do not automatically
La

dock and will require to be manually docked.

ar

Some mobile phones require you to authorise

the connection each time you start the system. 1. Press to activate or deactivate the telephone
gu

To change this, you must set Land Rover as menu.

Ja

being authorised in the mobile phone's known 2. Press to answer a call, or to dial a number.
device list. Please consult the mobile phone's 3. Press to end a call, or to reject an incoming
©

instructions for further information. call.

Answering, rejecting or ending a call:
OPERATING THE PHONE
• Press the PHONE button (1), or the steering
Each time the ignition is switched on, the wheel control (2), to answer an incoming
system will attempt to connect with the last call.
connected phone.
• To reject or end a call, press the PHONE
button or the appropriate steering wheel
control (3).
Dialling:

135
L
Standard audio system

• With PHONE selected, use the numeric
keypad to enter a telephone number.
• Press OK on the audio control panel or the
steering wheel phone control (2) to dial the
number.
Call volume:
The phone call volume is operated by the Audio
system's volume control.
If the Audio system is in use when a phone call
is active, the audio source is suppressed for the
duration of the call. Parking aid warnings are
2. Press the up or down arrows on the menu
navigation control, to scroll to the required
track or folder.
3. Press the OK button to play the selected
track, or open the selected folder.
MP3 REPEAT AND SHUFFLE
When an MP3 CD is playing, playback options
include Repeat and Shuffle.

15
not suppressed.

20
TIME AND DATE SETTINGS

d
To set/change the time and date: ite
1. Press the MENU button (12).
m

2. Select Clock Settings on the screen menu,

Li

by using the menu navigation control (10).

er

3. Select a clock function; make changes.

ov

4. Once the change has been entered, press

R

OK.
nd

MP3 FILE PLAYBACK

La

MP3 discs have the potential to hold more

music than a conventional CD, because each
ar

track can be compressed to a higher degree

gu

during recording.
Ja

The normal playing sequence on CDs with

multiple folders, is to play the tracks within the
©

top level first, then the tracks in any sub-folders.

Note: The CD player may take a long time to
load an MP3 disc if it contains a lot of tracks.
To select a track from the MP3 track list:
1. Press the right side of the menu navigation
control (10) to access the currently playing
MP3 folder.
If required, press the left side to access the
folder list.

136
 R
Fuel and refuelling

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS If premium unleaded fuel is not available, you

may use unleaded fuel with a lower octane
Avoid exposing the fuel gases to any
rating, down to a minimum of 91 RON , but this
potential sources of ignition as the
may reduce engine performance, increase fuel
resulting fire and explosion may cause
consumption, cause audible engine 'knock' and
serious injuries and/or death.
other driveability problems.
Switch off the engine when refuelling,
CAUTION: Do not use fuels with an
as it is both a source of extreme
octane rating lower than 91 RON as
temperatures, and electrical sparks.
severe engine damage may occur.
Switch off any personal electronic
If a heavy persistent engine knock is detected,
devices such as mobile phones or
even when using fuel to the recommended
music players.

15
octane rating, or if you hear engine knock while
Do not operate the auxiliary heater holding a steady speed on level roads, consult

20
when refuelling the vehicle. Doing so your Dealer/Authorised Repairer to have the
may cause fuel vapours to combust problem corrected. Failure to do so is misuse

d
causing a fire/explosion. ite
of the vehicle, for which Jaguar Land Rover is
Do not operate the auxiliary heater not responsible.
m
while the vehicle is in an enclosed
Li

space. Doing so can cause a build up ETHANOL

of highly toxic fumes which may cause
er

Fuels containing up to 10% ethanol (E5 & E10)

unconsciousness or death.
ov

may be used.
This vehicle is not suitable for use with
R

PETROL ENGINED VEHICLES

fuels containing more than 10% ethanol.
nd

Use high quality fuel that meets the

Do not use E85 fuels (85% ethanol
specification defined by EN228 (or the
La

content) as serious engine and fuel

national equivalent)
system damage will occur.
Do not use leaded fuels, fuels with lead
ar

substitutes (e.g. manganese-based), or

METHANOL
gu

fuel additives, as these may adversely

Wherever possible, avoid using fuel
Ja

affect the emissions control systems,

and may affect warranty coverage. containing methanol.
©

Use of fuels containing methanol may cause

OCTANE RATING serious engine and fuel system damage, which
may not be covered under warranty.
Jaguar Land Rover requires the use of premium
unleaded fuel with a minimum octane rating of
95 RON (Research Octane Number) to
contribute to optimum performance, fuel
economy and driveability.

137
L
Fuel and refuelling

METHYL TERTIARY BUTYL ETHER CAUTION: Using an incorrect

(MTBE)
Unleaded fuel containing an oxygenate known
as MTBE can be used, provided that the ratio
of MTBE to conventional fuel does not exceed
15%. MTBE is an ether-based compound
derived from petroleum, which has been
specified by several refiners as the substance
to enhance the octane rating of fuel.
RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
DIESEL ENGINED VEHICLES
specification of fuel will cause serious
damage to the engine and/or After
treatment system, which may not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. If in
doubt, contact a Dealer/Authorised
Repairer for advice.
Avoid running out of fuel. Doing so can
cause damage to the vehicle's engine,

15
fuel, and emission control systems.
The quality and specification of diesel fuel varies

20
significantly depending on geographical If the vehicle does run out of fuel, a minimum
location. Land Rover strongly recommends the of 4 litres (0.9 gallons) will be required to restart

d
use of premium or highest quality available fuel. the engine. The vehicle will need to be driven
ite
1.6-5 km (1-3 miles), in order to reset the
CAUTION: Land Rover vehicles are engine management and monitoring systems.
m
capable of running with up to a 7%
Note: If the vehicle does run out of fuel, seeking
Li

blend of bio-diesel, in accordance with

European Standard EN590. Land Rover qualified assistance is advisable.
er

does not recommend use of a higher

ov

blend of Bio Diesel.

R

SULPHUR CONTENT
nd

CAUTION: If your vehicle is equipped

La

with a Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)

After treatment system, the maximum
ar

Sulphur content of the fuel must not

gu

exceed 0.005% (50 Parts Per Million) in

accordance with EN590 - EU4 or World
Ja

Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) Cat3.

©

CAUTION: The Sulphur content of diesel

fuel used in Land Rover vehicles not
fitted with a DPF, should not exceed
0.3% (3000 parts per million)
In some countries, diesel will contain higher
levels of Sulphur, which will require reduced
service intervals to reduce the effects on engine
and After treatment components. If in doubt
contact a Dealer/Authorised Repairer for advice.

138

FUEL FILLER FLAP
Take note of all warnings and
instructions given on the label affixed
to the inside of the filler flap.
er
ov
R
nd
La
The fuel filler flap is located on the right side of
ar
the vehicle, at the rear.
gu
1. Make sure the vehicle is fully unlocked, and
press the left side of the flap to open.
Ja
2. Open the flap fully and twist the cap
©
anticlockwise to undo.
3. Use the retaining clip to keep the filler cap
out of the way while fuelling.
FUEL FILLER
When refuelling, make sure all of the
windows, doors, and the sunroof are
fully closed, particularly if young
children or animals are in the vehicle.
R
Fuel and refuelling
Do not attempt to fill the tank to its
maximum capacity. If the vehicle is to
be parked on a slope, in direct
sunlight, or high ambient temperature,
expansion of the fuel could cause
spillage.
Do not operate the auxiliary heater
when refuelling the vehicle. Doing so
may cause fuel vapours to combust,
causing a fire/explosion.
Check the fuel pump information
15
carefully, to make sure you are putting
the correct fuel into the vehicle.
20
If the vehicle is filled with incorrect fuel,
d
iteit is essential that you seek qualified
assistance before you start the engine.
m
Filling station pumps are equipped with
automatic cut-off sensing to avoid fuel spillage.
Li
Fill the tank until the filler nozzle automatically
cuts off the supply. Do not attempt to fill the
tank beyond this point.
Note: Filling station pumps used for diesel
commercial vehicles, deliver fuel at a higher rate
than normal. The higher fill rate can cause
premature cut-off and may cause fuel spillage;
therefore, it is recommended that only standard
light vehicle pumps are used.
DIESEL MISFUELLING PROTECTION
DEVICE
When the misfuelling device is
activated, it may cause fuel to be
discharged from the filler neck.
Note: It is the driver’s responsibility to fill the
vehicle with the correct fuel. The diesel misfuel
protection device only reduces the risk of filling
the vehicle with the incorrect fuel.
Diesel engine vehicles in some markets are
equipped with a misfuelling protection device,
incorporated into the fuel filler neck.
139
L
Fuel and refuelling

If the narrow filler nozzle fitted to pumps
delivering unleaded petrol is fully inserted into
the filler neck, the misfuel protection device will
activate.
Note: The diesel misfuelling protection device
may not activate if an unleaded petrol nozzle is
only partially inserted.
Note: The filler spout on some fuel cans and
older fuel pumps may trigger the misfuelling
device.
When activated, the yellow misfuel protector
1. Insert the reset tool (with the teeth
uppermost) as far as it will go into the filler
neck.
2. Locate the teeth by pushing down the top
of the reset tool.
3. WIth the top of the tool pressed down and
the teeth engaged, slowly pull the tool out
of the filler neck to reset the device.
Do not twist the device, once the teeth
have engaged.
Note: The diesel misfuelling protection device

15
will be visible inside the filler neck. It will may not activate if an unleaded petrol nozzle is

20
prevent fuel flow into the tank. Before fuelling only partially inserted.
can continue with the correct fuel, the device
Note: The yellow part of the protection device

d
will need to be reset.
should no longer be visible in the filler neck.
ite
The reset tool is located in the luggage
Return the reset tool to the luggage
m
compartment.
compartment.
Li
er

FUEL TANK CAPACITY

ov

Avoid the risk of running out of fuel, and never

intentionally drive the vehicle when the fuel
R

gauge indicates that the tank is empty. When

nd

refuelling your vehicle after the fuel gauge reads

empty, you may not be able to add the fuel
La

quantity shown below, as there will be a small

reserve remaining in the tank.
ar
gu

Total tank capacity

(usable):
Ja

Petrol engines 70 litres

©

(15.4 gallons)
Diesel engines 68 litres
(15 gallons)

Reset the misfuel protection device as follows:

140
 R
Fuel and refuelling

FUEL CONSUMPTION Under normal use, a vehicle’s actual fuel

consumption figures may differ from those
The fuel consumption figures, shown below,
achieved through the test procedure, depending
have been calculated using a standard testing
on driving technique, road and traffic conditions,
procedure (the new EC test procedure from
environmental factors, and vehicle load and
Directive 99/100/EC) and produced in
condition.
accordance with The Passenger Car Fuel
Consumption (Amendment) Order 1996.
Variant Urban Extra-urban Combined CO2 emissions
4 Wheel Drive l/100 km (mpg) l/100 km (mpg) l/100 km (mpg) g/km
Diesel (manual) 7.4 (38.2) 5.6 (50.4) 6.2 (45.6) 165

15
Diesel (automatic) 8.7 (32.5) 5.8 (48.7) 7.0 (40.4) 185

20
Petrol 13.5 (20.9) 7.5 (37.7) 9.6 (29.4) 224

d
2 Wheel Drive ite
Diesel (manual) 7.1 (39.8) 5.4 (52.3) 6.0 (47.1) 158
m
Li
er

URBAN CYCLE COMBINED

ov

The urban test cycle is carried out from a cold The combined figure is an average of the urban
start and consists of a series of accelerations, and extra-urban test cycle results, which has
R

decelerations and periods of steady speed been weighted to take account of the different
nd

driving and engine idling. The maximum speed distances covered during the 2 tests.
attained during the test is 50 km/h (31 mph)
La

For additional information on fuel

with an average speed of 19 km/h (12 mph).
consumption figures and exhaust
ar

emissions, visit the Vehicle

EXTRA-URBAN CYCLE
gu

Certification Agency (VCA) website

The extra-urban test cycle is carried out at
Ja

immediately after the urban test. Approximately http://www.vcacarfueldata.org.uk/.

half of the test comprises of steady speed
©

driving, while the remainder consists of a series

of accelerations, decelerations and engine idling.
The maximum test speed is 120 km/h (75 mph)
and the average speed 63 km/h (39 mph). The
test is carried out over a distance of 7 km (4.3
miles).

141
L
Maintenance
AIRBAG SYSTEM
WARNING: The components that make
up the airbag system are sensitive to
electrical or physical interference,
either of which could easily damage
the system and cause inadvertent
operation or a malfunction of the
airbag module.
To prevent malfunction of the airbag system,
always consult your Dealer/Authorised Repairer
before fitting any of the following:
• Electronic equipment such as a cell phone,
2-way radio, or Audio system.
• Accessories attached to the front of the
vehicle.
• Any modification to the front of the vehicle.
• Any modification involving the removal or
repair of any wiring or component in the
er
vicinity of any of the airbag system
components, including the steering wheel,
ov
steering column, instrument or fascia
R
panels.
nd
• Any modification to the fascia panels or
steering wheel.
La
ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM
ar
No modifications or additions should
gu
be made to the Anti-theft system. Such
Ja
changes could cause the system to
malfunction.
©
SERVICE INTERVAL INDICATOR
An upcoming service interval will be notified to
the driver via the Message centre, as either a
distance or time left until service is due. Once
the distance or time are exceeded, the display
will show a negative value (-) to indicate that a
service is overdue.
One or both types of service interval (distance
and time) may be displayed.
142
OWNER MAINTENANCE
Any significant or sudden drop in fluid
levels, or uneven tyre wear, should be
reported to a qualified technician without
delay.
In addition to the routine maintenance, a
number of simple checks must be carried out
more frequently.
DAILY CHECKS
15
• Operation of lamps, horn, direction
indicators, wipers, washers, and warning
20
lamps.
• Operation of seat belts and brakes.
d
ite
• Look for fluid deposits underneath the
vehicle that might indicate a leak.
m
Li
WEEKLY CHECKS
• Engine oil level.
• Engine coolant check.
• Brake/clutch fluid level.
• Power steering fluid level.
• Screen washer fluid level.
• Tyre pressures and condition.
• Operate air conditioning.
Note: The engine oil level should be checked
more frequently if the vehicle is driven for
prolonged periods at high speeds.
ARDUOUS DRIVING CONDITIONS
When a vehicle is operated in extremely arduous
conditions, more frequent attention must be
paid to servicing requirements.
Arduous driving conditions include:
• Driving in dusty and/or sandy conditions.
• Driving on rough and/or muddy roads
and/or wading.
• Driving in extremely hot conditions.

• Towing a trailer or driving in mountainous
conditions.
Contact a Dealer/Authorised Repairer for advice.
DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER (DPF)
Diesel vehicles equipped with a particle filter,
have more efficient emission control. The
particles in the exhaust gases are collected in
the filter during normal driving.
When a DPF message is displayed,
accompanied by an amber warning lamp, the
filter requires a regeneration cycle to clean itself.
This requires the engine to have reached normal
operating temperature. Regeneration takes place
automatically at an interval of approximately
300-900 km (186-560 miles), depending on
driving conditions. Regeneration normally takes
10-20 minutes and is automatically requested
by the engine control module, if the vehicle is
er
driven steadily at vehicle speeds between 60
ov
km/h to 112 km/h (37 mph to 70 mph). It is
possible that the regeneration process will occur
R
at lower vehicle speeds, but the events may take
nd
a little longer at a 50 km/h (31 mph) average
speed.
La
Note: If regeneration is not successfully carried
out, the amber warning lamp will eventually be
ar
replaced by a red warning lamp.
gu
If a DPF message is displayed, accompanied by
Ja
a red warning lamp, contact a Dealer/Authorised
Repairer as soon as possible.
©
R
Maintenance
DRIVING SHORT DISTANCES OR IN
COLD WEATHER
If the vehicle is frequently driven short distances
or in cold weather conditions, then the engine
may not reach normal operating temperature.
This means that regeneration of the Diesel
Particulate Filter (DPF) does not take place and
the filter is not efficiently cleaned. When the
filter reaches a condition when a filter
regeneration is appropriate and the current drive
style is not appropriate, a warning triangle in
15
the Instrument panel illuminates and the
message DPF Full. See manual is displayed in
20
the Message centre. This is not indicating a fault
condition with the vehicle and no dealership
d
ite
support should be required. Start regeneration
of the filter by driving the vehicle, preferably on
m
a main road or motorway. The vehicle should
Li
then be driven for approximately 20 minutes or
more.
When regeneration is complete, the warning
text is cleared automatically.
Note: A small increase in fuel consumption may
be noticed temporarily during regeneration.
ROAD TESTING DYNAMOMETERS
(ROLLING ROADS)
It is essential that any dynamometer testing is
carried out only by a qualified person, familiar
with the dynamometer testing and safety
procedures practised by Dealers/Authorised
Repairers.
SAFETY IN THE GARAGE
If the vehicle has been driven recently,
do not touch the engine, exhaust, and
cooling system components until the
engine has cooled.
Never leave the engine running in an
unventilated area - exhaust gases are
poisonous and extremely dangerous.
143
L
Maintenance

WARNING - THAT NO PERSON SHOULD USED ENGINE OIL

PLACE ANY PORTION OF THEIR BODY
Prolonged contact with engine oil may cause
UNDER A VEHICLE THAT IS
serious skin disorders, including dermatitis and
SUPPORTED BY A JACK.
cancer of the skin. Always wash thoroughly after
Keep your hands and clothing away contact.
from drive belts, pulleys, and fans.
Some fans may continue to operate It is illegal to pollute drains, water
after the engine has stopped. courses or soil. Use authorised
waste disposal sites to dispose of
Remove metal wrist bands and
used oil and toxic chemicals.
jewellery, before working in the engine
compartment.
OPENING THE BONNET

15
Do not touch electrical leads or

20
components while the engine is
running, or with the starter switch

d
turned on. ite
Do not allow tools or metal parts of the
m
vehicle to make contact with the
battery leads or terminals.
Li
er

FUEL SYSTEM
ov

Under no circumstances should any

R

part of the fuel system be dismantled

or replaced by anyone other than a
nd

suitably qualified vehicle technician.

La

Make sure sparks and naked lights are

kept away from the engine
ar

compartment.
gu

Wear protective clothing, including,

where practical, gloves made from an
Ja

impervious material.
©

1. Pull the bonnet release lever, located in the

POISONOUS FLUIDS
Fluids used in motor vehicles are poisonous
and should not be consumed or brought into
contact with open wounds.
For your own safety, always read and obey all
of the instructions printed on labels and
containers.
front left footwell.
2. Lift the bonnet safety catch lever, located
below the centre point of the bonnet, then
raise the bonnet.
3. When closing the bonnet, make sure both
catches are securely latched.

144
 R
Maintenance

CLOSING THE BONNET

Do not drive with the bonnet retained
by the safety catch alone.
1. Lower the bonnet until the safety catch
engages. Using both hands, press the
bonnet down until the catches click.
2. Check that both catches are engaged, by
trying to lift the front edge of the bonnet.

15
20
d
ite
m
Li
er
ov
R
nd
La
ar
gu
Ja
©

145
L
Maintenance

ENGINE COMPARTMENT OVERVIEW

15
20
d
ite
m
Li
er
ov
R
nd
La

1. Engine oil filler cap (2.2L diesel).

ar

2. Oil level dipstick (2.2L diesel).

gu

3. Engine oil filler cap (2.0L petrol).

Ja

4. Oil level dipstick (2.0L petrol).

5. Brake fluid reservoir cap (left-hand drive
©

vehicles).
6. Brake fluid reservoir cap (right-hand drive
vehicles).
7. Engine coolant filler cap.
8. Windscreen washer fluid filler cap.
9. Power steering fluid filler cap.
Do not drive if there is a possibility that
leaked fluid will come into contact with
a hot surface, such as the exhaust.

146
 R
Maintenance

UNDER BONNET COVERS - REMOVAL UNDER BONNET COVERS - REFITTING

Before refitting the under bonnet covers,
make sure that no pipes, cables or other
items, have been trapped between the
cover and the casing.
1. Slide the rear edge of the cover under the
rubber trim, fitted to the scuttle panel.
2. Make sure the front edge of the cover is
flush to the casing, and then press down
until the cover clicks into place.

15
UNBLOCKING WASHER JETS

20
Do not operate the washer jets during
unblocking or adjustment. Windscreen

d
itewasher fluid may cause irritation to the
eyes and skin. Always read and
m
observe the washer fluid
Li

manufacturer's instructions.
er

If a washer jet becomes blocked, use a thin

strand of wire to unblock the jet, by inserting
ov

the wire into the jet. Make sure the wire is

R

completely removed after unblocking. The

washer jet position may also be adjusted by
nd

inserting the point of a needle into the jet and

La

gently repositioning it.

ar

CHANGING A BULB
gu

Always replace bulbs with the correct

Ja

type and specification. If you are in any

1. Press the tabs to release the cover from the doubt, contact your Dealer/Authorised
©

casing. Repairer for advice.

Note: Releasing the inboard tab on the front Note: In certain territories, it is a legal
edge of the cover first, will make it easier requirement to carry spare bulbs. A replacement
to release the remaining tabs. bulb kit is available as an approved accessory
from your Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
2. Lift the front edge of the cover and slide
forwards to remove.
3. Release the catch.
4. Remove the cover.

147
L
Maintenance

HEADLAMP REMOVAL HEADLAMP BULB IDENTIFICATION

A. Xenon bulb.
B. Halogen bulb.

15
HALOGEN BULBS

20
Dependent on vehicle specification, halogen
bulbs may be used for high beam, dipped beam,

d
and front fog lamps. Take care not to touch the
ite
glass part of the bulb with your fingers; always
use a cloth to handle the bulb. If necessary, use
m
methylated spirits to remove finger prints.
Li
er

XENON LAMPS
ov

Replacement or maintenance of xenon

R

lamps should only be carried out by

suitably qualified personnel.
nd

High voltage is required to ignite the

La

gas and metal vapour which are used

to power xenon lamps. Contact with
ar

this voltage can cause serious injury.

gu

Do not place the removed lamp unit face Xenon lamp units operate at a very
down on hard or abrasive surfaces. high temperature. Make sure the lamp
Ja

Doing so may scratch the surface of the units have cooled before attempting to
lens. touch them.
©

1. Undo and remove the 2 retaining bolts.

Seek advice about the correct
2. Pull up the locking lever to release the disposal of xenon lamp units from
headlamp unit. a Dealer/Authorised Repairer, or
3. Pull the headlamp unit forward to allow your local authority.
access to the rear of the unit.
4. Disconnect the electrical connector from
the back of the unit, by pressing the tab and
pulling the connector.

148
 R
Maintenance

HEADLAMP BULB REPLACEMENT

Combined xenon and halogen

15
20
d
ite
m
Li
er
ov
R
nd
La

1. Unclip the locking lever, press down the 2

tabs and remove the cover.
ar

2. Undo the 2 retaining screws and remove

gu

the xenon unit.

Ja

3. Remove the connector from the xenon unit.

4. Pull the connector off of the halogen bulb.
©

5. Unclip the halogen bulb and remove it from

the unit.

149
L
Maintenance

Halogen Only

15
20
d
ite
m
Li
er
ov
R

1. Unclip the locking lever, press down the 2

nd

tabs and remove the cover.

La

2. Pull the halogen dipped beam connector off

of the bulb.
ar

Take care not to touch this type of bulb

gu

with your fingers; always use a cloth to

Ja

handle them. If necessary, clean the bulb

with methylated spirits to remove
©

fingerprints.
3. Unclip the bulb and remove it from the unit.
4. Pull the main beam connector off of the
bulb.
5. Unclip the bulb and remove it from the unit.

150
 R
Maintenance

DIRECTION INDICATOR BULB FRONT FOG LAMP BULB

REPLACEMENT REPLACEMENT

15
20
d
ite
m
Li
er
ov
R
nd
La
ar

1. Remove the cover.

gu

2. Twist the indicator bulb holder

anticlockwise, and remove it from the lamp
Ja

unit.
3. Press the bulb into the holder, then twist it
©

1. Using the slot at the top of the lamp

anticlockwise and remove.
surround, lever out with a suitable
implement to remove.
2. Undo the 3 retaining screws, and remove
the lamp unit.
3. Rotate the bulb holder anticlockwise, and
remove it from the lamp unit.
4. Press the 2 clips together, and remove the
electrical connector.

151
L
Maintenance

REAR LAMP BULB REPLACEMENT

15
20
d
ite
m
Li
er
ov

1. With the taildoor open, remove the 2 screws

from the inner edge of the unit. SIDE REPEATER LAMP BULB
R

2. Pull the unit carefully away from the vehicle, REPLACEMENT

nd

disconnect the electrical connector and

La

remove the unit from the vehicle.

3. Direction indicator.
ar

4. Stop/tail lamp.
gu

Note: This is an LED lamp. Repair or

Ja

replacement should only be carried out by

qualified personnel.
©

5. Reversing lamp.
6. Rear fog lamp.
Twist the relevant bulb unit and pull to access
the bulb. Push, twist and pull to remove the
bulb.

1. Carefully slide and pull the side repeater

unit away from the vehicle.

152
 R
Maintenance

2. Twist the bulb holder anticlockwise.

3. Remove the bulb from the bulb holder.

LICENCE PLATE LAMP BULB

REPLACEMENT

15
20
d
ite
m
Li
er

1. Carefully remove the lamp unit using a

ov

suitable tool.
R

2. Twist the bulb holder anticlockwise.

nd

3. Remove the bulb from the bulb holder.

La
ar
gu
Ja
©

153
L
Maintenance

INTERIOR LAMP BULB REPLACEMENT

15
20
d
ite
m
Li
er
ov
R
nd
La
ar
gu
Ja
©

154
 R
Maintenance

Follow the steps illustrated. Insert a new bulb The sunroof can now be operated as normal.
and refit the components.
1. Sun visor lamps. PARTS AND ACCESSORIES
2. Courtesy lamp and map lamps. The fitting of non-approved parts and
3. Load space lamp. accessories, or the carrying out of
non-approved alterations or
4. Puddle lamps. conversions, may be dangerous and
5. Glove box lamp. could affect the safety of the vehicle
6. Footwell lamps. and occupants, and also invalidate the
terms and conditions of the vehicle's
WINDOW RESET warranty.

15
The windows will need to be reset if the battery Land Rover will not accept any liability

20
is disconnected, becomes discharged, or the for death, personal injury, or damage
power supply is interrupted. to property, which may occur as a

d
direct result of fitment of non-approved
Reset as follows: ite
accessories or the carrying out of
1. Close the window fully. non-approved conversions to Land
m
2. Release the switch, then lift it to the close Rover vehicles.
Li

position and hold for 1 second.

er

3. Repeat the procedure on each window.

ov

SUNROOF RESET
R

If the battery is disconnected, or the power

nd

supply is interrupted while the sunroof is

La

partially open, it will need to be recalibrated.

Once the battery is reconnected, or the power
ar

supply is restored, recalibrate the sunroof as

gu

follows:
Ja

1. Switch the ignition on.

2. With the sunroof closed, press and release
©

the front of the switch. The sunroof will

move to the tilted position.
3. Press the front of the sunroof switch and
hold for 20 seconds.
4. After 20 seconds, the sunroof will begin to
move. Keep the front of the switch pressed
until the fully open/close cycle has
completed.
5. Once the sunroof has stopped moving,
release the switch.

155
L
Vehicle cleaning

THE EXTERIOR SENSORS AND CAMERAS

Remove any heavy deposits of mud and
dirt with a hose before washing the
vehicle.
Some high pressure cleaning systems
are sufficiently powerful enough to
penetrate suspension joints,
door/window seals, and damage trim
and door locks. Never aim the water jet
directly at the engine air intake, heater
air intakes, body seals (doors, sunroof,
When washing the vehicle do not aim
high pressure water jets directly at any
of the sensors and cameras. Do not use
abrasive materials or hard/sharp objects
to clean the sensors and cameras. Only
use approved vehicle shampoo.
Parking aid sensors should be kept clean to
maintain accuracy and performance.
If required, the cameras should be cleaned using
a cloth moistened with a small amount of

15
windows, etc.), or at any components glass-cleaning product.
which may be damaged (lights, mirrors,

20
exterior trim, suspension seals and
UNDER BODY MAINTENANCE

d
gaiters, etc.). Make sure that the
pressure washer nozzle is always at a Regularly flush the under body with plain water,
ite
distance of more than 12 inches (300 and pay particular attention to areas where mud
m
mm) from any component of the vehicle. and debris collect.
Li

Some high pressure cleaning systems If damage or corrosion are detected, have the
er

are sufficiently powerful to damage the vehicle checked by a Dealer/Authorised Repairer

as soon as possible.
ov

wheels and brake system. Never aim a

water jet directly at the wheels or brakes.
R

Do not use a power wash system in the AFTER OFF-ROAD DRIVING

nd

engine bay area.

La

Following cleaning of the vehicle's

exterior (particularly with a pressure
ar

washer), it is recommended that the

vehicle is taken for a short drive to dry
gu

out the brakes.

Ja

Substances which are corrosive, such

as bird droppings, can damage the
©

vehicle’s paintwork and should be

removed as soon as possible.
Do not apply polish to any unpainted
areas of bumper mouldings. It will
become ingrained in the textured finish.
Make sure the areas around air intakes
and the front grille are clean and clear
of debris. Pay particular attention to the
lower grille and radiator. Failure to do
so may cause the engine to overheat,
leading to severe engine damage.

156

Make sure the vehicle's underside is cleaned as
soon as possible after driving off-road.
THE INTERIOR
Do not polish the Instrument panel.
Polished surfaces are reflective, and
may interfere with the driver's view.
Clean plastic or cloth-faced surfaces with warm
water and non-detergent soap, and then wipe
clean with a soft cloth.
LEATHER UPHOLSTERY
Only use cleaning products specifically
designed for use on leather. Do not use
chemical, alcohol, or abrasive materials,
as they will cause rapid deterioration of
the leather. The use of products which
are not approved will invalidate your
warranty.
er
If you are in any doubt as to which
ov
products to use, consult your
R
Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
Leather should be cleaned and protected at least
nd
every 6 months.
La
To prevent ingrained dirt and staining, inspect
the seat upholstery regularly and clean every 1
ar
to 2 months as follows:
gu
1. Wipe off fine dust from the seat surfaces
Ja
using a clean, damp, non-coloured cloth.
Avoid over wetting the leather.
©
2. If this is not sufficient, use a cloth which
has been dampened with warm soapy water
and then wrung out. Use only mild
non-caustic soap.
3. Use Land Rover leather cleaner for heavily
soiled areas. Dry off and rub with a clean
soft cloth, changing surfaces regularly.
R
Vehicle cleaning
Use Land Rover leather cleaner several times a
year to maintain the leather’s suppleness and
appearance. The cleaner will nourish and
moisturise, and help to improve the surface
protection film against dust and substances.
• Dark clothing may stain leather seats, just
like other upholstery products.
• Sharp objects, such as belts, zippers, rivets,
etc., can leave permanent scratches and
scratch marks on the leather surface.
• Unless spillages, such as tea, coffee, or ink,
15
are washed away immediately, permanent
20
staining may have to be accepted.
If a valet service is used, make sure the
d
specialist concerned is aware of, and follows,
ite
these instructions precisely.
m
Note: Some materials/fabrics are prone to dye
Li
transfer, which can cause unsightly
discolouration of lighter coloured leathers.
Affected areas should be cleaned and
re-protected as soon as possible.
SEAT BELTS
Do not allow any water, cleaning
products, or fabric from cloths to enter
the seat belt mechanism. Any
substance which enters the mechanism
may affect the performance of the seat
belt in an impact.
Extend the seat belts fully, then use warm water
and a non-detergent soap to clean. Allow the
seat belts to dry naturally while fully extended.
Note: While cleaning the seat belt, take the
opportunity to examine the webbing for
damage/wear. Any wear or damage should be
reported to, and rectified by, a Dealer/Authorised
Repairer.
157
L
Vehicle cleaning

AIRBAG MODULE COVERS

Airbag covers should only be cleaned
using a slightly dampened cloth and a
small amount of upholstery cleaner.
Do not allow the airbag covers, or
surrounding areas, to become
contaminated with liquids. Any
substance which enters the mechanism
can prevent correct deployment of an
airbag during an impact.

15
INSTRUMENT PANEL, TOUCH SCREEN

20
AND AUDIO SYSTEM
• Clean with a lightly moistened cloth.

d
• Do not use chemical agents or domestic
ite
cleaners.
m
• To prevent errors occurring, make sure only
Li

one finger at a time is in contact with the

er

screen.
ov

• Do not use excessive pressure.

R

• Do not allow sharp, hard or abrasive objects

to make contact with the screen.
nd

• Avoid exposing the screen to direct sunlight

La

for long periods.

ar
gu
Ja
©

158

CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL
The oil consumption of an engine is influenced
by many factors. Under high loads, an engine
will consume more oil than usual. Diesel
engines consume slightly more oil than petrol
engines.
er
ov
R
1. Engine oil dipstick - 2.0L petrol engine.
nd
2. Engine oil dipstick - 2.2L diesel engine.
La
Prior to checking the oil level make sure that:
ar
• The vehicle is on level ground.
gu
• The engine oil is cold.
Note: If it is necessary to check the oil level
Ja
when the engine is hot, switch off the
©
engine and let the vehicle stand for 5
minutes to allow the oil to drain back into
the sump. Do not start the engine.
The oil level can be checked as follows:
1. Withdraw the dipstick and wipe the blade
clean with a lint-free cloth.
2. Fully re-insert the dipstick and withdraw
again to check the oil level. Never allow the
oil level to fall below the lower mark or
notch on the dipstick.
R
Fluid level checks
As a general guide, if the level on the dipstick:
• Is nearer to the upper mark or notch than
the lower, add no oil.
• Is nearer to the lower mark or notch than
the upper, add 0.5 litres (1 pint) of oil.
• Is below the lower mark or notch, add 1 litre
(2 pints) of oil and re-check the level after
a further 5 minutes.
TOPPING UP THE OIL
15
The vehicle's warranty may be
invalidated if damage is caused by using
20
oil that does not meet the required
specification.
d
iteFailure to use an oil that meets the
required specification could cause
m
excessive engine wear, a build up of
Li
sludge and deposits, and increase
pollution. It could also lead to engine
failure.
Overfilling with oil could result in severe
engine damage. Oil should be added in
small quantities and the level re-checked
to make sure the engine is not overfilled.
Note: It is essential to use oil with the correct
specifications and make sure it is suitable for
the climatic conditions in which the vehicle is
to be operated. See 199, LUBRICANTS AND
FLUIDS.
1. Remove the oil filler cap.
2. Add oil to maintain the level between the
MIN and MAX marks or notches on the
dipstick. Clean up any oil spilled during
topping up.
3. Check the oil level again after 5 minutes.
Note: The approximate quantity of oil required
to raise the level from MIN to MAX on the
dipstick is 1.2 litres (2.11 pints) - petrol models
or 1.5 litres (2.64 pints) - diesel models.
159
L
Fluid level checks

CHECKING THE COOLANT LEVEL
Running the engine without coolant will
cause serious engine damage.
The coolant level in the expansion tank should
be checked at least weekly (more frequently in
high mileage or arduous operating conditions).
Always check the level when the system is cold.
Unscrew the filler cap slowly, allowing
the pressure to escape before removing
completely.
Antifreeze is poisonous and can be
fatal if swallowed - keep containers
sealed and out of the reach of children.
If accidental consumption is suspected,
seek medical attention immediately.
If the fluid comes into contact with the
skin or eyes, rinse immediately with
plenty of clean water.

15
The use of non-approved antifreeze will

20
have an adverse effect on the engine
cooling system and; therefore, engine

d
durability.
ite
Antifreeze will damage painted surfaces;
m
soak up any spillage with an absorbent
cloth immediately, and wash the area
Li

with a mixture of car shampoo and

er

water.
ov

When travelling in territories where the

water supply contains salt, always make
R

sure you carry a supply of fresh (rain or

nd

distilled) water. Topping up with salt

Make sure the coolant level remains between water will cause serious engine damage.
La

the level indicator marks, located on the side of

the expansion tank. Top up to the upper level indicator mark located
ar

on the side of the expansion tank. See 199,

If the level has dropped suddenly, or by a large
gu

LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS.

amount, the system may be leaking or
To make sure the anti-corrosion properties of
Ja

overheating. Arrange for the vehicle to be

examined by a qualified technician as soon as the coolant are retained, the antifreeze content
should be checked once a year and completely
©

possible.
renewed every ten years, regardless of distance
travelled. Failure to do so, may cause corrosion
TOPPING UP THE COOLANT of the radiator and engine components.
Never remove the filler cap when the
The specific gravity of a 50% antifreeze solution
engine is hot - escaping steam or
at 20°C (68°F) is 1.068 and protects against
scalding water could cause serious
frost down to -40°C (-40°F).
personal injury.
Avoid spilling antifreeze onto a hot
engine - a fire may result.

160
 R
Fluid level checks

Note: In an emergency - and only if the

approved antifreeze is unavailable - top up the
cooling system with clean water, but be aware
of the resultant reduction in frost protection.
Do not top up or refill with conventional
antifreeze formulations. If in doubt, consult a
qualified technician.
Make sure the cap is tightened fully after top up
is complete, by turning the cap until the ratchet
cap clicks.

15
CHECKING THE BRAKE FLUID LEVEL

20
Brake fluid is highly toxic - keep
containers sealed and out of the reach 1. Clean the filler cap before removing, to

d
of children. If accidental consumption prevent dirt from entering the reservoir.
of fluid is suspected, seek medical
ite
2. Remove the filler cap.
attention immediately.
m
3. The brake fluid level should be between the
If the fluid comes into contact with the
Li

MIN and the MAX marks.

skin or eyes, rinse immediately with
er

plenty of water. The fluid level may drop slightly during normal
use as a result of brake pad wear, but should
ov

Do not drive the vehicle with the fluid

not be allowed to drop below the MIN mark.
level below the MIN mark.
R

If the quantity of fluid in the brake/clutch

nd

TOPPING UP THE BRAKE FLUID

reservoir drops below the recommended level,
Brake fluid will damage painted surfaces.
La

a red warning indicator in the Instrument panel

will illuminate. Soak up any spillage with an absorbent
cloth immediately, and wash the area
ar

Note: If the warning indicator illuminates while

with a mixture of car shampoo and
gu

the vehicle is being driven, stop the vehicle as

water.
soon as safety permits by gently applying the
Ja

brakes. Check and top up the fluid level, if Only use new fluid from an airtight
necessary. container. Fluid from opened containers
©

or fluid previously bled from the system

Seek qualified assistance immediately
if brake pedal travel is unusually long
or if there is any significant loss of
brake fluid. Driving under such
conditions could result in extended
stopping distances or complete brake
failure.
With the vehicle on level ground, check the fluid
level at least every week (more frequently in
high mileage or arduous operating conditions).
will have absorbed moisture, which will
adversely affect performance and must
not be used.
1. Top up the reservoir to the MAX mark. See
199, LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS.
2. Replace the cap.
3. Fit the reservoir cover in the reverse order
of removal.

161
L
Fluid level checks

CHECKING THE POWER STEERING

FLUID LEVEL
Power steering fluid is highly toxic.
Keep containers sealed and out of the
reach of children. If accidental
consumption of fluid is suspected, seek
medical attention immediately.
If the fluid comes into contact with the
skin or eyes, rinse immediately with
plenty of water.

15
Do not start the engine if the fluid level
has dropped below the MIN mark.

20
Severe damage to the steering pump
could result. The level of fluid can be seen through the

d
translucent body of the reservoir.
Seek qualified assistance immediately if ite
there is a noticeable drop in the fluid The fluid level should be between the MIN and
m
level. Severe damage to the steering the MAX marks.
Li

pump could result.

TOPPING UP THE POWER STEERING
er

If fluid loss is slow, the reservoir may

be topped up to the upper level mark, to FLUID
ov

enable the vehicle to be driven to a repair Power steering fluid will damage painted
R

facility for examination. However, it is surfaces. Soak up any spillage with an

recommended that you seek qualified
nd

absorbent cloth immediately, and wash

assistance before driving the vehicle. the area with a mixture of car shampoo
La

Check and top up the fluid with the vehicle on and water.
level ground, the engine switched off, and the Do not fill the reservoir above the MAX
ar

system cold. Make sure the steering wheel is mark.

gu

not turned after stopping the engine.

1. Clean the filler cap before removing, to
Ja

prevent dirt from entering the reservoir.

2. Remove the filler cap.
©

3. Top up the reservoir, until the fluid level is

between the MIN and MAX marks. See 199,
LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS.
4. Replace the filler cap.

162
 R
Fluid level checks

CHECKING THE WASHER FLUID LEVEL
Some screen washer products are
inflammable, particularly if high or
undiluted concentrations are exposed
to sparking. Do not allow screen
washer fluid to come into contact with
naked flames or sources of ignition.
If the vehicle is operated in
temperatures below 4°C (40°F), use a
washer fluid with frost protection. In
cold weather, failure to use a washer
The washer reservoir supplies both the front
and rear screen washer jets and headlamp
washer jets.
Check and top up the reservoir level at least
every week. Always top up with screen washer
fluid to prevent freezing.
Operate the washer switches periodically to
check that the nozzles are clear and properly
directed.
1. Clean the filler cap before removing, to
prevent dirt from entering the reservoir.

15
fluid with frost protection, could result 2. Remove the filler cap.
in impaired vision and increase the risk

20
of a vehicle crash. 3. Top up the reservoir, until the fluid is visible
in the filler neck.

d
Do not use an antifreeze or vinegar/water ite
solution in the washer reservoir - 4. Replace the filler cap.
Washer reservoir capacity
m
antifreeze will damage painted surfaces,
while vinegar can damage the
Li

• Models without headlamp wash - 3.1 litres

windscreen washer pump. (5.45 pints).
er

Body panels may suffer discolouration • Models with headlamp wash - 5.8 litres
ov

as a result of screen washer fluid (10.2 pints).

spillage. Take care to avoid spillage,
R

particularly if an undiluted or high

nd

concentration is being used. If spillage

occurs, wash the affected area
La

immediately with water.

ar

TOPPING UP THE WASHER FLUID

gu
Ja
©

163
L
Vehicle battery
BATTERY WARNING SYMBOLS
Do not allow naked flames or other
sources of ignition near the battery,
as the battery may emit explosive
gases.
Make sure when working near or
handling the battery, suitable eye
protection is worn, to protect the
eyes from acid splashes.
To prevent risk of injury, do not
allow children near the battery.
Be aware that the battery may emit
explosive gases.
Li
The battery contains acid which is
er
extremely corrosive and toxic.
ov
R
Consult the handbook for
nd
information, before handling the
battery.
La
ar
BATTERY CARE
gu
Do not allow the battery electrolyte
(fluid) to come into contact with your
Ja
skin or eyes. It is both corrosive and
toxic, and the resulting injuries can be
©
severe. If any electrolyte does come
into contact with your skin or eyes,
immediately rinse the affected area
with clean, cold water. Immediate
medical advice will be required.
164
If battery electrolyte comes into contact
with your skin and/or clothes, you
should remove the affected clothing
and flush the skin with copious
amounts of water. Seek medical
assistance immediately.
If battery electrolyte comes into contact
with your eyes, flush with copious
amounts of clean cold water. Seek
medical assistance immediately and
continue to flush with water.
15
If swallowed, battery electrolyte can
be fatal. If electrolyte is swallowed,
20
seek medical assistance immediately.
d
Do not connect any 12-volt equipment
ite
directly to the battery terminals. Doing
so may cause a spark, which can result
m
in an explosion.
The cell plugs and vent pipe must be
in place at all times when the battery
is connected to the vehicle. Make sure
the vent pipe is clear of obstructions
and not kinked. Failure to do so, may
cause a pressure build up in the
battery, resulting in an explosion.
Do not expose the battery to a naked
flame or spark, as the battery produces
explosive, flammable gas.
Never jump start (boost) or charge, a
frozen battery. Doing so can result in
an explosion.
Remove all metal jewellery before
working on, or near, the battery, and
never allow metal objects or vehicle
components to come into contact with
the battery terminals. Metal objects
can cause sparks and/or short circuits,
resulting in an explosion.
 R
Vehicle battery

Do not allow the battery posts or
terminals to come into contact with
your skin. They contain lead and lead
compounds, which are toxic. Always
wash your hands thoroughly after
handling the battery.
Your vehicle is fitted with either a low
maintenance or an Absorbed Glass Mat (AGM)
battery. AGM batteries are sealed for life and
require no maintenance.
Do not attempt to open or remove the
Make sure there is no physical contact
between the donor and disabled
vehicles, other than the booster cables.
Make sure that the slave battery or
starting aid is a 12-volt device.
Disconnect the battery cables prior to
operating any electrical equipment.
Note: Before connecting jump leads, make sure
the battery connections on the disabled vehicle
are correct, and that all electrical equipment has
been switched off.

15
top from an AGM battery.

20
In hot climates, more frequent checks of the
low maintenance battery electrolyte level and

d
condition are required. If necessary, the battery ite
cells can be topped up using distilled water.
m
CONNECTING JUMP LEADS
Li

Rotating parts of the engine can cause

er

serious injury. Take extreme care when

ov

working near rotating parts of the

engine.
R

Before attempting to start the disabled

nd

vehicle, make sure that the Electric

La

Parking Brake (EPB) is applied, or

suitably chock the wheels. Make sure
ar

that Park (P) is selected, or the manual

gearbox is in neutral.
gu

Suitable eye protection must be worn

Ja

when working in the area of the

battery.
©

Do not attempt to start the disabled

vehicle if it suspected that the
electrolyte in the battery is frozen.
During normal use, batteries emit Switch off all electrical equipment before
explosive gas sufficient to cause following this procedure. All electrical
severe explosions and capable of equipment must remain switched off
causing serious injury - keep sparks until the procedure is complete.
and naked lights away from the engine
compartment.

165
L
Vehicle battery

Exercise extreme caution during this CONNECTING A STARTING AID

procedure, to avoid contact with any
To start the vehicle using a starting aid or a
components in the engine compartment
slave battery, follow the instructions in the
that are moving at high speed, carrying
sequence given:
high voltage, or are hot.
1. Connect the positive (Red) jump lead to the
1. Connect the positive (Red) jump lead to the
positive (+) battery terminal of the
positive (+) terminal on the donor vehicle's
discharged battery.
battery.
2. Connect the negative (Black) jump lead to
2. Connect the other end of the positive jump
the vehicle's earth point.
lead to the positive (+) terminal on the
discharged battery. 3. Start the engine and allow it to idle.

15
3. Connect the negative (Black) jump lead to 4. Disconnect the negative (Black) jump lead
from the vehicle's earth point.

20
the recommended jump starting earth point
of the donor vehicle. 5. Disconnect the positive (Red) jump lead

d
4. Connect the other end of the negative jump from the battery terminal of the vehicle.
ite
lead to the earth point indicated.
CHARGING THE VEHICLE BATTERY
m
Note: Check that all cables are clear of any
Li

moving components and that all 4 Make sure the correct type and rating
connections are secure. of charger is used. Using an unsuitable
er

5. Start the engine of the donor vehicle and charger may damage the battery, and
ov

allow it to idle for a few minutes. could cause the battery to explode.
R

6. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle. Always charge the battery in a well
ventilated area, away from any naked
nd

Note: Do not switch on any electrical flames, sparks, or other ignition

circuits of the disabled vehicle until after
La

sources. During charging, the battery

the jump leads are removed. can produce a highly explosive and
ar

7. Allow both vehicles to idle for 2 minutes. flammable gas.

gu

8. Switch off the donor vehicle. The battery must be disconnected and
9. Disconnect the negative (Black) jump lead removed from the vehicle before
Ja

from the previously disabled vehicle. charging. Failure to do so, could result
in damage to the vehicle's electrical
©

10. Disconnect the negative (Black) jump lead

system.
from the donor vehicle.
Always follow the instructions supplied
11. Disconnect the positive (Red) jump lead
with the battery charger. Failure to do
from the previously discharged battery.
so, may result in damage to the battery.
12. Disconnect the positive (Red) jump lead
1. Disconnect the battery and remove it from
from the donor vehicle.
the vehicle.
2. Connect the battery charger in accordance
with the charger manufacturer's
instructions.

166

3. Once the charge is complete, switch off the
power to the charger.
4. Disconnect the charger cables from the
battery.
5. Allow the battery to stand for an hour before
connecting to the vehicle. This will allow
any explosive gases to dissipate and reduce
the risk of explosion.
REPLACING THE VEHICLE BATTERY
Switch the ignition off before
disconnecting battery terminals.
Always disconnect the negative
terminal first and reconnect last.
Only fit a battery of the correct type and
rating. Fitting an incorrect battery may
result in a fire, or damage to the
electrical system. If you are in any
doubt when fitting a battery, seek
er
qualified assistance.
ov
Use caution when lifting the battery out
R
of, or into, the vehicle. It is heavy, and
may cause injury when lifting, or if
nd
dropped.
La
Do not tip the battery when lifting or
moving, as tilting the battery more than
ar
45 degrees may damage the battery,
gu
and may cause the electrolyte to leak
out. Battery electrolyte is highly
Ja
corrosive and toxic.
©
When refitting the battery, make sure
no metal objects, or vehicle
components, come into contact with
the battery terminals. Metal objects
can cause a spark or short circuit, both
of which may result in an explosion.
R
Vehicle battery
Make sure when fitting a battery to the
vehicle, the terminals and battery clamps
are clean and lightly coated with
petroleum jelly. This will make sure that
good electrical connections are made
and help to prevent corrosion.
Always follow the battery manufacturer's
instructions. Failure to do so, may result
in damage to the vehicle and/or the
electrical system.
Do not rest the battery on any part of the
15
vehicle, as it may cause damage due to
its weight.
20
Do not run the engine with the battery
d
disconnected. Doing so may damage the
itecharging system.
m
1. Make sure all electrical circuits are switched
off, all of the windows are closed, and the
Li
alarm is disarmed.
2. Remove the Smart key from the vehicle and
wait for 2 minutes to allow the systems to
power down fully.
3. Undo the negative clamp, and lift the cable
and clamp clear of the battery terminal.
4. Undo the positive clamp, and lift the cable
and clamp clear of the battery terminal.
5. Undo the battery clamp and lift the battery
clear of the vehicle.
A new battery should be supplied with plastic
terminal covers. Leave the covers in place when
fitting the battery, and remove them one at a
time to fit the battery cable clamps.
Refitting is an exact reversal of the removal
procedure. If you are in any doubt about fitting
a battery, seek qualified assistance before
attempting to fit the battery.
167
L
Vehicle battery

Used batteries must be disposed of

correctly as they contain a number
of harmful substances. Seek advice
on disposal from your
Dealer/Authorised Repairer and/or
your local authority.

EFFECTS OF DISCONNECTING
Disconnecting the battery can affect a number
of vehicle systems, especially if there is
insufficient battery power prior to disconnection.

15
For example, the alarm may trigger depending
on its state when the battery was disconnected.

20
If the alarm does sound, use the Smart key in
the normal way to disarm the security system.

d
The windows may need recalibrating to operate ite
correctly.
m
Li
er
ov
R
nd
La
ar
gu
Ja
©

168
 R
Fuses

FUSE BOX LOCATIONS

15
20
d
ite
m
Li
er
ov
R
nd
La
ar
gu
Ja
©

When a fuse box lid is removed, take
care to protect the box from moisture,
and refit the lid at the earliest
opportunity.
1. Engine compartment fuse box.
• The fuse numbers and positions are
shown on the inside of the fuse box
cover.
2. Passenger compartment fuse box.
• Open the glove box. See 58, STORAGE
COMPARTMENTS.
• Lower the glove box by lightly pushing
in at each support stay at the top of the
left and right corners.

169
L
Fuses

• Lightly push in the thumb catch at the

top of the support strut. Lift and lightly
pull away to release the top of the strut.
• Remove the glove box by lightly pulling
towards the rear of the vehicle to
release it from the lower clips.
• Lift up the flap in the insulation
material, to access the fuse board.
• A label on the rear of the glove box will
show the fuse numbers and positions.
3. Loadspace compartment fuse box.

15
• The fuse numbers and positions are

20
shown on the inside of the fuse box
cover.

d
ite
CHANGING A FUSE
m
Fit Land Rover approved replacement
Li

fuses of the same rating and type, or

er

fuses of a matching specification. Using

an incorrect fuse, may result in damage
ov

to the vehicle's electrical system and can

R

result in a fire.
nd

If the replacement fuse blows after

installation, the system should be
La

checked by a Dealer/Authorised
Repairer.
ar

Note: Land Rover recommend that relays should

gu

only be replaced by qualified personnel.

Ja

Always switch off the ignition, and the affected

electrical circuit, before replacing a fuse.
©

Note: Spare fuses and a puller are located in

the passenger compartment fuse box.

170
 R
Fuses

ENGINE COMPARTMENT FUSE BOX

Fuse number Rating (Amps) Fuse colour Circuits protected
F1 - - -
F2 5 Tan Voltage module
F3 80 Clear Cooling fans
F4 60 Blue Glow plugs (diesel only)
F5 - - -
F6 15 Blue Engine management. Oxygen

15
sensors
F7 5 Tan Relays

20
F8 20 Yellow Engine management

d
F9 10 Red ite Engine management
F10 15 Blue Automatic transmission
m
Li

F11 10 Red Engine management

er

F12 15 Blue Engine management

ov

F13 10 Red Air conditioning

R

F14 15 Blue Engine management. Air

conditioning
nd

F15 40 Orange Starter motor

La

F16 100 Violet Electric booster heater

(diesel only)
ar
gu

F17 60 Blue Passenger compartment

fuse box supply
Ja

F18 60 Blue Passenger compartment

©

fuse box supply

F19 60 Blue Luggage compartment fuse
box supply. Audio system
F20 60 Blue Luggage compartment fuse
box supply
F21 60 Blue Luggage compartment fuse
box supply
F22 30 Green Windscreen wipers

171
L
Fuses

Fuse number Rating (Amps) Fuse colour Circuits protected

F23 40 Orange Passenger compartment
fuse box supply
F24 - - -
F25 30 Green Anti-lock Braking System
(ABS)
F26 40 Orange ABS
F27 40 Orange Passenger compartment
fuse box supply

15
F28 40 Orange Heater blower

20
F29 - - -
F30 15 Blue Headlamp washer

d
F31 15 Blue
ite
Horns
m
F32 20 Yellow Auxiliary heater (diesel only)
Li

F33 5 Tan Relays

er

F34 40 Orange Heated windscreen (left side)

ov

F35 40 Orange Heated windscreen (right

R

side)
nd

F36 5 Tan Auxiliary heater water pump

(diesel only)
La

F37 20 Yellow Fuel pump

ar

F38 10 Red Parking aid module

gu

F39 - - -
Ja

F40 - - -
F41 - - -
©

F42 5 Tan Headlamp levelling control

F43 5 Tan Automatic high beam. Rear
camera
F44 10 Red Heated steering wheel
F45 5 Tan Auxiliary heater water pump
(diesel only)

172
 R
Fuses

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT FUSE BOX

Fuse number Rating (Amps) Fuse colour Circuits protected
F1 5 Tan Radio Frequency (RF)
receiver. Interior motion
sensor. Tyre Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS)
F2 - - -
F3 15 Blue Front fog lamps
F4 - - -

15
F5 5 Tan Slip control module

20
F6 5 Tan Ignition supply for engine
compartment fuse box and

d
ite luggage compartment fuse
box relays
m
F7 - - -
Li

F8 25 Clear Front passenger door

er

module
ov

F9 5 Tan Electric Parking Brake (EPB)

R

F10 5 Tan Heated washer jets

nd

F11 10 Red Reverse light trailer

La

F12 10 Red Reverse lights. Mirror

control
ar

F13 - - -
gu

F14 5 Tan Brake pedal switch

Ja

F15 30 Green Heated rear screen

©

F16 - - -
F17 5 Tan Keyless Vehicle Module
(KVM)
F18 - - -
F19 5 Tan Power-train Control Module
(PCM)
F20 5 Tan Accelerator pedal

173
L
Fuses

Fuse number Rating (Amps) Fuse colour Circuits protected

F21 5 Tan Instrument panel. Centre
console. Electric booster
heater
F22 5 Tan Transmission Control
Module (TCM)
F23 - - -
F24 5 Tan Rear fog lamp (right side)
F25 5 Tan Rear fog lamp (left side)

15
F26 - - -

20
F27 - - -
F28 - - -

d
F29 - -
ite
-
m
F30 - - -
Li

F31 5 Tan Voltage module. Rain

er

sensor. Passenger Airbag

Deactivation (PAD) lamp
ov

F32 25 Clear Driver door module

R

F33 - - -
nd

F34 10 Red Fuel flap

La

F35 - - -
ar

F36 5 Tan Battery backed sounder

gu

F37 5 Tan Road pricing (Singapore

only)
Ja

F38 15 Blue Front screen washer

©

F39 25 Clear Rear door module (left side)

F40 5 Tan Clock. Door memory switch
F41 - - -
F42 30 Green Driver seat
F43 15 Blue Rear screen washer
F44 25 Clear Rear door module (right
side)
F45 30 Green Front passenger seat

174
 R
Fuses

Fuse number Rating (Amps) Fuse colour Circuits protected

F46 - - -
F47 20 Yellow Sunroof and sunblind
module
F48 15 Blue Trailer connector
F49 - - -
F50 - - -
F51 5 Tan Steering wheel switches
F52 20 Yellow Cigar lighter (front)

15
F53 - - -

20
F54 - - -

d
F55 20 Yellow ite Auxiliary socket (rear
console)
m
F56 10 Red Restraints Control Module
Li

(RCM)
er

F57 10 Red Battery saver circuits. Vanity

ov

mirror lamp. Glove box

lamp. Upper console lamp
R

F58 - - -
nd

F59 - - -
La

F60 5 Tan Occupant Classification

Sensor Control Module
ar

(OCSCM)
gu

F61 5 Tan Immobiliser Antenna Unit

Ja

(IAU)
©

F62 10 Red Climate control module

F63 20 Yellow Auxiliary socket (luggage
compartment)
F64 - - -
F65 - - -
F66 5 Tan On Board Diagnostic (OBD)
connector
F67 - - -

175
L
Fuses

Fuse number Rating (Amps) Fuse colour Circuits protected

F68 - - -
F69 - - -

15
20
d
ite
m
Li
er
ov
R
nd
La
ar
gu
Ja
©

176
 R
Fuses

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT FUSE BOX

Fuse number Rating (Amps) Fuse colour Circuits protected
FB1 15 Blue Electronic centre differential
FB2 15 Blue Caravan fridge
FB3 15 Blue Driver seat heater
FB4 15 Blue Front passenger seat heater
FB5 5 Tan Auxiliary heater control
FB6 - - -

15
FB7 - - -

20
FB8 10 Red Instrument panel
FB9 5 Tan Heating and ventilation

d
ite system
FB10 - - -
m
Li

FB11 - - -
er

FB12 - - -
ov

FD1 10 Red Audio system. Touch screen

R

FD2 15 Blue Audio system

nd

FD3 10 Red Digital radio

FD4 - - -
La

FD5 5 Tan Electric seat switches

ar

FD6 30 Green Electric Parking Brake (EPB)

gu

FD7 15 Blue Rear wiper

Ja

FD8 30 Green EPB

©

FD9 - - -
FD10 5 Tan Audio amplifier
FD11 40 Orange Audio amplifier
FD12 - - -

177
L
Tyres

TYRE MARKINGS

15
20
d
ite
m
Li
er
ov
R
nd

1. P indicates that the tyre is for passenger The load index and speed rating on all
vehicle use. This index is not always shown. replacement tyres must be, at least,
La

2. The width of the tyre from sidewall edge to the same specification as the Original
sidewall edge in millimetres. Equipment (OE). If in doubt, consult
ar

your Dealer/Authorised Repairer.

3. The aspect ratio, also known as the profile,
gu

gives the sidewall height as a percentage of 7. The speed rating denotes the maximum
Ja

the tread width. So, if the tread width is 205 speed at which the tyre should be used for
mm and the aspect ratio is 50, the sidewall extended periods. See 179, SPEED RATING.
©

height will be 102 mm. 8. Tyre manufacturing standard information,

4. R indicates that the tyre is of Radial ply
construction.
5. The diameter of the wheel rim, given (in
inches).
6. The load index for the tyre. This index is not
always shown.
9. M+S or M/S indicates that the tyre has been
which can be used for tyre recalls and other
checking processes. Most of this
information relates to the manufacturer,
place of manufacture, etc. The last 4
numbers are the date of manufacture. For
example, if the number was 5111, the tyre
was made in the 51st week of 2011.
designed with some capability for mud and
snow.

178
 R
Tyres

10. The number of plies in both the tread area, TYRE CARE
and the sidewall area, indicates how many
Do not drive the vehicle if a tyre is
layers of rubber-coated material make up
damaged, excessively worn, or
the structure of the tyre. Information is also
incorrectly inflated.
provided on the type of materials used.
Avoid contaminating the tyres with
11. Wear rate indicator: A tyre rated at 400, for
vehicle fluids as they may cause
example, will last longer than a tyre rated
damage to the tyre.
at 200.
Avoid spinning the wheels. The forces
12. The traction rating grades a tyres
released can damage the structure of
performance when stopping on a wet road
the tyre and cause it to fail.
surface. The higher the grade, the better the

15
braking performance. The grades, from If wheel spin is unavoidable due to a
highest to lowest are; AA, A, B and C. loss of traction (in deep snow, for

20
example), do not exceed the 50 km/h
13. The maximum load which can be carried by
(30 mph) point on the speedometer.

d
the tyre. ite
Note: Tyre condition should be checked after
14. Heat resistance grading: The tyre resistance
the vehicle has been used off-road. As soon as
m
to heat is grade A, B or C, with A indicating
the vehicle returns to a normal, hard, road
the greatest resistance to heat. This grading
Li

surface, stop and check for damage to the tyres.

is provided for a correctly inflated tyre,
er

which is being used within its speed and All of the vehicle's tyres (including the spare)
should be checked regularly for damage, wear
ov

loading limits.
and distortion. If you are in any doubt about the
15. The maximum inflation pressure for the
R

condition of a tyre, have it checked immediately

tyre. This pressure should not be used for
nd

by a tyre repair centre or your Dealer/Authorised

normal driving. See 182, AVOIDING FLAT
Repairer.
SPOTS.
La

TYRE PRESSURES
ar

SPEED RATING
Never drive the vehicle if the tyre
gu

Rating Speed km/h (mph) pressures are incorrect.

Ja

Q 160 (99) Pressure checks should only be carried

R 170 (106) out when the tyres are cold and the
©

vehicle has been stationary for more

S 180 (112) than 3 hours. A hot tyre at, or below,
T 190 (118) the recommended cold inflation
pressure, is dangerously
U 200 (124) under-inflated.
H 210 (130)
V 240 (149)
W 270 (168)
Y 300 (186)

179
L
Tyres

If the vehicle has been parked in strong
sunlight, or used in high ambient
temperatures, do not reduce the tyre
pressures. Move the vehicle into the
shade, and allow the tyres to cool
before re-checking the pressures.
Tyre size Load/speed index
All tyre pressures, including the spare,
should be checked on a weekly basis
and before long journeys, using an
accurate pressure gauge, when the
tyres are cold. Failure to properly
maintain your tyre pressures could
increase the risk of tyre failure,
resulting in a loss of vehicle control
and potential personal injury.
Tyre pressures
All loading conditions

15
Front, bar (psi) Rear, bar (psi)

20
225/65 R17 102H 2.3 (33) 2.3 (33)

d
235/65 R17 104/108V 2.2 (32)
ite 2.2 (32)
235/60 R18 103/107V 2.2 (32) 2.2 (32)
m
235/55 R19 105V 2.4 (35) 2.4 (35)
Li
er

The following procedure should be used to 7. Refit the valve cap.

ov

check and adjust the tyre pressures:

TYRE VALVES
R

To avoid damaging the valves, do not

apply excessive force or sideways Keep the valve caps screwed down firmly to
nd

pressure on the gauge/inflator. prevent water or dirt entering the valve. Check
La

1. Remove the valve cap. the valves for leaks when checking the tyre
2. Firmly attach a tyre pressure gauge/inflator pressures.
ar

to the valve.
gu

3. Read the tyre pressure from the gauge and

PUNCTURED TYRES
Ja

add air, if required. Do not drive the vehicle with a

4. If air is added to the tyre, remove the gauge punctured tyre. Even if the punctured
©

and re-attach it before reading the pressure. tyre has not deflated, it is unsafe to
Failure to do so, may result in an inaccurate use, as the tyre may deflate suddenly
reading. at any time.

5. If the tyre pressure is too high, remove the

gauge and allow air out of the tyre by
REPLACEMENT TYRES
pressing the centre of the valve. Refit the Always fit replacement tyres of the
gauge to the valve and check the pressure. same type, and wherever possible, of
the same make and tread pattern.
6. Repeat the process, adding or removing air
as required, until the correct tyre pressure
is reached.

180

The load and speed index ratings on
all replacement tyres must be, at least,
the same specification as the Original
Equipment (OE). If in doubt, consult
your Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
Do not rotate tyres around the vehicle.
If the use of tyres not recommended by
Land Rover is unavoidable, make sure
you read, and fully comply with, the
tyre manufacturer’s instructions.
If lower speed rated specialist tyres
are fitted (for example, winter tyres or
off-road tyres) then the vehicle must
be driven within the speed limitations
of the tyres. Consult your
Dealer/Authorised Repairer for further
information. In markets that require a
tyre's maximum speed label to be
fitted, the tyre's maximum speed label
er
should be placed within the driver's
ov
field of vision. These labels can be
R
obtained from the tyre dealer.
When the tread has worn down to approximately
nd
2 mm, wear indicators start to appear at the
La
surface of the tread pattern. This produces a
continuous band of rubber across the tread, as
ar
a visual reminder.
gu
Ideally, tyres should be replaced in sets of 4. If
this is not possible, replace the tyres in pairs
Ja
(both front or both rear). When tyres are
replaced, the wheels should always be
©
re-balanced and the alignment checked.
For the correct tyre specification and pressures,
see 179, TYRE PRESSURES.
USING WINTER TYRES
In many countries, legislation exists that
requires the use of winter tyres during specified
periods of the year.
R
Tyres
M+S (mud and snow) tyres have a recognised
level of winter performance and need not be
replaced. The M+S marking, on the tyre
sidewall, indicates an 'all season' tyre designed
for use all year round, including cold
temperatures, snow, and ice.
This symbol identifies dedicated
winter tyres, which can be fitted if
optimum winter traction is required,
or the vehicle is to be used in more
extreme winter conditions.
15
Note: A dedicated winter tyre often has a lower
20
speed rating than the Original Equipment (OE)
tyre, and the vehicle must; therefore, be driven
d
within the speed limitation of the tyre. Consult
ite
your Dealer/Authorised Repairer for further
information. In markets that require a tyre's
m
maximum speed label to be fitted, the tyre's
Li
maximum speed label should be placed within
the driver's field of vision. These labels can be
obtained from the tyre dealer.
The tyre pressures indicated on the tyre
information label, are for use in all conditions
on the OE tyres. If a reduced speed rating tyre
is fitted, the recommended pressures are only
suitable for use below 160 km/h (100 mph).
For optimum traction, tyres should be run in for
at least 160 kilometres (100 miles) on dry roads
prior to driving on snow or ice.
Land Rover approved winter tyre sizes*
17 inch wheels 235/65 R17
18 inch wheels 235/60 R18
19 inch wheels 235/55 R19
Note: *Studded tyres are market dependent.
Consult a Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
Use of dedicated winter tyres may require a
change of wheel size, depending on the original
choice of wheel. All 4 wheels must be changed.
181
L
Tyres

If fitted with standard rubber valves, the Tyre Note: Make sure the correct tyre pressures are
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) warning maintained when moving to areas of differing
lamp will flash for 75 seconds and then remain ambient temperature.
illuminated. The Message centre will also
Tyre pressure temperature compensation
display TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM FAULT. Ambient temperature Pressure
When the original wheels and tyres are refitted, °C (°F) compensation bar
the vehicle will need to travel a short distance (psi, kPa)
to reset the TPMS and extinguish the warning 20 (68) use label
lamp.
30 (86) + 0.14 (2, 14)

15
PRESSURE COMPENSATION FOR 40 (104) + 0.28 (4, 28)
TEMPERATURE CHANGES 50 (122) + 0.41 (6, 41)

20
A colder ambient local temperature will reduce

d
pressure within the tyre. An effect is to decrease AVOIDING FLAT SPOTS
ite
sidewall height and to increase tyre shoulder
In order to minimise flat spotting, the tyre
wear with the potential for tyre failure. Vehicle
m
pressures can be increased to the maximum as
dynamics could also be adversely affected.
Li

stated on the tyre sidewall, for the period when

Tyre pressures can be adjusted to compensate the vehicle is stationary. Tyres must be returned
er

before the start of the journey. Alternatively, to the specified running pressures before
ov

tyre pressures can be adjusted when the area driving.

of lower ambient temperature is reached.
R

In this situation, the vehicle must be left in the TYRE DEGRADATION

nd

ambient local temperature for at least one hour Tyres degrade over time, due to the effects of
La

before the tyre pressure is adjusted. ultraviolet light, extreme temperatures, high
To compensate for colder ambient loads, and environmental conditions. It is
ar

temperatures, tyre pressures should be recommended that tyres are replaced at least
gu

increased by 0.14 bar (2 psi, 14 kPa) for each every 6 years from the date of manufacture, but
10°C (20°F) decrease. they may require replacement more frequently.
Ja

USING SNOW CHAINS

©

Only use traction devices in heavy

snow conditions, on compacted snow.
Never exceed 50 km/h (30 mph) when
traction devices are fitted.
Never fit traction devices to a
temporary-use spare wheel.

182
 R
Tyres

Land Rover approved traction devices may be

used to improve traction on compacted snow,
in heavy snow conditions. They should not be
used in off-road conditions.
If it becomes necessary to fit traction devices,
the following points must be observed:
• Only Land Rover approved traction devices
should be used on the vehicle. Only Land
Rover approved traction devices have been
tested to make sure they do not cause
damage to the vehicle. Contact a

15
Dealer/Authorised Repairer for information.

20
• The wheels and tyres fitted must conform
to the specifications of the Original

d
Equipment (OE). ite
• Half chain traction devices can be fitted to
m
the front wheels of vehicles fitted with 17
inch and 18 inch diameter wheels.
Li

• Fit traction devices in pairs on the same

er

axle.
ov

• Always read, understand and follow the

R

traction device manufacturer's instructions.

Pay particular attention to the maximum
nd

speed and fitting instructions.

La

• Avoid tyre/vehicle damage, by removing the

traction devices as soon as the conditions
ar

allow.
gu

TYRE DECLARATION (India only)

Ja

All imported tyres meet the requirements of

©

Bureau of India Standards (BIS) and comply

with the requirements under Central Motor
Vehicle Rules (CMVR) 1989. The tyres are the
same as those tyres supplied as Original
Equipment (OE) for Land Rover models which
are fully Type Approved for the Indian market.

183
L
Tyre pressure monitoring system (TPMS)

TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING

SYSTEM
TPMS provides a low pressure warning
and does not re-inflate your tyres. Tyre
pressures should be checked regularly
using an accurate pressure gauge when
the tyres are cold.
TPMS can NOT register damage to a
tyre. Regularly check the condition of
your tyres, especially if the vehicle is
driven off-road.

15
When inflating tyres, care should be

20
taken to avoid bending or damaging the
TPMS valves. Always make sure that the

d
inflation head is correctly aligned to the ite
valve stem. Wheels fitted with TPMS can be visually
m
Note: Non-approved accessories may interfere identified by the external metal lock nut and
Li

with the system. If this occurs, TYRE valve (1). All Land Rover non-TPMS wheels
PRESSURE MONITORING FAULT is displayed have a rubber valve fitted (2).
er

in the Message centre. Tyre pressures should be checked regularly

ov

Note: Different types of tyre may affect TPMS when the tyres are cold, and adjusted as
R

performance. Always replace tyres in necessary. The presence of TPMS does not
accordance with recommendations. remove the need to do this to make sure of
nd

TPMS constantly monitors the tyre pressure in vehicle safety.

La

each wheel, including the full size spare. The tyre pressure warning lamp (see 36, TYRE
Temporary-use spare tyres are not monitored. PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (YELLOW))
ar

See 185, TEMPORARY USE SPARE WHEEL AND illuminates when 1 or more of the tyres are
gu

TYRE CHANGE. significantly under-inflated. Stop and check the

tyres as soon as possible and inflate them to
Ja

the recommended pressure for the vehicle's

loading condition.
©

TPMS also monitors the full size spare tyre

pressure. If the pressure for the spare tyre is
incorrect, the message CHECK SPARE TYRE
PRESSURE is displayed, accompanied by
illumination of the warning lamp.

184
 R
Tyre pressure monitoring system (TPMS)

FULL SIZE SPARE WHEEL AND TYRE

CHANGE
The system will automatically recognise any
changes in wheel positions. The vehicle must
be stationary for 15 minutes during the wheel
and tyre change, to make sure the system can
detect the change. After driving above 25 km/h
(15 mph), any deflation warning should clear
within approximately 5 minutes.

TEMPORARY USE SPARE WHEEL AND

15
TYRE CHANGE

20
If the temporary-use spare wheel is fitted, the
system will automatically recognise the change

d
in wheel positions. After approximately 10 ite
minutes of driving above 25 km/h (15 mph),
m
the message FRONT[REAR] RIGHT[LEFT] TYRE
Li

PRESSURE NOT MONITORED will be displayed,

accompanied by illumination of the warning
er

lamp.
ov

The warning lamp will first flash and then

R

illuminate continuously. Extended use of the

temporary-use spare wheel will trigger the
nd

message TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING

La

SYSTEM FAULT.
This TPMS display sequence will be activated
ar

at every ignition cycle until the temporary spare

gu

wheel is replaced by a full-size road wheel with

a TPMS sensor fitted.
Ja

Note: If in use, always replace the temporary

©

spare wheel before having a TPMS fault

investigated.

185
L
Tyre repair kit
TYRE REPAIR KIT
If you are in any doubt regarding your
ability to carry out the instructions,
contact your Dealer/Authorised
Repairer before attempting the repair.
Your vehicle may not be equipped with a spare
tyre. If this is the case, in its place, in the rear
under floor storage compartment, you will find
a tyre repair kit. The tyre repair kit can be used
to repair 1 tyre and it is essential that you read
the following guide before attempting to repair
a tyre.
The tyre repair kit seals most punctures, with a
maximum diameter of 6 mm (1/4 inch), within
the tread area.
Note: The sealant used in the tyre repair kit has
a shelf-life and the expiry date is shown on the
Li
tyre sealant bottle. Make sure that the container
is replaced before the expiry date.
er
ov
TYRE REPAIR KIT SAFETY
R
INFORMATION
nd
Some tyre damage may only be
partially sealed, or may not seal at all,
La
depending on the amount and type of
damage. Any loss of tyre pressure can
ar
seriously affect vehicle safety.
gu
Do not use the tyre repair kit if the tyre
Ja
has been damaged by driving while
under-inflated.
©
USING THE TYRE REPAIR KIT
A: Tyre tread area.
186
Only use the tyre repair kit to seal
damage located within the tyre tread
area (A).
Do not use the tyre repair kit to seal
damage to the tyre sidewall.
Do not exceed 80 km/h (50 mph) when
a repaired tyre is fitted to the vehicle.
The maximum distance that should be
driven when a repaired tyre is fitted,
is 200 km (125 miles).
When a repaired tyre is fitted, drive
15
with caution and avoid sudden braking
20
or steering manoeuvres.
Only use the tyre repair kit for the
d
vehicle with which it was supplied.
ite
Do not use the tyre repair kit for any
m
other purpose than tyre repair.
Never leave the tyre repair kit
unattended, when in use.
Only use the tyre repair kit within the
-30°C to +70°C temperature range.
Always keep children and animals at
a safe distance from the tyre repair kit,
when in use.
Do not stand directly beside the
compressor when it is operating.
Check the tyre sidewall before
inflating. If any cracks, damage or
deformities are apparent, do not inflate
the tyre.
Watch the tyre sidewall during
inflation. If any cracks, bumps or
similar damage, or deformities appear,
switch off the compressor and deflate
the tyre. Do not continue to use the
tyre.
Avoid skin contact with the sealant,
which contains natural rubber latex.

If the tyre inflation pressure does not
reach 1.8 bar (26 psi, 180 kPa) within
10 minutes, the tyre may have suffered
excessive damage. A temporary repair
will not be possible, and the vehicle
should not be driven until the tyre has
been replaced.
Before attempting a tyre repair, make
sure that the vehicle is parked safely, as
far away from passing traffic as possible.
Make sure that the Electric Parking Brake
(EPB) is applied and that transmission
Park (P) is selected.
Do not attempt to remove foreign
objects, such as nails, screws, etc. from
the tyre.
Always run the engine when using the
compressor, unless the vehicle is in an
enclosed or poorly ventilated space, as
er
this may cause asphyxiation.
ov
To prevent overheating, do not operate
the compressor continuously for longer
R
than 10 minutes.
nd
Note: All vehicle drivers and occupants should
La
be made aware that a temporary repair has been
made to a tyre fitted to the vehicle. They should
ar
also be made aware of the special driving
gu
conditions imposed when using a repaired tyre.
Ja
REPAIR PROCEDURE
©
Check the tyre sidewall prior to
inflation. If there are any cracks,
bumps, or similar damage, do not
attempt to inflate the tyre. Do not stand
directly beside the tyre while the
compressor is pumping. Watch the tyre
sidewall. If any cracks, bumps, or
similar damage appear, turn off the
compressor and let the air out by
means of the pressure relief valve. Do
not continue to use the tyre.
R
Tyre repair kit
If the tyre inflation pressure does not
reach 1.8 bar (26 psi, 180 kPa) within
a maximum of 10 minutes, the tyre
may have suffered excessive damage.
A temporary repair will not be
possible, and the vehicle should not
be driven until the tyre has been
replaced.
1. Open the tyre repair kit and peel off the
maximum speed label. Attach the label to
the fascia in the driver's field of vision. Take
15
care not to obstruct any of the instruments
or warning lamps.
20
2. Uncoil the compressor power cable and the
inflation hose.
d
ite
3. Unscrew the orange cap from the sealant
bottle receiver and the sealant bottle cap.
m
4. Screw the sealant bottle into the receiver in
Li
a clockwise direction, until tight.
Note: Screwing the bottle onto the receiver
will pierce the bottle's seal. Once the
receiver has been fitted, a ratchet prevents
it from being removed.
5. Remove the valve cap from the damaged
tyre.
6. Remove the protective cap from the inflation
hose. Connect the inflation hose to the tyre
valve, making sure that the hose is screwed
on firmly.
7. Making sure that the compressor switch is
in the Off (0) position, insert the power
cable connector into an auxiliary power
socket, see 58, STORAGE
COMPARTMENTS.
Switch on the engine. See 65, STARTING
THE ENGINE.
8. Switch on the compressor, by positioning
the switch to the (l) position.
9. Inflate the tyre to a minimum of 1.8 bar (26
psi, 180 kPa) and a maximum of 3.5 bar
(51 psi, 350 kPa).
187
L
Tyre repair kit
Note: When pumping the sealant through
the tyre valve, the pressure may rise up to
6 bar (87 psi, 600 kPa). The pressure will
drop again after approximately 30 seconds.
10. During the inflation, switch the compressor
off briefly, to check the tyre pressure using
the gauge mounted on the compressor.
Note: It should not take longer than 10
minutes to inflate the tyre. If, after a
maximum of 10 minutes, the tyre has not
yet reached minimum pressure, the tyre
should not be used.
11. Once the tyre has been inflated to the
required pressure, switch off the
compressor. If desired, the engine may be
turned off after the compressor has been
turned off.
12. Remove the power connector from the
auxiliary power socket.
er
13. Remove the inflation hose from the tyre
ov
valve, by unscrewing it as quickly as
possible in an anticlockwise direction.
R
14. Replace the inflation hose protective cap
nd
and the tyre valve cap.
La
15. Make sure that the tyre repair kit (including
the bottle and receiver caps) is placed
ar
securely in the vehicle. You will need to use
gu
the kit to check the tyre pressure after a
maximum of 10 km (6 miles), so make sure
Ja
it is easily accessible.
©
16. Immediately drive the vehicle for a
maximum of 10 km (6 miles). This will allow
the sealant to coat the inner surface of the
tyre and form a seal at the puncture.
188
CHECKING THE TYRE PRESSURE
AFTER A REPAIR
When driving the vehicle, if you
experience vibrations, abnormal
steering, or noises, reduce the speed
immediately. Drive with extreme
caution and reduced speed, to the first
safe place to stop the vehicle. Visually
examine the tyre and check its
pressure. If there are any signs of
damage or deformity to the tyre, or the
15
tyre pressure is below 1.3 bar (19 psi,
130 kPa), do not continue driving.
20
Consult a tyre repair centre or your
d
Dealer/Authorised Repairer, for advice
ite
concerning the replacement of a tyre
after using a tyre repair kit.
m
Li
1. Drive the vehicle for a maximum of 3 km (2
miles), then stop in a safe place. Carry out
a visual examination of the tyre’s condition.
2. Remove the repair kit from the vehicle.
3. Screw the inflation hose connector firmly
onto the tyre valve.
4. Read the tyre pressure from the gauge.
5. If the pressure of the sealant filled tyre is
above 1.3 bar (19 psi, 130 kPa), adjust the
pressure to the correct value.
If there are any signs of damage or
deformity to the tyre, or the tyre pressure
is below 1.3 bar, do not continue driving.
6. Make sure that the compressor switch is in
the Off (O) position and insert the power
cable connector into the auxiliary power
socket. Switch on the ignition.
7. Switch the compressor to On (l) and inflate
the tyre to the correct pressure. See 179,
TYRE PRESSURES.
8. To check the tyre pressure, turn off the
compressor and then read the pressure
from the gauge.
 R
Tyre repair kit

9. When the compressor is off, if the tyre

pressure is too high, release the required
amount of pressure using the pressure
release valve.
10. Once the tyre is inflated to the correct
pressure, switch off the compressor and
remove the power plug from the auxiliary
socket.
• The use of the tyre repair kit sealant
may lead to error prompts and incorrect
readings of the Tyre Pressure

15
Monitoring System (TPMS), therefore,
use the tyre repair kit pressure gauge

20
to check and adjust the damaged tyre's
inflation pressure.

d
11. Unscrew the inflation hose connector from
ite
the tyre valve, replace the tyre valve cap and
m
the inflation hose connector protective cap.
Li

12. Make sure that the tyre repair kit is placed

er

securely in the vehicle.

ov

13. Drive to the nearest tyre repair centre or

Dealer/Authorised Repairer, for a
R

replacement tyre to be fitted. Make sure that

nd

you make the repair centre aware that the

tyre repair kit has been used before the tyre
La

is removed.
ar

14. The tyre inflation hose, the receiver, and the

gu

sealant container must be replaced once a

new tyre has been fitted.
Ja

Only sealant containers which are

©

completely empty should be

disposed of with normal household
waste. Sealant containers which
contain some sealant, and the tyre
inflation hose, should be disposed
of by a tyre specialist or your
Dealer/Authorised Repairer in
compliance with local waste disposal
regulations.

189
L
Wheel changing

WHEEL CHANGING

15
20
d
ite
m
Li
er
ov
R
nd
La
ar
gu

The spare wheel is heavy and if Note: Before removing the spare wheel, take
handled incorrectly may cause injury. note of its stowage position. The wheel to be
Ja

Use extreme caution when lifting or changed must be correctly stowed in its place.
©

manoeuvring the wheels.
Always secure the spare wheel, or the
removed wheel, in the correct position
using the retaining bolt.
Always remove the spare wheel before
jacking the vehicle.
WARNING - THAT NO PERSON SHOULD
PLACE ANY PORTION OF THEIR BODY
UNDER A VEHICLE THAT IS
SUPPORTED BY A JACK.
Note: Examine the jack occasionally, clean and
grease the moving parts, particularly the screw
thread, to prevent corrosion.
1. To access the spare wheel, lift the floor
panel and fit the retaining strap hook to the
taildoor guttering.
2. Slacken the locking ring by turning
anticlockwise.
3. Undo and remove the retaining bolt and
then lift out the spare wheel.

190

4. To remove the jack and the wheel brace,
undo the retaining bolt.
5. Vehicle jack.
6. Wheel brace.
7. Locking wheel nut adaptor.
8. Raise the vehicle using the jack, with a slow
steady operation. Avoid rapid, jerky actions
as they may cause the vehicle/jack to
become unstable.
9. Remove the wheel nuts and place them
together where they cannot roll away.
10. Remove the wheel and place to one side.
Do not lay the wheel on its face, as this may
damage the finish.
11. Fit the spare wheel to the hub.
12. Re-fit the wheel nuts, and lightly tighten
them. Make sure the wheel is making
contact with the hub evenly.
er
13. Make sure the space under the vehicle is
ov
clear of obstructions, and lower the vehicle
R
slowly and smoothly.
14. With all of the wheels on the ground and
nd
the jack removed, fully tighten the wheel
La
nuts. The wheel nuts must be tightened in
sequence (see illustration) to the correct
ar
torque of 133 Nm (98 lb.ft).
gu
Ja
©
Note: If it is not possible to torque the wheel
nuts when a wheel is replaced, they should be
set to the correct torque as soon as possible.
R
Wheel changing
If an alloy spare wheel is to be fitted, using a
suitable blunt tool, knock the centre cap out of
the removed wheel. Using hand pressure only,
press the centre cap into the newly fitted spare.
Check and adjust the tyre pressure as soon as
possible.
WHEEL CHANGING SAFETY
Before raising the vehicle or changing a wheel,
make sure you read and comply with the
following warnings.
15
Always find a safe place to stop, off the
20
road and away from traffic.
Make sure that the vehicle and jack are
d
iteboth on firm, level ground.
Apply the Electric Parking Brake (EPB).
m
Engage Park (P).
Li
Switch on the hazard warning lamps.
Make sure the front wheels are in the
straight ahead position, and engage
the steering lock.
Disconnect any trailer or caravan from
the vehicle.
Make sure all passengers, and
animals, are out of the vehicle and in
a safe place away from the roadside.
Place a warning triangle at a suitable
distance behind the vehicle, facing
towards oncoming traffic.
Never place anything between the jack
and the ground, or the jack and the
vehicle.
Always chock the wheels using suitable
wheel chocks. Place the chocks on both
sides of the wheel, diagonally opposite
the wheel to be changed.
191
L
Wheel changing

If jacking the vehicle on a slight slope
is unavoidable, place the chocks on
the downhill side of the 2 opposite
wheels.
Take care when lifting the spare wheel,
and removing the punctured wheel.
The wheels are heavy and can cause
injuries if not handled correctly.
Remove the spare wheel prior to
jacking the vehicle, to avoid
destabilising the vehicle when raised.
DSC must be switched on while the
temporary spare wheel is in use.
Traction devices, such as snow chains,
cannot be used with a temporary spare
wheel.
LOCKING WHEEL NUTS
Locking wheel nuts can only be removed using
the special adaptor provided in the tool kit.
Note: When the vehicle is first supplied, the
adaptor may be stored in the glove box. It

15
Take care when loosening the wheel should be removed and stored in the tool kit as

20
nuts. The wheel brace may slip off if soon as possible.
not properly attached, and the wheel

d
nuts may give way suddenly. Either ite
unexpected movement, may cause an
injury.
m

WARNING - THAT NO PERSON SHOULD

Li

PLACE ANY PORTION OF THEIR BODY

er

UNDER A VEHICLE THAT IS

ov

SUPPORTED BY A JACK.
R

IMPORTANT – USE OF SPARE TYRE

nd

Always adhere to the instructions given

La

on the temporary-use spare wheel

warning label. Failure to comply can
ar

be dangerous.
gu

The temporary-use spare wheel is FOR 1. Insert the adaptor into the locking wheel
TEMPORARY USE ONLY. Drive with nut, making sure that it is fully engaged.
Ja

caution while the temporary spare 2. Using the wheel brace, unscrew the wheel
wheel is fitted. Make sure an original nut and adaptor.
©

size wheel and tyre are fitted as soon

as possible.
Do not fit more than one temporary
spare wheel on the vehicle at any one
time.
Do not exceed 80 km/h (50 mph) while
the temporary spare wheel is fitted.
The tyre pressure in the temporary
spare wheel should be 4.2 Bar (60 psi,
420 kPa).
Note: A code number is stamped onto the
underside of the adaptor. This number must be
recorded on the security card supplied with the
literature pack. If a replacement adaptor is
required, you will be asked to quote this
number. The security card must be kept safe,
but should not be kept with the vehicle.

192
 R
Vehicle recovery

TOWING EYES

15
20
d
ite
m
Li
er
ov
R
nd
La
ar
gu

The towing eyes at the front and rear 1. Using a suitable tool, rotate each of the
of the vehicle are designed for on-road fasteners 90 degrees anticlockwise.
Ja

recovery only. If they are used for any 2. To remove the cover, lower the top edge
©

other purpose, it may result in vehicle
damage and serious injury.
Remove the front and rear towing eye
covers before driving off-road, to
prevent damage or loss.
Remove the body styling kit for access
to the rear towing eye.
The front towing point is located behind a
removable cover in the lower front bumper.
and then pull the cover forward.
To refit, offer up the cover and make sure
the 2 lugs at the bottom edge engage with
the holes in the body panel.
3. Using a suitable tool, rotate each of the
fasteners 90 degrees anticlockwise.
4. Remove the cover.

193
L
Vehicle recovery

TRANSMISSION PARK RELEASE 2. Use a finger to lift the yellow coloured tab
on the front of the selector lever assembly.
Whilst holding the tab in this position, move
the selector lever to Neutral (N).
3. Re-fit the selector lever trim panel to the
centre console and replace the gear shift
knob.

OFF-ROAD RECOVERY
If the towing eyes are to be used for
off-road recovery, it is essential that

15
off-road driver training, covering

20
recovery techniques, is undertaken.
Further information on off-road driver

d
training can be found at
ite
http://www.landroverexperience.com.
m
TOWING THE VEHICLE ON FOUR
Li

WHEELS
er

Do not undock the Smart key, as this

ov

will lock the steering column.

R

If the vehicle's battery is to be

disconnected, the steering column
nd

must be unlocked first. It is not

La

possible to unlock the steering column

with the battery disconnected.
ar

If the engine cannot be used during

gu

Make sure that the vehicle is secured towing, there will be no power
with wheel chocks, apply the Electric assistance to the braking or steering
Ja

Parking Brake (EPB), or firmly press systems. This will result in a much
the brake pedal. Failure to do so can greater effort to steer and stop the
©

result in unexpected movement of the vehicle and a greatly increased

vehicle, causing serious injury or
death.
If the gear selector will not move from the (P)
position, because of a system fault or flat
battery for example, release the lever as follows:
1. Remove the gear shift knob, release the
selector lever trim panel and raise clear of
the centre console.
stopping distance.
Only tow the vehicle in a forward
direction with all 4 wheels on the
ground. Towing in a reverse direction
with 2 wheels on the ground will cause
serious damage to the transmission.

194
 R
Vehicle recovery

The vehicle should only be towed for a

maximum of 50 km (30 miles) at a
maximum speed of 50 km/h (30 mph).
Towing for a greater distance or at a
higher speed, may result in serious
damage to the transmission.
Do not tow the vehicle if the gearbox
cannot be set in Neutral (N).
The following procedure must be carried out
carefully to prevent damage to the vehicle:
1. Secure the towing attachment from the

15
recovery vehicle to the front towing point.

20
2. With the Electric Parking Brake (EPB)
applied, switch on the ignition.

d
3. Apply the brake pedal and place the gear ite
selector into Neutral (N).
m
4. Switch off the ignition.
Li

5. The ignition may be switched on to allow

er

operation of indicators, brake lamps, etc.

ov

6. Release the EPB before towing the vehicle.

R

Leaving the ignition switched on for

extended periods will drain the vehicle's
nd

battery.
La

AFTER TOWING ON FOUR WHEELS

ar

1. Apply the Electric Parking Brake (EPB).

gu

2. Switch on the ignition and apply the brake

Ja

pedal.
3. Place the gear selector in the Park (P)
©

position.
4. Switch off the ignition.
5. Remove the towing attachment and refit the
cover to the front towing point.
Use extreme caution when detaching
towing equipment. Vehicle movement
is possible, which can result in serious
injury.

195
L
After a collision

BEFORE STARTING OR DRIVING SERVICE DATA RECORDING

If the vehicle is involved in a collision,
it should be checked by a
Dealer/Authorised Repairer, or suitably
qualified persons, before starting or
driving.
EVENT DATA RECORDING
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR
is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like
Service data recorders in your vehicle are
capable of collecting and storing diagnostic
information about your vehicle. This potentially
includes information about the performance or
status of various systems and modules in the
vehicle such as engine, throttle, steering or
brakes.
In order to properly diagnose and service your
vehicle, Land Rover, and service and repair
facilities, may access vehicle diagnostic

15
situations, such as an airbag deployment or information through a direct connection to your
vehicle.

20
hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle's systems

d
performed. The EDR is designed to record data ite
related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems
for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds
m
or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
Li

record such data as:

er

• How various systems in your vehicle were

ov

operating.
R

• Whether or not the driver and passenger

seat belts were buckled/fastened.
nd

• How far, if at all, the driver was pressing

La

the accelerator and/or brake pedal.

• How fast the vehicle was travelling.
ar

To access this information special equipment

gu

must be connected directly to the recording

Ja

modules. Land Rover do not access EDR

information without obtaining consent unless
©

pursuant to a court order or where required by

law enforcement, other government authorities
or third parties acting with lawful authority.
Other parties may seek to access the
information independently of Land Rover.
Note: No personal data (e.g., name, gender, age
and crash location) are recorded.

196

LABEL LOCATIONS
Warning labels attached to your
vehicle bearing this symbol mean:
Do not touch or adjust components
until you have read the relevant
instructions in the handbook.
Labels showing this symbol indicate
that the ignition system utilises very
high voltages. Do not touch any
ignition components while the
starter switch is turned on.
Additional information labels may also be found
at the following locations:
er
ov
R
nd
La
ar
gu
Ja
©
1. Bonnet locking platform - Air conditioning
label.
R
Vehicle labels
2. Top of the battery - Battery warning
symbols.
3. The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is
etched into a plate which is visible through
the lowest part of the left side of the
windscreen.
The VIN is also etched into the engine bay
area.
Note: If you need to communicate with a
Dealer/Authorised Repairer, you may be
asked to quote the VIN number.
15
4. End of fascia (passenger side) - Passenger
20
airbag label.
5. Sun visor - Airbag label, vehicle handling
d
label.
ite
6. VIN plate, tyre pressure and airbag warning
m
labels.
Li
7. Inside the fuel filler flap - Fuel label.
8. Engine number:
• Diesel - The number is located on the
front of the engine block.
• Petrol - The number is located on the
front of the engine block.
It is important that you are familiar with these
subjects, to make sure that your vehicle and its
features are used safely. Using the index at the
back of this handbook, refer to the relevant topic
for more information.
VEHICLE BUILD DATE PLATE
This is the calendar month and year in which
the body and power train assemblies were
conjoined, and the vehicle was driven from the
production line.
The vehicle built date is shown on the tyre
pressure label attached to the right B pillar.
197
L
Technical specifications

ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
Diesel 150 Diesel 190 Petrol

Capacity 2179 cm³ 2179 cm³ 1999 cm³

Firing order 1-3-4-2 1-3-4-2 1-3-4-2
Compression ratio 15.8:1 15.8:1 10:1
Maximum torque 420 Nm at 1750 rpm 420 Nm at 1750 rpm 340 Nm at 1750 rpm
Number of cylinders 4 4 4

15
Power output 110 kw (150 PS) at 140 kw (190 PS) at 177kw (240 PS) at
4000 rpm 3500 rpm 5500 rpm

20
d
ite
m
Li
er
ov
R
nd
La
ar
gu
Ja
©

198
 R
Technical specifications

LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS

Part Variant Specification
Engine oil Petrol vehicles 2.0L SAE 5W-30 engine oil meeting specification
WSS-M2C913-C.
Diesel vehicles 2.2L SAE 5W-30 engine oil meeting specification
(with DPF) WSS-M2C934-B. If unavailable 5W-30 engine
oils to ACEA C2 specification may be used.
Diesel vehicles 2.2L SAE 5W-30 engine oil meeting specification
(without DPF) WSS-M2C913-C. If unavailable 5W-30 engine
oils to ACEA A5/B5 specification may be used.

15
Main gearbox oil Manual transmission Land Rover recommends Castrol BOT 350 M3.

20
Main gearbox oil Automatic transmission Land Rover recommends Nippon AW-1 ATF.

d
Power Transfer unit All vehicles Land Rover recommends Castrol BOT 118+.
ite
Haldex coupling All vehicles Land Rover recommends STAT OIL SL01-301.
m
Rear differential oil All vehicles Land Rover recommends Castrol EPX.
Li

Power steering fluid All vehicles Land Rover recommends Pentosin CHF202.
er

Brake fluid All vehicles Use Land Rover brake fluid. If unavailable for
ov

topping up, a Low Viscosity, DOT4 brake fluid

R

that meets the requirements of ISO 4925 class

nd

6 may be used.
Screen wash All vehicles Screen wash with frost protection.
La

Screen cleaning paste All vehicles Land Rover screen cleaning paste DNJ500340.
ar

Coolant All vehicles Land Rover recommends 1:1 mixture of Texaco

gu

XLC and water.

Ja

Land Rover recommends Castrol EDGE

©

Professional:

199
L
Technical specifications

CAPACITIES
Item Variant Capacity
Fuel tank Diesel 68 litres (15 gallons)
Petrol 70 litres (15.4 gallons)
Engine oil refill and filter change Diesel 5.9 litres (10 pints)
Petrol 5.6 litres (9.9 pints)
Manual gearbox All vehicles 2 litres (3.5 pints)
Automatic gearbox All vehicles 7 litres (12.3 pints)

15
Power Transfer unit All vehicles 0.75 litres (1.3 pints)

20
Haldex coupling All vehicles 0.65 litres (1.1pints)
Rear differential All vehicles 0.7 litres (1.2 pints)

d
Washer reservoir With headlamp wash
ite5.8 litres (10.2 pints)
m
Without headlamp wash 3.1 litres (5.5 pints)
Li

Cooling system (refill) Diesel Manual 5.4 litres (9.5 pints)

er

Diesel (aux heater) Manual 5.6 litres (9.9 pints)

ov

Diesel Auto 5.7 litres (10 pints)

R

Diesel (aux heater) Auto 5.9 litres (10.4 pints)

nd

Petrol 4.4 litres (7.7 pints)

La

The quoted capacities are approximate and

ar

provided as a guide only. All oil levels must be

gu

checked using the dipstick, level plugs or the

Instrument panel Message centre, as applicable.
Ja
©

200
 R
Technical specifications

WEIGHTS
Variant Vehicle weight from Gross Vehicle Weight Gross Train Weight
(GVW)* (GTW)**
Diesel 2.2L 1710 kg 2505 kg 4505 kg
3770 lbs 5520 lbs 9930 lbs
Petrol 2.0L 1760 kg 2505 kg 4505 kg
3880 lbs 5520 lbs 9930 lbs
*The maximum permissible weight of the vehicle, including passengers and load.
**The maximum permissible weight of the vehicle, and braked trailer including their respective

15
loads.

20
Variant Maximum front Maximum rear Maximum roof Maximum payload

d
axle load* axle load* ite rack load**
Petrol and Diesel 1310 kg 1360 kg 75 kg 500 kg
m
2888 lbs 2998 lbs 165 lbs 1100 lbs
Li

*The front and rear axle maximum loads cannot be reached simultaneously, as this will exceed
er

the GVW limit.

ov

**This figure includes the weight of the roof rack.

R
nd
La
ar
gu
Ja
©

201
L
Technical specifications

DIMENSIONS

15
20
Item Description mm (inches) Degrees

d
1 Width 2195 (86.4)
ite -
1 Width with mirrors folded 2005 (78.9) -
m
Li

2 Overall height 1830 (72.0) -

3 Approach angle - 31°
er
ov

3 Approach angle with body styling kit - 23°

R

4 Ramp breakover angle - 157°

nd

5 Wheelbase 2660 (104.7) -

6 Overall length 4500 (177.2) -
La

7 Track - front 1601 (63) -

ar

Track - rear 1614 (63.5) -

gu

8 Departure angle with body styling kit - 25°

Ja

8 Departure angle without tow hitch - 34°

©

8 Departure angle with fixed height tow hitch - 18°

- Maximum wading depth 500 (19.7) -
- Ground clearance 210 (8.3) -
- Turning circle (kerb to kerb) 11300 (444.9) -

202
 R
Technical specifications

BULB SPECIFICATION
Before attempting to replace a bulb,
make sure both the affected lamp and
the vehicle's ignition are turned off. If
the circuit remains live, a short circuit
can occur which may damage the
vehicle's electrical system.
Lamp Specification Power (Watts)
Halogen headlamp (low and high beam) HB3 55
Xenon headlamp (low and high beam) D1S 35

15
Front direction indicators PY21W 21

20
Rear direction indicators PY21W 21

d
Front fog lamps H11 ite 55
Side repeater lamps W5W 5
m
Reverse lamps P21W 21
Li

Rear fog lamps P21W 21

er

Number plate lamps W5W 5

ov

Puddle lamps W5W 5

R

All Interior lamps W5W 5

nd
La
ar
gu
Ja
©

203
L
Technical specifications

SMART KEY TRANSMITTER LOCATIONS

15
20
d
ite
m
Li
er
ov
R
nd

1. Cabin front transmitter.

2. Cabin middle transmitter.
La

3. Loadspace interior transmitter.

ar

4. Keyless start module.

gu

5. Loadspace interior transmitter.

Ja

Any implanted medical device should

be kept at a distance, of at least 22 cm
©

(9 inches) away, from any of the

vehicle transmitters/receivers during
their normal operation. This is to avoid
any possibility of interference between
the vehicle's system and the medical
device.

204
 R
Technical specifications

RADIO FREQUENCY SPECTRUM REGULATION STATEMENTS

Service Frequency Band Max. Output Antenna Position Specific
Conditions
4m VHF 70 - 85 MHz 30 W/CW Anywhere on the Transmitter,
40 W/AM metallic part of the harness and
roof. antenna
installation to the
requirements of
ISO/TS 21609.
2m VHF 142 - 175 MHz 30 W /CW Anywhere on the Transmitter,

15
40 W /AM metallic part of the harness and
roof. antenna

20
installation to the
requirements of

d
ite ISO/TS 21609.
TETRA 380 - 422 MHz 10 W /CW Anywhere on the Transmitter,
m
10 W /PM metallic part of the harness and
Li

roof. antenna
er

installation to the
ov

requirements of
ISO/TS 21609.
R

UHF 450 - 470 MHz 10 W /CW Anywhere on the Transmitter,

nd

metallic part of the harness and

roof. antenna
La

installation to the
ar

requirements of
ISO/TS 21609.
gu

Bluetooth 2400 - 2483.5 10 mW Anywhere on the Transmitter,

Ja

MHz vehicle. harness and

antenna
©

installation to the
requirements of
ISO/TS 21609.

205
L
Technical specifications

Service Frequency Band Max. Output Antenna Position Specific

Conditions
Road Telematics 5795 - 5815 MHz 2 W eirp Anywhere close to Transmitter,
a glazed area that harness and
does not contain antenna
antennas or installation to the
conductive glass. requirements of
ISO/TS 21609.
Road Telematics 63 - 64 GHz 2 W eirp Anywhere close to Transmitter,
a glazed area that harness and
does not contain antenna

15
antennas or installation to the

20
conductive glass. requirements of
ISO/TS 21609.

d
ite
South Korea only
m
Omnidirectional transmission or
Li

point-to-multipoint transmission is prohibited

er

according to the law.

ov
R
nd
La
ar
gu
Ja
©

206
 R
Type approval

DECLARATIONS OF CONFORMITY

15
20
d
ite
m
Li
er
ov
R
nd
La
ar
gu
Ja
©

207
 L

208
©
Type approval

Ja
gu
ar
La
nd
R
ov
er
Li
m
ite
d
20
15
 ©
Ja
gu
ar
La
nd
R
ov
er
Li
m
ite
d
20
15

209
Type approval
R
 L

210
©
Type approval

Ja
gu
ar
La
nd
R
ov
er
Li
m
ite
d
20
15
 ©
Ja
gu
ar
La
nd
R
ov
er
Li
m
ite
d
20
15

211
Type approval
R
 L

212
©
Type approval

Ja
gu
ar
La
nd
R
ov
er
Li
m
ite
d
20
15
 ©
Ja
gu
ar
La
nd
R
ov
er
Li
m
ite
d
20
15

213
Type approval
R
 L

214
©
Type approval

Ja
gu
ar
La
nd
R
ov
er
Li
m
ite
d
20
15
 ©
Ja
gu
ar
La
nd
R
ov
er
Li
m
ite
d
20
15

215
Type approval
R
 L

216
©
Type approval

Ja
gu
ar
La
nd
R
ov
er
Li
m
ite
d
20
15
 ©
Ja
gu
ar
La
nd
R
ov
er
Li
m
ite
d
20
15

217
Type approval
R
 L

218
©
Type approval

Ja
gu
ar
La
nd
R
ov
er
Li
m
ite
d
20
15
 ©
Ja
gu
ar
La
nd
R
ov
er
Li
m
ite
d
20
15

219
Type approval
R
L
Index
A DVD player controls.................................99
About this handbook......................................2
Accessories................................................155
Adaptive volume control
standard audio system...........................127
Age degradation (tyres).............................182
Airbags
cover cleaning........................................158
curtain......................................................26
deployment........................................27–28
disability modifications............................29
disabling...................................................29
front.........................................................26
locations...................................................26
maintenance...........................................142
service information..................................28
side..........................................................26
warning lamp.....................................28, 36
Air conditioning
auto setting..............................................55
er
driver controls..............................................
ov
manual.....................................................54
Air quality sensor.........................................56
R
Alarm.....................................................8, 142
nd
perimeter....................................................8
Anchor points (ISOFIX)................................22
La
Anchor points (luggage)..............................60
Anti-lock braking system (ABS) warning
ar
lamp.............................................................35
gu
Anti-theft system........................................142
Ja
Anti-trap protection
windows...................................................50
©
Arduous driving conditions........................142
Audio
automatic station retune...........................89
CD loading................................................84
CD repeat and shuffle.............................133
changing portable media device...............98
clock settings.........................................136
connecting portable media devices..........95
DAB radio
controls................................................90
settings.................................................91
220
stations.................................................92
full screen view......................................100
licensing.............................................84, 86
portable media connections.....................95
portable media controls...........................93
portable media pairing.............................97
portable media playing.............................96
radio controls...........................................88
sound settings..........................................83
touch screen controls...............................82
video player controls................................99
15
Audio (Standard)
20
adaptive volume control.........................127
alternative frequencies...........................129
d
automatic station retune.........................128
ite
bass and treble setting...........................127
cancelling an announcement..................129
m
CD player................................................132
Li
CD track selection..................................132
connecting portable media devices........133
controls..................................................126
DAB messages.......................................132
DAB radio...............................................130
DAB radio presets..................................130
DAB service list......................................131
loading a CD...........................................132
MP3 files playing....................................136
news information...................................129
pairing a mobile phone...........................134
portable media.......................................133
radio preset buttons...............................128
radio station autostore...........................127
radio station lock....................................128
servicelink..............................................131
switching off traffic information.............129
telephone...............................................134
telephone operation................................135
tone settings..........................................127
traffic announcement volume.................129
traffic information..................................129
Automatic locking..........................................6
Automatic transmission...............................69
fault..........................................................70

gear shift warning lamp............................36
hill descent...............................................70
shift paddles.............................................70
temporary manual selection.....................70
Auto mode (climate)....................................55
Autostore
storing radio stations.............................127
using a stored radio station....................127
Auto zoom (navigation)..............................114
Auxiliary device connection..........................96
Auxiliary heater............................................56
B parking brake warning lamp.....................34
Battery
boost starting.........................................166
care........................................................164
charging.................................................166
connecting jump leads...........................165
disconnection.........................................168
effects of disconnection.........................168
er
maintenance...........................................164
ov
replacing................................................167
using a starting aid.................................166
R
warning lamp...........................................34
nd
warning symbols....................................164
Blinds
La
rear window.............................................49
sunroof.....................................................49
ar
Bluetooth
gu
compatibility...........................................105
pairing
Ja
via the phone......................................105
portable media
©
pairing..................................................97
playing..................................................96
telephone...............................................104
icons...................................................106
overview.............................................104
pairing................................................106
phonebook.........................................108
safety..................................................105
Bonnet
closing...................................................145
opening..................................................144
R
Index
Booster seats for larger children..................25
Boost starting............................................166
Brakes
ABS warning lamp....................................35
control with ABS......................................72
electronic brake force distribution............72
emergency brake assist............................72
fluid check..............................................161
fluid specification...................................161
fluid top up.............................................161
handbrake................................................73
important information..............................72
15
20
steep slope control...................................72
warning lamp (amber)..............................35
d
warning lamp (red)...................................34
ite
Brake temperature........................................81
Bulbs
m
changing a bulb......................................147
Li
direction indicator..................................151
front fog lamp........................................151
halogen..................................................148
headlamp...............................................148
interior bulbs replacement.....................154
licence plate...........................................153
number plate..........................................153
rear lamp................................................152
side repeater lamp..................................152
specification...........................................203
C
Call volume................................................108
Cameras
rear camera..............................................75
Cancelling an announcement
standard audio system...........................129
Capacities...................................................200
engine oil................................................200
fuel tank.................................................200
washer reservoir....................................200
CD loading.................................................132
CD player
CD loading................................................84
portable media pairing.............................97
221
L
Index
portable media playing.............................96
standard audio system...................132–133
CD player (Standard).................................132
adaptive volume control.........................127
bass and treble setting...........................127
connecting portable media devices........133
controls..................................................126
loading...................................................132
MP3 file playing.....................................136
repeat and shuffle...................................133
track selection........................................132
CD playing
MP3 file playback...................................136
CD repeat and shuffle.................................133
CD track selection......................................132
Change a connected phone........................106
Changing a bulb.........................................147
Changing a fuse.........................................170
Changing a wheel
locking wheel nuts.................................192
recommended process...........................190
er
safety warnings......................................191
ov
Charging the vehicle battery.......................166
R
Chassis number.........................................197
Child safety
nd
booster seats............................................25
La
check list..................................................22
child seats................................................20
ar
ISOFIX anchor points...............................22
ISOFIX installation....................................23
gu
larger children..........................................25
Ja
lock and window inhibitor........................20
positioning...............................................21
©
recommended child seats........................22
tether anchor points.................................24
tether straps.............................................24
Cleaning
after off-road driving..............................156
airbag covers..........................................158
exterior...................................................156
interior...................................................157
leather....................................................157
park assist sensors................................156
parking aids sensors..............................156
222
seat belts................................................157
sensors and cameras.............................156
under body.............................................156
washer jets.............................................147
Climate control
auto setting..............................................55
driver controls..............................................
fuel burning heater...................................56
heated seats.............................................56
manual.....................................................54
timed climate............................................56
Clock............................................................31
15
Clock settings
20
standard audio.......................................136
Closing the bonnet.....................................145
d
Cold weather driving
ite
diesel particulate filter (DPF)..................143
Compact disc...............................................84
m
Condensation (headlamps)..........................39
Li
Conformity declarations.....................125, 207
Connecting jump leads...............................165
Controls
driving position............................................
overview.......................................................
standard audio system...........................126
Coolant
checking the level...................................160
specification...........................................160
top up.....................................................160
Covers
refitting...................................................147
removal..................................................147
Critical warning messages...........................34
Cruise control..............................................77
warning lamp...........................................37
D
DAB radio
displayed messages.......................131–132
ensembles........................................92, 130
ensemble seek........................................130
manual tuning........................................131
settings....................................................91
standard audio.......................................130

standard radio presets...........................130
DAB radio controls.......................................90
DAB service list..........................................131
Data recording...........................................196
Daytime running lamps................................38
Dealer locations.........................................118
Declarations of conformity.........................207
navigation system..................................125
Deselecting valet mode................................53
Destination entry........................................114
postcode................................................116
search area.............................................114
Diesel
filler flap.................................................139
fuel.........................................................138
glow plugs
warning lamp........................................35
misfuel device........................................139
sulphur content......................................138
Diesel particulate filter (DPF).....................143
cold weather driving...............................143
er
driving short distances...........................143
ov
sulphur content......................................138
R
Dimensions................................................202
Direction indicators......................................38
nd
warning lamp...........................................36
La
Door mirrors................................................44
Door transceiver
ar
assistance................................................48
erase all programming.............................47
gu
garage door opener..................................46
Ja
programming...........................................46
programming a single button...................47
©
programming the garage door opener.....46
rolling code device programming.............47
Double locking...............................................8
full alarm....................................................8
Drive away locking.........................................6
Driver controls.................................................
Driving
activating intelligent stop/start.................68
after a collision.......................................196
arduous conditions................................142
before starting........................................196
R
Index
brake control with ABS.............................72
brakes important information...................72
daily checks............................................142
deactivating intelligent stop/start.............68
driver controls..............................................
DSC active warning lamp.........................35
electronic brake force distribution............72
emergency brake assist............................72
gear shift warning lamp............................36
low oil pressure........................................34
rain sensor...............................................43
sitting correctly........................................12
15
steep slope control with ABS...................72
20
using cruise control.................................77
weekly checks........................................142
d
Driving abroad
ite
beam pattern............................................39
headlamps................................................39
m
Driving position memory.............................13
Li
Driving short distances
diesel particulate filter (DPF)..................143
Dynamic stability control (DSC)...................71
DSC active warning lamp.........................35
DSC off warning lamp..............................35
switching off............................................71
switching on.............................................71
E
Easy route..................................................115
Effects of battery disconnection.................168
Electric parking brake...................................73
Electric seats................................................11
position memory......................................13
restricted seat travel.................................12
Electric windows
operation..................................................49
Electronic brake force distribution...............72
Electronic data...........................................196
Emergency (navigation).............................117
Emergency brake assist...............................72
Engine
antifreeze level........................................160
compartment opening............................144
compartment overview...........................146
223
L
Index
coolant level...........................................160
diesel fuel...............................................138
diesel particulate filter (DPF)..................143
engine compartment..............................146
poisonous fluids.................................144
oil level...................................................159
petrol fuels.............................................137
specifications.........................................198
starting
keyless start backup.............................66
switching off............................................65
Engine/transmission warning lamp..............35
Engine covers
refitting...................................................147
removal..................................................147
Engine oil
capacity..................................................200
Engine starting.............................................65
Entering a destination................................114
Ethanol.......................................................137
EU conformity (navigation system)............125
er
Event data recording..................................196
ov
Exiting the vehicle
R
closing mislock..........................................9
door locks and release levers.....................9
nd
double locking............................................8
La
full alarm....................................................8
global closing.............................................8
ar
interior locks..............................................9
perimeter alarm..........................................8
gu
single locking.............................................8
Ja
Exterior cleaning........................................156
Exterior lamps
©
bulb changing........................................147
bulb specification...................................203
Exterior mirrors
electric.....................................................44
manual.....................................................44
mirror dip when reversing........................45
External temperature
warning lamp...........................................36
Extra features...............................................53
224
F
Favourite locations
navigation...............................................116
navigation details...................................116
Flat spots...................................................182
Fluids
brake
check..................................................161
specification.......................................161
top up.................................................161
capacities...............................................200
15
coolant
specification.......................................160
20
top up.................................................160
engine oil check.....................................159
d
oil ite
top up.................................................159
m
power steering
Li
specification.......................................162
power steering check.............................162
specifications.........................................199
washer fluid............................................163
check..................................................163
specification.......................................163
Fog lamps
warning lamps
front.....................................................36
rear.......................................................36
Front airbags................................................26
Front parking aids........................................74
system fault..............................................75
Front wipers.................................................41
Fuel and refuelling......................................139
consumption..........................................141
diesel......................................................138
diesel fuel sulphur content.....................138
ethanol...................................................137
filler flap.................................................139
fuel filler flap..........................................139
methanol................................................137
methyl tertiary butyl ether (MTBE).........138
misfuel device........................................139
octane rating..........................................137

petrol......................................................137
running out............................................138
safety precautions..................................137
tank capacity..........................................140
Fuel burning heater......................................56
Fuel consumption......................................141
combined cycles....................................141
extra-urban cycle....................................141
urban cycle.............................................141
Fuel filler flap.............................................139
Fuel gauge....................................................31
Fuel system................................................144
Fuel tank
capacity..................................................200
Full screen view for video...........................100
Fuses
changing................................................170
engine compartment fuse box................171
locations.................................................169
luggage compartment fuse box..............177
passenger compartment fuse box..........173
er
ov
G Heated seats................................................56
R
Garage door opener.....................................46
nd
assistance................................................48
entry gate.................................................47
La
erase all programming.............................47
programming...........................................46
ar
programming a rolling code device..........47
gu
programming a single button...................47
Gearbox
Ja
automatic.................................................69
driver controls..............................................
©
emergency park release.........................194
fault..........................................................70
gear shift warning lamp............................36
hill descent...............................................70
manual.....................................................70
General program..........................................78
Global closing................................................8
Glow plugs
warning lamp...........................................35
Gradient release control
ascent brake release.................................81
R
Index
Grass/gravel/snow.......................................78
H
Handbook symbols........................................2
Handbrake....................................................73
Headlamps...................................................38
beam pattern............................................39
bulb change............................................149
bulb changing........................................147
bulb identification...................................148
bulb specification...................................203
condensation............................................39
15
daytime running lamps.............................38
20
driver controls..............................................
driving abroad..........................................39
d
high beam warning lamp..........................36
ite
levelling....................................................39
m
removal..................................................148
washers....................................................43
Li
xenon.....................................................148
Head restraints.............................................15
Heated screens............................................56
Heated steering wheel..................................16
Heating and ventilation...........................54–55
auto setting..............................................55
driver controls..............................................
fuel burning heater...................................56
heated seats.............................................56
manual.....................................................54
timed climate............................................56
Hill descent control......................................80
brake release control................................81
brake temperature....................................81
operation..................................................80
selecting...................................................80
system fault..............................................81
warning lamp...........................................37
warning messages...................................81
Home (navigation).....................................116
Homelink......................................................46
assistance................................................48
erase all programming.............................47
gate/door opener......................................47
225
L
Index
programming...........................................46
programming a single button...................47
programming the garage door opener.....46
rolling code device programming.............47
I controls..................................................126
Ignition
rolling re-start..........................................66
switching on.............................................66
Indicators warning lamp..............................36
Information messages.................................34
Infotainment
automatic station retune...........................89
CD loading................................................84
DAB radio
settings.................................................91
stations.................................................92
DAB radio controls...................................90
full screen view......................................100
media player controls...............................99
er
portable media
ov
changing...............................................98
connecting devices...............................95
R
connecting multiple devices.................96
nd
connections..........................................95
controls................................................93
La
pairing..................................................97
playing..................................................96
ar
radio controls...........................................88
gu
sound settings..........................................83
touch screen
Ja
audio/video controls.............................82
care......................................................52
©
extra features........................................53
home menu..........................................51
operating..............................................52
settings.................................................52
setup....................................................52
Infotainment (Standard)
adaptive volume control.........................127
alternative frequencies...........................129
automatic station retune.........................128
bass and treble setting...........................127
cancelling an announcement..................129
226
CD player................................................132
CD repeat and shuffle.............................133
CD track selection..................................132
clock settings.........................................136
connecting portable media devices........133
DAB messages.......................................132
DAB radio...............................................130
DAB radio ensemble seek.......................130
DAB radio manual tuning.......................131
DAB radio presets..................................130
DAB service list......................................131
15
loading a CD...........................................132
20
MP3 files playing....................................136
news information...................................129
d
pairing a mobile phone...........................134
ite
portable media.......................................133
radio preset buttons...............................128
m
radio station autostore...........................127
Li
radio station lock....................................128
servicelink..............................................131
switching off traffic information.............129
telephone...............................................134
telephone operation................................135
tone settings..........................................127
traffic announcement volume.................129
traffic information..................................129
Instrument panel..................................31, 158
display units.............................................33
fuel range.................................................33
lamp test..................................................34
menu........................................................31
driving features....................................31
instrument display................................31
trip computer........................................31
vehicle set-up.......................................31
warning lamps..........................................34
warning messages...................................32
Intelligent stop/start
activating..................................................68
deactivating..............................................68
Intelligent stop/start warning lamp..............36
Interior cleaning.........................................157
airbag covers..........................................158

Interior lamps..............................................40
bulb changing........................................147
bulb specification...................................203
types........................................................40
Interior locking...............................................9
ISOFIX anchor points...................................22
ISOFIX installation........................................23
J after off-road driving..............................156
Jump starting
connecting a starting aid........................166
connecting jump leads...........................165
L
Label locations...........................................197
Lamps..........................................................38
bulb changing........................................147
bulb replacement....................................149
bulb specification...................................203
condensation............................................39
er
test...........................................................34
ov
TPMS warning lamp.................................36
warning lamps..........................................34
R
xenon headlamps...................................148
nd
Leather cleaning.........................................157
Licence plate bulb......................................153
La
Licensing
audio/video.........................................84, 86
ar
Lighting
gu
interior lamps locations............................40
Load securing..............................................60
Ja
Loadspace cover..........................................60
Loadspace floor
©
reversible cover........................................61
Locking
door locks and release levers.....................9
double locking............................................8
drive away..................................................6
global closing.............................................8
mislock.......................................................9
single.........................................................8
Locking wheel nuts....................................192
Low oil pressure warning lamp....................34
R
Index
Lubricants specifications...........................199
Luggage compartment
anchor points...........................................60
loadspace cover.................................60–61
loadspace floor.........................................61
M
Maintenance
arduous driving conditions.....................142
brake fluid level......................................161
bulb changing................................147–148
15
bulb specification...................................203
20
capacities...............................................200
changing a fuse......................................170
d
checking tyre pressure after a repair......188
ite
cleaning
m
exterior...............................................156
interior................................................157
Li
leather................................................157
seat belts............................................157
sensors and cameras.........................156
under body.........................................156
closing the bonnet..................................145
daily checks............................................142
diesel particulate filter (DPF)..................143
engine compartment..............................146
engine compartment fuse box................171
engine coolant level................................160
engine oil level.......................................159
fuel system.............................................144
fuse box (passenger compartment).......173
jump starting..........................................166
label locations........................................197
lubricants and fluid specifications..........199
luggage compartment fuse box..............177
number plate bulb..................................153
oil top up................................................159
power steering fluid level.......................162
smart key battery.......................................7
tyre repair kit..........................................186
tyre repair procedure..............................187
using a starting aid.................................166
washer fluid level...................................163
227
L
Index
washer jets.............................................147
weekly checks........................................142
Manual seats................................................10
Map............................................................117
auto zoom..............................................114
split screen.............................................113
Message centre display units.......................33
Methanol....................................................137
Mirrors
dip when reversing...................................45
driver controls..............................................
exterior mirrors........................................44
Misfuel device............................................139
Motorway entry/exit
route setting...........................................117
MP3 files....................................................136
repeat and shuffle...................................136
Mpg...........................................................141
Mud ruts......................................................78
N
er
ov
Navigation
Arabic language......................................119
R
automatic route learning........................115
nd
avoid points............................................115
destination entry....................................114
La
search area.........................................114
destination entry by postcode................116
ar
easy route..............................................115
gu
emergency contacts...............................117
favourite locations..................................116
Ja
home location........................................116
legals..............................................122–125
©
licence terms..................................123–124
licensing.........................................123–125
map........................................................117
auto zoom..........................................114
split screen.........................................113
menu......................................................111
motorway entry/exit selection................117
off-road
new route...........................................121
route options......................................121
routes.................................................121
228
selecting compass view......................122
using a stored route...........................121
operating................................................109
overview.................................................109
points of interest (POI)...................117–118
categories/sub-categories..................118
search.................................................118
previous destinations.............................117
quick POI selection.................................116
restore defaults......................................116
screen modes.........................................113
start guidance........................................115
15
TMC...............................................119–120
20
icons...................................................119
voice commands....................................103
d
voice guidance.......................................116
ite
warranty disclaimer................................124
News information
m
standard audio RDS...............................129
Li
Number plate bulb.....................................153
O
Occupant safety
child seat tether straps.............................24
cleaning seat belts..................................157
recommended child seats........................22
seat belt pre-tensioners............................19
seat belt reminder warning.......................19
seat belt safety.........................................18
seat belts warning lamp...........................35
using seat belts........................................17
Octane rating..............................................137
petrol......................................................137
Off-road driving
cleaning after..........................................156
general program.......................................78
grass/gravel/snow....................................78
mud ruts..................................................78
navigation...............................................121
new route...........................................121
route options......................................121
selecting compass view......................122
using a stored route...........................121
override options.......................................79

recovery.................................................194
sand program...........................................78
terrain response.......................................78
training courses.......................................78
wading.....................................................79
Oil
engine oil specification...........................159
poisonous fluids.....................................144
specification...........................................199
top up.....................................................159
used engine oil.......................................144
Opening the bonnet....................................144
Oversteer.....................................................71
Overview
driver controls..............................................
Owner maintenance...................................142
P controls....................................................93
Paddle shift..................................................70
Pairing
er
via the phone..........................................105
ov
Pairing a phone..........................................106
Park assist
R
cleaning sensors and cameras...............156
nd
Parking aids
cleaning sensors and cameras...............156
La
operating..................................................74
rear camera..............................................75
ar
system fault..............................................75
gu
Parking brake...............................................73
warning lamp...........................................34
Ja
Park position emergency release...............194
Parts..........................................................155
©
Passenger compartment fuse box..............173
Perimeter alarm.............................................8
Petrol
fuel types................................................137
Petrol consumption....................................141
Petrol filler flap...........................................139
Phone
Bluetooth compatibility..........................105
call volume.............................................108
change the phone...................................106
icons......................................................106
R
Index
overview.................................................104
pairing a mobile.....................................134
pairing via the phone..............................105
pairing via the touch screen...................106
phonebook.............................................108
safety.....................................................105
standard audio.......................................135
standard audio system...........................134
steering wheel controls..........................107
Points of interest (POI)..............................117
my POI...................................................118
search....................................................118
15
Portable media
20
changing device.......................................98
connecting devices...........................95, 133
d
connecting multiple devices.....................96
ite
connections..............................................95
m
MP3 file playing.....................................136
Li
MP3 files repeat and shuffle...................136
pairing......................................................97
pairing a device......................................134
playing.....................................................96
standard audio.......................................133
Portable media controls
standard audio.......................................126
Postcode
destination entry....................................116
Power steering
fluid
specification.......................................162
fluid level................................................162
Preset buttons
storing a radio station............................128
Pressure checking (tyres)
checking after a repair............................188
Pressures
tyres.......................................................179
Previous destination..................................117
Programming the timed climate...................57
Punctured tyres..........................................180
Puncture repair kit.....................................186
instructions for use................................186
repair procedure.....................................187
229
L
Index
safety.....................................................186
Q parking aids..............................................75
Quick POI selection....................................116
R folding and raising...................................14
Radio
automatic station retune...........................89
controls....................................................88
DAB
settings.................................................91
stations.................................................92
DAB controls............................................90
Radio (Standard)........................................130
adaptive volume control.........................127
alternative frequencies...........................129
automatic station retune.........................128
bass and treble setting...........................127
cancelling an announcement..................129
controls..................................................126
er
DAB ensemble seek................................130
ov
DAB messages.......................................132
DAB radio manual tuning.......................131
R
DAB radio presets..................................130
nd
DAB service list......................................131
news information...................................129
La
preset buttons........................................128
station autostore....................................127
ar
station lock.............................................128
gu
switching off traffic information.............129
traffic announcement volume.................129
Ja
traffic information..................................129
Radio data system (RDS)
©
auto retune.............................................128
Radio data system auto retune.....................89
Radio frequency regulations......................205
Rain sensor..................................................43
RDS
news information...................................129
switching off traffic information.............129
TMC
icons...................................................119
overview.............................................119
230
traffic information..................................129
Rear camera
Rear fog lamps warning lamp......................36
Rear seats
Rear window blind.......................................49
Recording
event data...............................................196
service data............................................196
Recovery
off-road..................................................194
15
towing eyes............................................193
20
towing on four wheels....................194–195
transmission park release......................194
d
Refuelling
ite
diesel......................................................138
diesel fuel sulphur content.....................138
m
ethanol...................................................137
Li
fuel filler flap..........................................139
methanol................................................137
MTBE.....................................................138
octane rating..........................................137
petrol......................................................137
running out of fuel..................................138
safety precautions..................................137
Regional mode...........................................128
Reminder (seat belt)....................................19
Remote control
driving position memory..........................13
single locking.............................................8
smart key battery.......................................7
system transmitters...............................204
Replacement tyres.....................................180
Resetting the windows...............................155
Restarting the engine while moving.............66
Restore navigation default settings............116
Restricted seat travel...................................12
Reverse parking aids....................................74
system fault..............................................75
Rolling re-start.............................................66
Rolling roads..............................................143
Route.........................................................114
favourite locations..................................116

favourites details....................................116
Running out of fuel....................................138
S auto zoom..........................................114
Safety
child safety locks......................................20
cleaning seat belts..................................157
fuel and refuelling...................................137
seat belt pre-tensioners............................19
seat belt reminder warning.......................19
seat belts..................................................18
seat belts warning lamp...........................35
seats for larger children...........................25
sitting correctly........................................12
TPMS pressure compensation...............182
tyre care.................................................179
tyre pressures........................................179
used engine oil.......................................144
using seat belts........................................17
using the telephone................................105
er
Safety in the garage
ov
battery precautions................................143
electrical components............................143
R
engine fans.............................................143
nd
exhaust gases........................................143
hot components.....................................143
La
jacking....................................................143
Sand program..............................................78
ar
Satellite navigation
gu
Arabic language......................................119
automatic route learning........................115
Ja
avoid points............................................115
cancel guidance......................................116
©
compass view........................................122
coordinates entry...................................117
dealer locations......................................118
destination entry....................................114
search area.........................................114
destination entry by postcode................116
easy route..............................................115
emergency contacts...............................117
favourite locations..................................116
home location........................................116
legals..............................................122–125
R
Index
licence terms..................................123–124
licensing.........................................123–125
map........................................................117
split screen.........................................113
menu......................................................111
motorway entry/exit selection................117
off-road
route entry..........................................121
route options......................................121
routes.................................................121
operating................................................109
15
overview.................................................109
20
points of interest (POI)...................117–118
categories...........................................118
d
search.................................................118
ite
previous destinations.............................117
quick POI selection.................................116
m
restore defaults......................................116
Li
screen modes.........................................113
start guidance........................................115
stored route loading...............................121
TMC...............................................119–120
icons...................................................119
voice commands....................................103
voice guidance.......................................116
warranty disclaimer................................124
Screen modes............................................113
Screens (heated)..........................................56
Screen settings
screensaver..............................................52
theme.......................................................52
time out period.........................................52
volume pop-up.........................................52
Screen wash
check......................................................163
specification...........................................199
topping up..............................................163
Search area (navigation)............................114
Seat belts.............................................17, 157
adjusting..................................................17
checks......................................................19
pre-tensioners..........................................19
reminder warning.....................................19
231
L
Index
safety.......................................................18
warning lamp...........................................35
Seats
child restraint check list...........................22
child seat positioning...............................21
child seats................................................20
child seat tether straps.............................24
cleaning seat belts..................................157
electric front.............................................11
head restraints.........................................15
heated......................................................56
ISOFIX installation....................................23
manual front.............................................10
position memory......................................13
rear seat folding and raising.....................14
recommended child seats........................22
restricted seat travel.................................12
seat belts warning lamp...........................35
sitting correctly........................................12
Securing luggage.........................................60
Security..........................................................8
er
alarm......................................................142
ov
closing mislock..........................................9
R
perimeter alarm..........................................8
single locking.............................................8
nd
Selecting HDC..............................................80
La
Selecting valet mode....................................53
Servicing
ar
airbags.....................................................28
data recording........................................196
gu
Servicing requirements
Ja
interval indicator....................................142
Setting a timed climate program..................57
©
Settings menu..............................................31
display units.............................................33
Side lamps warning lamp.............................36
Sitting correctly............................................12
Smart key
battery changing........................................7
driving position memory..........................13
single locking.............................................8
transmitters............................................204
Snow chains..............................................182
Sound settings.............................................83
232
Specifications
capacities...............................................200
dimensions.............................................202
engine....................................................198
ethanol...................................................137
fluids......................................................199
fuel tank capacity...................................140
label locations........................................197
lubricants...............................................199
methanol................................................137
MTBE.....................................................138
weight....................................................201
15
Speed-dependent wipers..............................42
20
Speedometer................................................31
Split screen map........................................113
d
SRS..............................................................26
ite
airbag warning lamp.................................36
Stability control
m
DSC..........................................................71
Li
switching on.........................................71
switching off............................................71
Starting after a collision.............................196
Starting the engine.......................................65
keyless start backup.................................66
Start navigation guidance...........................115
Steep slopes
selecting HDC...........................................80
using HDC................................................80
Steering column
lock............................................................6
vehicle recovery.........................................6
Steering wheel
adjusting..................................................16
heated......................................................16
Steering wheel controls
telephone...............................................107
Stop/start
activating..................................................68
deactivating..............................................68
Storage compartments................................58
cup holders..............................................58
front cubby box........................................58
rear armrest.............................................58

Storage compartments areas
glove box..................................................58
Sun blind......................................................49
Sunroof
blind operation.........................................49
operation..................................................49
reset.......................................................155
Supplementary restraint system (SRS)
airbag deployment....................................28
airbag locations........................................26
airbags maintenance..............................142
airbag warning lamp...........................28, 36
curtain airbags.........................................26
front airbags.............................................26
side airbags..............................................26
Switching off the engine..............................65
Switching off traffic information
standard audio RDS...............................129
Switching on the ignition.............................66
T TMC...........................................................119
er
ov
Tachometer..................................................31
Tailgate..........................................................4
R
Technical specifications
nd
brake fluid..............................................199
capacities...............................................200
La
dimensions.............................................202
engine....................................................198
ar
engine coolant........................................199
gu
engine oil................................................199
radio frequency regulations....................205
Ja
washer fluid............................................199
weights...................................................201
©
Telephone..................................................104
Bluetooth compatibility..........................105
call volume.............................................108
change the phone...................................106
compatibility list.....................................105
hands free operation..............................104
icons......................................................106
overview.................................................104
pairing....................................................106
via the phone......................................105
phonebook.............................................108
R
Index
safety.....................................................105
standard audio system...........................134
steering wheel controls..........................107
Telephone operation
standard audio.......................................135
Telephone pairing
standard audio.......................................134
Terrain response..........................................78
general program.......................................78
grass/gravel/snow....................................78
mud ruts..................................................78
off-road driving........................................78
15
override options.......................................79
20
program selections..................................78
sand program...........................................78
d
system difficulties....................................79
ite
wading.....................................................79
Tether anchor points....................................24
m
Timed climate..............................................56
Li
programming...........................................57
Tone settings
standard audio.......................................127
Touch screen.............................................158
audio/video controls.................................82
button feedback........................................52
changing portable media device...............98
clock.........................................................52
connecting multiple portable media
devices.....................................................96
connecting portable media devices..........95
DAB radio controls...................................90
DVD player controls.................................99
extra features...........................................53
fuel burning heater...................................56
heated seats.............................................56
home menu..............................................51
inhibited display.....................................100
language selection....................................52
operating..................................................52
portable media
controls................................................93
portable media connections.....................95
portable media pairing.............................97
233
L
Index
portable media playing.............................96
radio controls...........................................88
screen settings.........................................52
setup........................................................52
shortcuts..................................................52
system settings........................................52
telephone
pairing................................................106
phonebook.........................................108
touch screen care.....................................52
valet mode................................................53
video player controls................................99
volume presets.........................................52
Tow bar
mounting points.......................................64
Towing
a trailer.....................................................63
checks
breakaway cable...................................62
calculating weight.................................62
essential checks...................................62
er
lights....................................................62
ov
nose weight limit..................................62
R
tow ball.................................................62
eyes........................................................193
nd
on four wheels.......................................194
La
tow bar dimensions..................................64
tow bar mounting points..........................64
ar
trailer electrical connections.....................63
weights.....................................................63
gu
Traction control
Ja
switching off............................................71
switching on.............................................71
©
Traffic announcements
volume setting........................................129
Traffic information
standard audio RDS...............................129
Traffic message channel (TMC).................120
Trailer
electrical connections...............................63
towing weights.........................................63
Trailer direction indicators warning lamp.....37
Transmission
automatic.................................................69
234
driver controls..............................................
emergency park release.........................194
fault..........................................................70
gear shift warning lamp............................36
hill descent...............................................70
manual.....................................................70
Transmission park release.........................194
Transmitters
smart key...............................................204
Trip computer..............................................32
average speed..........................................32
fuel consumption.....................................32
15
fuel range.................................................33
20
reset.........................................................32
trip distance.............................................33
d
Tyre pressure checking after a repair.........188
ite
Tyre pressure monitoring system (TPMS)..184
full size replacements.............................185
m
tyre care.................................................179
Li
valves.....................................................180
warning lamp...........................................36
Tyre repair kit
checking pressures................................188
repair procedure.....................................187
safety information..................................186
using......................................................186
Tyres
age degradation......................................182
changing................................................185
flat spots................................................182
full size replacements.............................185
important information............................192
Indian regulations..................................183
pressures...............................................179
punctured...............................................180
repair kit.................................................186
repair kit use..........................................186
repair procedure.....................................187
replacements..........................................180
snow chains...........................................182
speed ratings..........................................179
temporary use spare..............................185
TPMS.....................................................184
warning lamp........................................36

TPMS pressure compensation...............182
tyre care.................................................179
tyre repair safety....................................186
tyre wall markings..................................178
use of spare tyre....................................192
valves.....................................................180
wall markings.........................................178
winter.....................................................181
U Vehicle testing on rolling roads..................143
Under body cleaning..................................156
Under bonnet covers..................................147
Understeer...................................................71
Unlocking.......................................................9
all doors.....................................................4
driver’s door...............................................4
global opening............................................4
mode..........................................................4
multi point entry.........................................4
single point entry.......................................4
er
USB devices
ov
connecting multiple devices.....................96
Used engine oil..........................................144
R
Using cruise control.....................................77
nd
Using the parking aids.................................74
Using the spare tyre
La
important information............................192
ar
V Volume
gu
Valet mode...................................................53
deselecting...............................................53
Ja
Vehicle alarm.............................................142
Vehicle battery
©
connecting jump leads...........................165
effects of disconnection.........................168
replacing................................................167
warning symbols....................................164
Vehicle battery care....................................164
Vehicle build date.......................................197
Vehicle cleaning
after driving off-road..............................156
airbag covers..........................................158
interior...................................................157
R
Index
under body.............................................156
washer jets.............................................147
Vehicle data recording...............................196
Vehicle recovery
off-road..................................................194
steering column lock..................................6
towing eyes............................................193
towing on four wheels....................194–195
transmission park release......................194
Video media player
controls....................................................99
15
full screen view......................................100
20
inhibited display.....................................100
VIN number................................................197
d
Voice control..............................................101
ite
navigation POI categories.......................103
recognising your voice...........................102
m
settings
Li
command list........................................52
operating guide....................................52
preferences...........................................52
voicetags..............................................52
voice training........................................52
training the system.................................102
tutorial....................................................102
voicetags................................................102
Voice guidance...........................................116
telephone...............................................108
W
Warning lamps.......................................34, 36
ABS..........................................................35
airbags...............................................28, 36
battery charge..........................................34
brake..................................................34–35
critical warning message..........................34
cruise control...........................................37
diesel glow plugs.....................................35
DSC active................................................35
engine/transmission.................................35
external temperature................................36
gear shift warning lamp............................36
235
L
Index
HDC..........................................................37
headlamp high beam................................36
indicators.................................................36
intelligent stop/start (green).....................36
lamp test..................................................34
low oil pressure........................................34
parking brake...........................................34
rear fog lamps..........................................36
seat belt....................................................35
side lights.................................................36
trailer direction indicators........................37
tyre pressure monitoring system
(TPMS).....................................................36
Washer jets................................................147
Washer reservoir
capacity..................................................200
Washers.......................................................41
fluid specification...................................163
fluid top up.............................................163
headlamps................................................43
Weights
er
gross vehicle weights.............................201
ov
roof load.................................................201
R
roof rack weight.....................................201
saloon....................................................201
nd
sportbrake..............................................201
La
tow ball/hitch............................................63
towing......................................................63
ar
vehicle weights.......................................201
Wheel changing
gu
important information............................192
Ja
locking wheel nuts.................................192
recommended process...........................190
©
safety warnings......................................191
tilt sensor...............................................190
use of spare tyre....................................192
Wheels and tyres
age degradation......................................182
changing a tyre.......................................185
checking the pressures after a repair.....188
flat spots................................................182
full size replacements.............................185
Indian regulations..................................183
pressures...............................................179
236
punctured...............................................180
puncture repair.......................................186
puncture repair safety............................186
repair kit.................................................186
repair kit use..........................................186
repair procedure.....................................187
replacements..........................................180
snow chains...........................................182
temporary use spare..............................185
TPMS.....................................................184
TPMS pressure compensation...............182
TPMS warning lamp.................................36
15
tyre care.................................................179
20
tyre speed ratings...................................179
tyre wall markings..................................178
d
valves.....................................................180
ite
winter tyres............................................181
Wheel spin...................................................71
m
Windows
Li
anti-trap protection..................................50
driver controls..............................................
operation..................................................49
reset.......................................................155
sunroof blind............................................49
sunroof operation.....................................49
sunroof reset..........................................155
Windscreens (heated)..................................56
Winter tyres...............................................181
Wipers and washers.....................................41
driver controls..............................................
fluid level................................................163
rain sensor...............................................43
speed-dependent mode............................42
winter park position.................................43
X
Xenon headlamps......................................148
 ©
Ja
gu
ar
La
nd
R
ov
er
Li
m
ite
d
20
15

237
R
L
Controls overview

DRIVER CONTROLS 32. Exterior mirror adjustment 44.

1. Map reading lamp switch 40. 33. Window switches 49.
2. Main interior lamp switch 40. 34. Rear window isolator 49.
3. Passenger airbag warning lamp 28. 35. Interior illumination control.
4. Sunroof switches 49.
5. Lighting/direction indicator/Trip computer
38.
6. Audio controls 82.
7. Instrument panel, warning lamps, and
Message centre 34.

15
8. Message centre control. 31.

20
9. Wiper/washer controls 41.

d
10. Engine START/STOP 66. ite
11. Audio system and controls 82.
m
12. Touch screen. 51.
Li

13. CD eject. 82.

er

14. Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) off 71.

ov

15. Hill Descent Control (HDC) 80.

R

16. Central locking, lock.

nd

17. Central locking, unlock.

18. Parking aid switch. 74.
La

19. Intelligent stop/start. 68.

ar

20. Hazard warning lamps switch.

gu

21. Climate control 54.

Ja

22. Air Conditioning (A/C) on/off 54.

23. Electric Parking Brake (EPB) 73.
©

24. Terrain response 78.

25. Gear selector 69.
26. Climate control recirculation on/off switch
54.
27. Heated steering wheel. 16.
28. Telephone and voice recognition 104.
29. Horn.
30. Steering column adjustment lever 16.
31. Cruise control switches 77.

238
©
Ja
gu
ar
La
nd
R
ov
er
Li
m
ite
d
20
15
R